The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Does the Number of Followers Determine How Much Money Your Business Will Make? - Episode 186

Thu, 17 Apr 2025 06:00:00 -0300

More followers won’t grow your business if you don’t know who they are or why they’re there.

May Yeo Silvers is setting the record straight on one of the biggest social media myths in the event planning world: follower count does not equal business success. So what does matter? Who’s following you, why they’re interested, and what kind of connection you’re willing to build.

Are your followers potential clients? Referral partners? Or just passing through? May shares how to spot the difference and why engaging with the right people whether through a simple thank-you message or a thoughtful question can lead to real opportunities. This episode is packed with reminders for anyone who’s tired of chasing numbers and ready to focus on strategy.

May also talks about the value of stepping outside of social media and building a more well-rounded marketing approach. If you’re serious about growing your business, consistency, clarity, and connection matter far more than your stats. Want to go deeper? May offers her Business Kickstart Bundle, a 24-course program designed to help EVENTrepreneurs strengthen their sales, marketing, and mindset. Learn more about it here: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Quotes

• “The number of followers does not dictate how much business you ultimately do.”

• “You need to understand who exactly is following you and why they are following you. The why is so important.”

• “This photographer, when they are thinking of who to refer to their clients who are looking for a wedding planner, you are on their radar because they follow you and you consistently show up with great content.”

• “So you could have a very small following but if you put in the time and effort to work on who is following you and who you should follow, you are going to see significant results in the amount of leads and referral that you’re going to get.”

• “Social media is the easiest lift. It's free, and it only takes up sweat equity time.”

Links

An effective marketing strategy consists of more than 1 way to market yourself. Once you find out what is working, you stick to it and do more of it. Simultaneously, you MUST continue to do more than that 1 marketing outreach activity. You do NOT want to put all your eggs in 1 basket.

A savvy business owner will always have more than one marketing strategy. If you are wondering what other marketing activities you should incorporate into your marketing strategy. Check out the Business Kickstart Bundle I created specifically for event planners, designers and decorators!

Inside the 24 courses bundle, I dedicated an entire module on Marketing. The strategies mentioned in the bundle are the same strategies I apply in my day to day event planning business and it has brought me tremendous success and consistent revenue. Click on this link to check it out!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Why Being “Consistent” Is Not Enough to Grow Your Business - Episode 185

Thu, 10 Apr 2025 06:00:00 -0300

Consistency alone won’t move the needle if your actions aren’t aligned with what actually works.

In this episode, May Yeo Silvers unpacks why so many business owners, especially in the events industry, get frustrated when their consistent efforts don’t lead to growth. Are you showing up every week on social media but not seeing engagement? Are you attending networking events without landing new clients? May shares why that happens and what to do about it. She walks through how to evaluate what’s working, where your audience is paying attention, and how to shift your strategy without abandoning your discipline. The habit of showing up stays the same but the way you do it needs to evolve. If you’ve been wondering why your consistency hasn’t paid off, this episode has the answer!

Quotes

• “So you would think that because I’m posting consistently, I should have a steady growth in the number of followers, correct?... No.” (03:36 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to make sure that your consistency is put into the best use, creating the biggest impact.” (05:12 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Do not change your consistency. You are still going to be consistently taking actions, but you are going to change what actions you are taking and executing in order to yield better results.” (06:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Interestingly, posts that talk about mindset have the least engagement. That means the audience that I'm attracting are still not focusing or understanding how important mindset is… They have not yet connected the fact that after you learn the ‘what’ and the ‘how,’ the thing that is gonna help you be consistent to execute the ‘what’ and the ‘how’ is the mindset.” (07:44 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “What is the difference between showing up consistently and showing up consistently doing what you need to do at that stage of your business?” (11:10 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Don't feel bad if you feel that your consistency has gone to “waste.” Being able to stay consistent is a HUGE strength and positive attribute that every entrepreneur needs.

Now that you have mastered the difficult part, the easy part is tweaking the actual actions you need to take and stay consistent taking the “newly improved” actions. I assure you, results WILL come.

To help you stay motivated and make the right moves, follow me on these platforms for mindset shifts, productivity hacks plus business strategies!

YouTube:

https://www.youtube.com/@mayyeosilvers

podcast link: The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur

https://podcasts.apple.com/no/podcast/the-unstoppable-eventrepreneur/id1591114236

IG: https://www.instagram.com/mayyeosilvers

TikTok:

https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group:

https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Facebook:

www.facebook.com/mayyeosilvers

Linkedin:

http://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The “Hidden” Event Costs - Episode 184

Thu, 03 Apr 2025 06:00:00 -0300

Most event budgets miss the mark because no one talks about the hidden fees that quietly drain your client’s wallet… and your value.

May Yeo Silvers breaks down the overlooked costs that can quietly inflate an event budget, from taxable service charges to outdoor setup fees and AV vendor penalties. She shares real examples—including a $1,000 food and beverage minimum that turned into $1,375—and shows how venues often leave out key details unless you know exactly what to ask.

This episode gives planners the tools to spot red flags, educate their clients, and position themselves as strategic partners, not just executors. If you want to build trust, quote fees with confidence, and make smarter budget decisions, this one’s essential listening.

Quotes

• “When you are talking to your potential client or client about event budget, I always say, whatever they are paying to something else means they are taking away money from paying you.” (01:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Is your service charge taxable? And I will guarantee you almost 50%, if not 75% of the venues, if not 100% of the venues that I work with, and I do events all around the country, the service charge is taxable.” (05:34 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You always have to ask for the banquet menus and then look at the pricing based on how many people are coming and the type of food that you want to order and then come up with the actual number how much you’re going to spend.” (09:16 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You are being an event strategist—helping your client plan their budget better. That is an intangible value you’ve added to yourself, which will make the client see your value more clearly and will reciprocate by paying you a higher fee.” (17:30 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

There is SO much to learn about event planning. BUT what is going to separate you from your competitors is really understanding the nuances of event planning, such as the little titbits I shared on this episode that will have a HUGE impact on your client's event budget which then translates to having more funds handy to make the event even more spectacular.

If you want to stand out from the crowd, follow me on the different platforms listed on the show notes for more event strategies and "event insiders" knowledge that your clients are going to love you for!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

When Should You Add On a New Service Offering - Episode 183

Thu, 27 Mar 2025 06:00:00 -0300

Adding a new service might sound exciting, but is it actually a smart move for your business?

In this episode, May Yeo Silvers unpacks what it really means to expand your offer suite, and how to do it without losing money, energy, or clarity. She challenges the idea of pivoting just because you’re bored or burned out and shares the questions every business owner should ask before making a shift. Is this new service aligned with the clients you already serve? Does it build on what you’re already great at? Will it actually pay off?

May draws from real conversations with event pros who are tempted to branch out too far from what’s already working. She explains why misalignment can confuse your audience and dilute your brand, and how to grow with intention instead. May also shares how she added a new service in her own business, only after making sure it leveraged her strengths and delivered meaningful results.

If you’ve ever felt the urge to shake things up in your business, this episode will help you pause, reassess, and move forward with a lot more clarity.

Quotes

• “I’m not saying not to add on new services, but you have to understand why you’re adding on the new services. And does the money make sense? Does the financial decision make sense to add on this new service?” (11:19 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You should only add on your offer when you have a very clear idea that you no longer want to do whatever you’re doing. Clean slate, rebrand, and start talking to a new audience.” (15:04 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Is it going to leverage my existing skills or do I have to learn a completely new skill set, talk to a completely new market? How long is it going to take me to learn and execute and make back the same amount of money that I used to make? You have to ask yourself that.” (15:27 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You cannot take on a new service because you dislike something. You can, but your timing has to be right. You have to do both at the same time so that you don't sacrifice whatever you're already making even though you hate it.” (15:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “At the end of the day, if you add on a new service, it has to have sustainability and it needs to continue to bring you joy.” (17:40 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you have no idea where to begin when thinking about starting an event planning business, check out my book, The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur. Inside the book, I addressed topics like when to quit your job to become a full time CEO, how to prepare yourself financially, mentally and emotionally, marketing and sales strategies, and rookie mistakes to avoid when starting and growing your business. Click the link https://www.amazon.com/Unstoppable-EVENTrepreneur-TM-Profitable-Business/dp/1961347105/ to grab your copy on Amazon today!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Event Budgeting 101- Episode 182

Thu, 20 Mar 2025 06:00:00 -0300

Every event has a budget. But are you spending in the right places?

May Yeo Silvers pulls back the curtain on event budgeting, tackling the common misconception that adjusting your budget automatically changes how many people you can host. Instead of letting numbers dictate your event, she urges planners to start with the bigger picture: What’s the real purpose of this event? What kind of experience do you want attendees to have?

May lays out a smart, structured approach to budgeting: separating must-haves from nice-to-haves, understanding both financial and emotional ROI, and making intentional choices about venue, timing, and costs. From peak season pricing to the trade-offs between food, decor, and AV production, May shares insights to help planners maximize their budget without compromising impact.

With examples (including lessons from her own wedding), she makes the case for spending wisely, not just more. Whether you’re planning a corporate event, a retreat, or a celebration, this episode will change the way you think about budgeting and help you create an experience that truly delivers.

Quotes

• “Every time you spend money for an event, on all the different elements of the event, you have to ask yourself: What am I going to get out of this? What are my attendees going to get out of this?” (21:24 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “What is the most important thing that you want people to take away from your event? What is the goal of having this event? Who do I need to invite to this event in order to achieve the goal of me hosting this event?” (23:46 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You’re dealing with a client who wants everything but they do not have the money to pay for everything. So you need to manage expectations, you need to manage numbers, you need to negotiate. You need to negotiate with your vendors so that you can get the most for your buck.” (25:22 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “In order to be an excellent event planner, an event planner who’s able to deliver as much as possible for your client’s events vision, you need to understand the numbers, you need to understand what you can negotiate, not to negotiate, you need to understand the questions to ask your client to find out what they really want from the event in order to determine what are the things that you need to spend money on and advise your client to spend money on this because these are the things that are going to create the experience that align with the end goal of why they want to host the event.” (25:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Want to add more tips and tricks into your event planning tool kit? Follow me on these various platforms:

Want to learn something new that's 30 mins or less while you are on the move? Subscribe to my Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast: https://podcasts.apple.com/no/podcast/the-unstoppable-eventrepreneur/id1591114236

Prefer to watch?

Subscribe to my youtube channel: https://www.youtube.com/@mayyeosilvers

Love to be on social media? Connect with me here:

Facebook:

www.facebook.com/mayyeosilvers

IG:
https://www.instagram.com/mayyeosilvers

TikTok:

https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

Linkedin:

http://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers

You are a reader? I got you covered? Grab my book, the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur here

https://www.amazon.com/Unstoppable-EVENTrepreneur-TM-Profitable-Business/dp/1961347105/

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

To Niche or Not to Niche - Episode 181

Thu, 13 Mar 2025 06:00:00 -0300

Should you niche down or keep your options open? It’s one of the biggest questions entrepreneurs face, and the answer isn’t as simple as you might hope.

May Yeo Silvers shares her own experience navigating this decision in the event planning industry. When she launched M2 Hospitality, she offered a full suite of services—event planning, design, and destination management. Over time, she refined her focus, zeroing in on in-person events for Fortune 500 companies and high-earning coaches. Was that the right move? Absolutely. But would it have worked if she had started there from day one? Probably not.

Many entrepreneurs worry that niching down too soon could limit opportunities. Others fear that offering too much will leave them feeling scattered. So how do you know which path to take? May breaks it down, encouraging listeners to experiment, pay attention to what truly excites them, and build a business that aligns with both their strengths and their long-term goals.

May also shares lessons from her coaching business, where she took the opposite approach—starting highly specialized before expanding her reach. The takeaway? There’s no one-size-fits-all strategy, but there is a way to make an intentional choice instead of a fearful one.

Quotes

• “When I first launched M2 Hospitality, I had different baskets of services and different baskets of revenue. I did not put all my eggs in one basket because I suffer from FOMO and I thought that it’s a good way for me to expose myself to all the different services that I know I’m very good at delivering and then eventually get a feel of what I really love to do.” (08:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “I don’t want to wake up just looking for money. I want to wake up doing what I really enjoy, which is event strategy, event planning.” (12:04 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “To niche or not to niche is an evolution. Don’t be too rigid about it. If you’re certain that you only want to focus on one thing, like weddings, and you have no interest in corporate events, children’s parties, or other social gatherings, then commit fully to that niche.” (17:27 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you’re offering a full suite of services instead of niching down, be clear in your messaging. There are clients who need exactly that. Don’t get caught up in worrying, ‘What if I’m not known for this?’ If you niche down, you might start second-guessing—’But I can also do this.’ That uncertainty can leave you stuck in the middle. So, pick a side. The best way to figure it out? Try everything first, then decide what you truly love doing.” (23:38 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

BEFORE you spend time thinking if you should niche down or not niche, you should FIRST be doing a self evaluation if you have the business skills and acumen to start and grow a business. This is probably the most forgotten step yet the most important part that every entrepreneur needs to consider before they even start thinking about anything else business related.

The good thing is that business fundamental skills and acumen could be learned and acquired overtime. To help you take the first step of making your dream of owning a business to reality, I have put together a Business Kickstart Bundle which you could use as a launchpad.

The bundle consists of 24 crucial learnings that every planner, designer or decorator needs for the WHAT and the HOW. There are videos and templates revolving around, pricing, sales, marketing, legalities, mindset and productivity hacks. Click this link to find out what the bundle includes and what other EVENTrepreneurs have to say about the 24 course Business Kickstart Bundle!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Why “Assigned Seatings” Are Used for Events - Episode 180

Thu, 06 Mar 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Assigned seating can make or break an event. Are you using it to your advantage?

May Yeo Silvers unpacks the strategy behind assigned seating, showing how a well-planned arrangement does more than keep things organized—it shapes conversations, builds connections, and even influences business outcomes. With over 20 years in the industry, May shares how different seating approaches, from general areas to carefully placed VIP tables, can transform an event’s flow and impact.

May also dives into the details that elevate an event, like color-coded place cards that make meal service seamless and tiered seating that adds exclusivity while driving ticket sales. When done right, these choices create a smoother experience and a sense of value that guests notice.

Whether you’re planning corporate events, weddings, or ticketed experiences, this episode will change the way you think about seating. May leaves listeners with a call to action, sharing insights from her book, “The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur,” a must-read for anyone looking to build a thriving event business.

Quotes

• “When it is an event that you want your sales team to be seated next to a particular potential client, you actually place where your salesperson is sitting, and then you place the potential client next to the salesperson instead of at the far end of the table.” (04:10 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “When you’re pricing your tickets, think about the perks that can help sell tickets at a higher price. Ideally, those perks should cost you little to nothing while adding significant value for attendees.” (09:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “So giving them the front row seats is not going to cost you anything, but it gives the social status, gives the first access, and it also gives a feel-good feeling to your attendees, those who bought those tickets, and they also have better seating. So all in all, it doesn’t cost you anything financially, but it costs the ticket holders. But they’re paying for it because they know they’re going to get all these perks, and they put value to those perks.” (09:38 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you are just starting out or you want to do some refinement of your business, check out the book, ‘The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur.’ It teaches you the strategy about how to build a business and also the mindset required, financial knowledge, social marketing knowledge, but it also talks about the industry, like the actual way to plan events as well.” (12:42 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for an "all in one" book that helps event planners gain more knowledge about event planning AND also provides a step by step guide on how to start and grow an event planning business, check out my book, The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur. Click the link to grab your copy!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Mistakes=GROWTH. The What, Why & How - Episode 179

Thu, 27 Feb 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Mistakes aren’t failures; they are signals pointing to deeper issues. May Yeo Silvers explores why simply recognizing a mistake isn’t enough. To break the cycle, you have to understand what led to it in the first place. She shares a story about her daughter struggling with a math problem, highlighting how assumptions and unchecked thought processes often cause repeated errors. The same patterns show up in business and life. Hiring out of desperation, investing in coaching but never applying the lessons, or choosing relationships that don’t align with long-term goals.

Instead of dismissing mistakes as bad decisions, May encourages a different approach. What if the real issue isn’t the mistake itself but how you respond to it? Are you evaluating the process behind your decisions or just reacting to the outcome? She challenges entrepreneurs to go beyond surface-level thinking and take ownership of their choices. Growth doesn’t come from avoiding mistakes; it comes from understanding them.

Quotes

• “If you don’t understand the root cause of your mistake, it will be very difficult to avoid making the same mistake.” (02:20 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Hiring is not a mistake. Hiring the wrong person is a mistake, so you must learn to differentiate what exactly is the true problem here.” (06:32 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Is it really a mistake, the act of investing in a coach or the act of buying a course, or how you utilize what you bought is a mistake because you did not show up, you did not do what you’re supposed to do?” (14:12 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “There’s never a perfect time to start a business. There’s a better time, but never a perfect time.” (18:05 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Sometimes a business owner may not equally be a good CEO. You may be a creative brain, but you may not be a good leader. Then perhaps it's time to seek help on how to become a better leader.” (22:49 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

One of the reasons why many of the EVENTrepreneurs are slow to launch or are constantly in "prep mode" is because they are afraid of making "mistakes".

Entrepreneurship is challenging enough, imagine not having a blueprint to show you the What and the How, no wonder these EVENTrepreneurs are afraid to take actions fearing the potential loss that comes in all kinds.

This is WHY I created the Business Kickstart Bundle! In the bundle, there are 24 courses focusing on all the business fundamentals like pricing, marketing, sales, legalities etc that are easy to consume in a day, accompanied by step by step instructions on how to implement what you learn!

Best part is, it is priced ONLY at $24, and that is NOT a pricing mistake because I want to make this bundle accessible to EVERY EVENTrepreneur out there. Click on this link to find out what comes with the bundle!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Business Finance Management 101 - Episode 178

Thu, 20 Feb 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Money moves fast in business, but without a solid plan, you could be spending when you should be investing—or worse, mismanaging the funds that keep your business running.

In this episode, May Yeo Silvers breaks down the essentials of business finance, from why every entrepreneur needs a dedicated business bank account to the smartest way to handle taxes without overpaying the IRS. She shares personal strategies for keeping transactions clean, managing client funds without costly mistakes, and making sure every dollar works toward growth.

How do you decide what to invest in, what to save, and what to spend? Tune in as May offers a practical approach to financial decisions that will keep your business strong.

Quotes

• “Every time you receive revenue from your business, you should put aside a certain percentage of that revenue to pay taxes—minimum 20%. The goal is to put aside enough but not so much that you don’t have enough capital left to invest back into your business.” (07:57 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you’re trying to build a business, capital is extremely important. You want to be able to have some form of extra money left to invest back into your business.” (11:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You have to be so clear how you are going to use that money and disperse the money. If not, you will see this money and you will immediately start thinking you have all this money that you can invest in your business at one particular time, and when a better opportunity comes for investment, then you do not have the money.” (24:25 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You have to prioritize which of these activities or investments is going to get you the fastest growth or alleviate the biggest pain in the butt for you.” (25:39 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

You can be the BEST planner/designer/decorator. You can be the BEST marketer and salesperson. BUT, if you are NOT GOOD in managing your BUSINESS FINANCE, you will constantly be cash strapped, or spending the funds on the wrong things at the wrong time.

I LOVE talking about money. On my social media platforms, I talked a lot about how your relationship with money could determine if you will have money or you will always be short. I talked about how your upbringing affects your money mindset, how your surroundings (place and people) can play a part in how you see money and use money.

I hate to see an entrepreneur making LOTS of money, but they can't seem to keep it so it is always a constant chase to make more money. Follow me on social media to learn more about how to make money, how to manage your business funds and how to invest your hard earned money to make more money!

Disclaimer: I am not a financial planner, tax attorney or CPA. All information I shared is purely based on my own experience on how I managed MY OWN business funds.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Measure the ROI of Your Business Investments - Episode 177

Thu, 13 Feb 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Most business owners spend money to grow, but how many actually track whether those investments are working? Are you making strategic decisions or just following what other event profs are investing in at the moment?

May Yeo Silvers breaks down how to measure return on investment across different business expenses, from networking events to software, coaching, and marketing. She explains the distinction between tangible and intangible returns—some deliver immediate financial results, while others, like knowledge or mindset shifts, take time to pay off.

Drawing from her experience at her own event planning company, M2 Hospitality, May shares how she strategically invests in relationships with high-end venues, tracks lead quality, and adjusts her spending based on conversion rates. She also discusses her own significant investments in business coaching, pointing out the importance of showing up, implementing what you learn, and setting clear milestones to assess success and ROI.

Whether you’re investing in tools, mentorship, or relationships, this episode will help you spend smarter and maximize your ROI.

Quotes

• “If they have given me a good amount of leads and I don’t close, then the problem is me.” (14:43 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to track your numbers in terms of your return on investment, where you’re spending your marketing dollars, and how much money you’re getting back by doing that.” (15:41 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You cannot invest with a scarcity mindset to say that, ‘I invest this much money, I’m going to squeeze every single drop.’” (18:10 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You must implement what you learn immediately. You cannot wait for the perfect moment to do everything right.” (20:33 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “As a CEO of your business, you must make clearer decisions on where to spend your money, when to spend your money, and how to calculate how much you have received in order to justify if you should continue to invest in that one marketing activity.” (30:16 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for a business course in the events field that requires MINIMAL investment of money and time to learn and yet receives a HUGE ROI, our $24 for 24 courses Business Kickstart Bundle is the ULTIMATE guide that not only gives you the overview of what to expect when starting and growing your business, the bundle also provides the WHAT and the HOW. Click on this link https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast to find out what it includes!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do You Know Your Objectives & ROI When Deciding Which Networking Events to Attend? - Episode 176

Thu, 06 Feb 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Most event planners fill their calendars with industry networking, but is that really the best way to grow your business?

May Yeo Silvers makes a case for being more strategic about where you invest your time, money, and energy, especially when it comes to networking. She shares why she doesn’t prioritize events filled with fellow planners and instead focuses on rooms where potential clients gather. For those trying to scale beyond six figures, May explains why high-level business conversations, financial strategy, and operational efficiency matter more than rehashing industry basics.

Are you networking in the right places, or just following the crowd? This episode will help you rethink your approach and make every connection count.

Quotes

• “When you are trying to grow your business, you have to decide what is the fastest path to take to get your brand out there. Based on where you are in your business and also in your life, you need to be so selective about how to spend your marketing dollars and also your time, especially if your business is a side hustle.” (00:53 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If I attend a networking event where I know other event planners will be, and I already have an idea of who will be there, I need to consider their level. If they are at the same stage as me or at a stage I’ve already surpassed in my business, then I won’t gain much from attending.” (08:29 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “When you spend time and money to travel to these events, what is the return on investment that you will get? Because when you attend these types of events, would that be a direct approach or direct contact with your potential clients? Most probably not because they are all industry people.” (17:22 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Before attending a networking event, establish your objective and determine the return on investment based on that goal.” (19:23 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

You don't have to attend networking events to get a good deal! If you are looking for a cost effective software to process a professional looking proposal, contract, invoice and to collect payments, I have something for you.

If you want robust software with all the bells and whistles, use my Honeybook affiliate link that gets you 30% off the first year of subscription, get a free trial and enjoy the discount when you are ready to sign up!

If you are just starting out and want something that is simple and easy to use but at the same time, you want to look professional, have the capability to process invoices and collect payments, check out Rock Paper Coin! Use my affiliate link to get a 60% discount on your first year subscription!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Biggest Rookie Mistake of All When Thinking to Start a Business - Episode 175

Thu, 30 Jan 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Talent and passion for your craft are great, but are they enough to build a thriving business?

In this episode, May Yeo Silvers explores the biggest mistake new entrepreneurs make: underestimating the passion, discipline, and resilience required to run and grow a successful business. With insights and relatable examples, she highlights the harsh realities of entrepreneurship, from the challenges of consistent marketing to navigating setbacks and rejections.

May also encourages aspiring business owners to reflect on a critical question: Are you truly prepared to embrace the mindset and effort it takes to create something sustainable? This episode offers perspective and actionable advice for anyone ready to move beyond their craft and step into the world of business with purpose.

Quotes

• “Your passion in starting, building, and growing your business where it’s going to allow you to find clients who will pay you so that you can actually be paid to play has to be so much more intense.” (05:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The passion you have and the knowledge that you have, it’s great. It’s what you need to do service delivery. But the other side of the equation is your passion to run a business.” (04:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The rookie mistake is believing that having the craft alone is enough to start, run, and grow a successful business.” (12:32 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The business will test you in every shape and form—it will test you physically, mentally, and emotionally.” (12:51 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The question here is you have to ask yourself, ‘Do I want to walk this path or I am not ready to walk this path yet because of where I am in my life?’” (18:51 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you want to have a CLEAR idea what lays ahead of you when starting a business, our $24 for 24 courses Business Kickstart Bundle is the ULTIMATE guide that not only gives you the overview of what to expect when starting and growing your business, the bundle also provides the WHAT and the HOW. Click on this link to find out what it includes!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What Should You Do First When Thinking to Start a Business - Episode 174

Thu, 23 Jan 2025 08:16:37 -0400

“Do you have something that people want to pay you for? That’s the question you have to ask yourself,” says May Yeo Silvers, as she reframes what it truly takes to start a business.

In this episode, May challenges aspiring entrepreneurs to think beyond logistics and focus first on the value they bring. Do you have a skill that’s been validated by others? Are people already asking to pay for what you offer? She shares why external feedback matters and how it can serve as a compass for building confidence and clarity.

May also explores the role of timing and personal circumstances in the entrepreneurial journey. Are you in a season of life where you can dedicate the time and energy needed? If not, what support or adjustments could help make it possible? Her practical advice encourages listeners to align their vision with their reality while prioritizing marketable skills and strategic planning.

May offers a clear and practical approach to starting a business, encouraging listeners to focus on their strengths, seek help where needed, and take actionable steps toward success.

Quotes

• “Do you have something that people want to pay you for? That’s the question you have to ask yourself.” (05:05 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to be able to have this skill set that you can confidently market to the public that will recognize your skill set, your talent, your work, and pay you money for it.” (08:53 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “I’ve always said that there’s never a good time to start a business. And it’s true. You can start a business anytime, but there’s actually a better time to start a business. Anytime is a good time, but there is a better time to start a business when you really ask yourself, where are you in your life?” (19:03 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Assess your external environment, your internal mindset. And then we go from there.” (24:46 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you like more free resources on how to start and build your events business, make sure to check me on my YouTube, IG, Facebook and LinkedIn for business strategies, tactics and the right mindset needed to succeed!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Don’t Focus On the Year, Focus On the Day - Episode 173

Thu, 16 Jan 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Big goals often fail because we focus on the end result instead of the daily steps that lead to success. In this episode, May Yeo Silvers introduces the concept of “Quit Friday,” the second Friday of January when many abandon their New Year resolutions, and explains how focusing on daily actions instead of yearly goals can help prevent premature quitting.

Using relatable examples, May points out the importance of breaking goals into manageable tasks. For instance, a resolution to lose 10 pounds in a year becomes more actionable when broken into monthly, weekly, and daily milestones, allowing for steady progress. Similarly, a financial goal of $120,000 annually feels less overwhelming when viewed as a daily target of $357.15, making it easier to maintain focus and track achievements.

May encourages consistency and small, incremental actions, arguing that methodical daily efforts build momentum and reduce the risks associated with taking big, risky leaps. This practical approach not only helps achieve goals but fosters accountability and long-term sustainability.

Join May as she provides actionable insights and motivational guidance to help you avoid the “Quit Friday” trap, stay committed, and turn your ambitious goals into achievable daily tasks!

Quotes

• “The interesting thing is that not many people set a deadline for when they want to see results from their New Year’s resolutions. However, inwardly, subconsciously, and emotionally, they expect to see results as soon as possible. If you take the time to closely examine the goals you’ve set for your New Year’s resolutions, they are often—or in most cases—goals that require more than a month to achieve.” (03:40 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “I want you to refocus and be extremely intentional about breaking down your yearly goals into smaller time frames. Use these to create manageable goals, devise a plan, list your tasks—your success list—and identify the daily actions needed to stay on track.” (11:23 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “I want you to take a look at your New Year’s resolution and stop focusing on what you need to do for the entire year. Instead, start focusing on questions like: What do I need to do today? Tomorrow? The day after? How did I do yesterday? What can I do differently today? Did I do well yesterday? If I did well yesterday, let’s continue that momentum today. Repeat the action until you reach a point where you think, ‘Okay, I’m really good at this now.’ Then ask yourself: What can I add tomorrow to build even more momentum? It’s a process of repetition and reflection.” (16:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

After listening or watching this episode, I would love for you to send me a comment or DM and let me know what you are doing to NOT quit on "Quit Friday" (aka "Quitters Day") so I can share your strategies with my followers! You can reach me at any of the social media handles below:

IG: https://www.instagram.com/mayyeosilvers

LinkedIn: http://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

There’s More Than 1 Way to Build a Business - Episode 172

Thu, 09 Jan 2025 06:00:00 -0400

Success in the event industry shouldn’t demand exhaustion. In this episode, May Yeo Silvers urges event professionals to rethink the glamorized narrative of post-event burnout often shared on social media. She challenges the idea that physical exhaustion and pain should be seen as badges of honor or the norm for success in the event planning business.

Drawing from her early days at M2 Hospitality, where she handled every detail herself, May explains how she learned to prioritize sustainability and scalability. Through delegation, vendor trust, and detailed playbooks, she transformed her business model to avoid being physically present at every event, achieving both time freedom and long-term growth.

While acknowledging that some professionals find fulfillment in hands-on involvement, May prompts listeners to ask whether this approach aligns with their long-term goals, particularly when it comes to time freedom and scaling their businesses. She also cautions aspiring event professionals against assuming that constant exhaustion is the only path to success. By sharing her strategies, May offers an alternative roadmap for building a business that balances financial success, personal fulfillment, and sustainability.

May’s message is clear: rethink your approach, align your business with your goals, and embrace a model that works for you—whether that’s hands-on or visionary leadership.

Quotes

• “If you are truly feeling wiped out, extremely exhausted after every event that you have done, there’s something wrong.” (04:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Stop glamorizing your pain after each event. Do not glamorize your scars, your war wounds in our industry.” (05:20 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Not one entrepreneur that I spoke with tells me that they want to start a business because they want to fulfil their passion and they want to make a lot of money, and not because they want to have the time and freedom to do what they want, when they want.” (16:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you are on the other side of the equation that you want to be hands-on, then start asking yourself: How much longer can I continue to work this way? And what happens when I'm sick?” (27:49 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

There is no one way to build a business and the most important thing to consider is however you decide to build your business, it should fulfill these 3 things: 1. Financial Freedom 2. Time Freedom 3. Personal Happiness and Fulfillment

If you are still in the early stages of building your events business, you may not have an idea how you should structure your business to achieve those 3 things mentioned above.

There are many online resources for you to learn from, BUT make sure if you want to copycat, find the right cat to copy. Check out my YouTube, IG, Facebook and LinkedIn to see if the business strategies, tactics and mindset I shared resonates with how you see your future self!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

EVERYDAY is January 1 - Episode 171

Thu, 02 Jan 2025 06:00:00 -0400

For May Yeo Silvers, every day can be January 1st—a chance to act on your goals without waiting for the “right” moment. In the first episode of 2025, May unpacks the challenge of maintaining momentum with New Year resolutions. Why do so many of us wait for a Monday or the first of the month to begin? May challenges this mindset and shares why the first 90 days are crucial for building habits that stick.

May doesn’t shy away from the truth: enthusiasm fades, often by the third month, when progress feels slow or motivation starts to waver. So, what’s the answer when your drive dwindles? May suggests taking short, intentional breaks to recharge without losing the momentum you’ve worked hard to build. She raises an important question: how quickly do you recover when you fall off track?

May offers advice and encouragement, reminding us of the value of taking short, purposeful breaks to recharge without losing momentum. She cautions against extended pauses, which can disrupt progress, and inspires listeners to prioritize resilience, recover quickly from setbacks, and lean on supportive communities for accountability. With the right community and accountability, you can sidestep procrastination traps and stay on track. This episode serves as both a reality check and a pep talk, encouraging you to rethink your approach to goals and sustain your drive throughout the year.

Quotes

• “Life will happen, and you get busy, and there are distractions. You keep pushing back and pushing back and pushing back the deadline to pick it back up. People or successful entrepreneurs are people who, when they fall off the wagon, it’s not just about getting back on the wagon—that’s step number one, all right? But what is going to differentiate them from just going back into the grind to actually rising from the grind is how FAST they get back up on the wagon.” (10:02 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Allow yourself some time to reflect and to rest, but do not take longer than necessary because you will lose the enthusiasm. In business, we say ”time kills all deals”. If you want to do something, do it now.” (10:44 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Do not give yourself more time than you need to restart and know that you’re not restarting from ground zero.” (13:48 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Staying motivated AND accountable to yourself when the results are not what you expected even though you had "given it all" is one of the MOST CHALLENGING obstacles that stands between you and your goals.

It's good to have the know-how, but it is GREAT to have a community to support you when you are feeling discouraged, to help pull you up and push you to get out of the funk and more importantly, inspire you to believe that YOU CAN DO IT.

That is exactly what we do inside our Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur Live Support Community. Want to know how else we can support you in your EVENTrepreneur journey? Click on this link to find out!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Focus On What You CAN Do Instead of What You CAN’T Do - Episode 170

Thu, 26 Dec 2024 06:00:00 -0400

Success, May Yeo Silvers notes, begins when you focus on what you can do today and take that first step, no matter how small. In this episode, she shares her straightforward approach to goal-setting and planning for the year ahead. How often do perfectionism or life’s responsibilities stop you in your tracks? May’s insights center on breaking tasks into smaller, doable steps and choosing progress over perfection.

Through a personal story of overcoming health challenges, May highlights the power of small actions to create momentum, showing how shifting focus from what’s out of reach to what’s within your grasp can lead to meaningful progress. Her thoughtful advice and relatable anecdotes inspire listeners to take purposeful action toward their goals while staying rooted in gratitude.

If you’re seeking a clear, grounded way to prepare for 2025, this episode combines practical strategies with a touch of encouragement to help you get started with confidence.

Quotes

• “The worst thing you can do is to be stuck in perfectionism mode, constantly prepping and not taking any action. When you don’t take action, you don’t have any data to analyze, and you don’t have any outcomes to refine to help you take more steps toward your goal.” (04:26 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you are focusing on either ‘it’s all or nothing,’ you are going to be extremely disappointed in your business and in your life. I know that firsthand, in many aspects of my life. And I’m pretty sure if you look at your life—your kids, if you have children, or your close friends and family—they will share examples with you that it is not all or nothing. This type of ‘all-or-nothing’ living is extremely, extremely dangerous because it puts you in the mindset that you are constantly in prep mode. And when you’re constantly in prep mode, you take no action.” (21:00 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Focus on what you can do instead of what you can’t do. And the most important thing is to get started.” (30:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for a daily boost of inspiration, education or motivation, make sure you subscribe to my YouTube channel: https://www.youtube.com/@mayyeosilvers. Go to the "Shorts" tab, and enjoy the videos which are 60 seconds or less!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Part 3 of the 3 Part Series for Strategic Planning 2025 - When things don’t go as planned - Episode 169

Thu, 19 Dec 2024 06:00:00 -0400

When plans unravel, resilience and adaptability become your greatest assets in building a thriving business. With over 20 years of experience, May Yeo Silvers exemplifies this as she shares actionable strategies for overcoming setbacks, staying grounded, and realigning goals to achieve both financial success and time freedom.

In the final part of her three-part series on strategic planning for 2025, May focuses on what to do when things don’t go as planned. She highlights the importance of setting intentional, detailed goals—covering financial targets and time management—to create a balanced foundation for both work and personal life.

How do you stay committed to your goals when progress feels slow or uncertain? May introduces the ABCDE framework from Martin Seligman’s book “Learned Optimism” to help entrepreneurs manage setbacks and maintain focus. This practical approach offers tools to shift negative beliefs, refine strategies, and stay on course.

Through personal stories and hard-earned insights, May explores the balance between ambition and well-being, showing how entrepreneurship is as much about mindset as it is about strategy. Can you truly define success without considering both financial freedom and time freedom? This episode challenges you to think differently, adapt boldly, and embrace the realities of the entrepreneurial journey.

Quotes

• “Do not be stuck in the ‘I want to make it perfect’ zone. If you work only in your head, nobody knows whether it’s perfect except you. But you are not the buyer. Your buyer will determine whether what you’re putting out there is going to attract people to pay for what you are selling. You are not the one buying; you are the one selling. So, you can’t use yourself as a gauge to decide whether it’s good enough to be on the market. You will only know once you put it out there, collect data, and gather feedback.” (08:22 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You cannot tell yourself that you expect this outcome in the first month, second month, or third month. You have a goal but you cannot be so rigid that when the outcome or the result is not what you expected, you get discouraged. It can go both ways: the outcome could be better than what you expect, or it can be less than what you expect. Do not attach any meaning to the outcome. It’s just an outcome.” (15:44 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Time is the most expensive resource that we cannot get back.” (48:15 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Whose happiness is most important? Your happiness. And your happiness is created by you, not given to you by these people. You need to remember that. Your happiness and your fulfillment is created by you, not to be given to you by all these people.” (56:10 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you have invested time and money in learning the "what to" and "how to" for your events business, BUT you still feel like "something" is missing to catapult your business, perhaps having a supportive community of EVENTrepreneurs where you can bounce off ideas, seek advice from and get emotional support to cheer you on your EVENTrepreneur journey is the missing link.

Inside our Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur Live Support Community, we have Eventrepreneurs at different stages of their business and we share business strategies, event experiences etc so you don't make costly mistakes and learn from those who have been there and done that. Hear from these EVENTrepreneurs the ups and downs of being a business owner so you don't feel so lonely on this journey! Click on this link to learn more about the EVENTrepreneur LIVE SUPPORT Community.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Part 2 of 3 part series of Strategic Planning for 2025 - Setting REALISTIC Goals - Episode 168

Thu, 12 Dec 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“Adjust your actions to meet your goals, not your goals to meet your actions.” May Yeo Silvers challenges us to rethink how we approach goal setting in part two of her three-part series on strategic planning for 2025. Are your goals pushing you to grow, or are they keeping you in your comfort zone?

In this episode, May explores the distinction between practical goals that feel safe and realistic goals that push you toward meaningful progress. Drawing from her own journey, she shares how to set goals that challenge you without overwhelming you, encouraging bold but achievable steps forward.

How much time, energy, or money are you truly willing to invest in your goals? May encourages listeners to assess their circumstances honestly, identifying opportunities to automate, delegate, or eliminate tasks that don’t align with their priorities. She stresses the importance of tracking progress, refining strategies, and leaning on a supportive community for guidance and encouragement. Setbacks, she reminds us, are part of the process—and community can be a powerful source of resilience when they arise.

Quotes

• “There is a big difference between setting realistic goals versus setting goals that are practical. For me, I like to have a good balance. Setting realistic goals, for me, are goals that are not only just practical, but it pushes me, and I will be able to find resources and support that will push me from practical to realistic.” (04:52 | May Yeo Silvers)

• ”When you are setting your realistic goals, it is pushing you more than whatever you’re doing, but not pushing you so much to the extent that you feel that, ‘Oh my God, I’m never ever gonna make it.’” (09:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You have to also evaluate your current stage in your life—your current lifestyle. Do you have many obligations that will take time away from you working on your business? …A lot of business owners tell me that they are unable to grow their business because they don’t have the time.” (18:01 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Adjust your actions to meet your goals, not your goals to meet your actions.” (25:03 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are thinking of launching your side hustle events business or considering doing a rebranding, our 24 courses Business Kickstart Bundle will serve as your guide on how to start, launch and grow your events business.

The Business Kickstart Bundle includes all the fundamentals of business such as pricing for profit, marketing to gain visibility and leads, slaying sales to close those leads, business legalities, and mindset and productivity hacks. Click on this link to check out what the bundle offers!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Part 1 of 3 Part Series for Strategic Planning 2025 - Overview of the 3 Part Series and Defining What You Want for Your Business & Personal Life - Episode 167

Thu, 05 Dec 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“You need to tell money how you’re going to spend it, and you need to tell time how you’re going to use it,” says May Yeo Silvers, highlighting the power of intentionality in building a life and business that align with your priorities.

In this episode, the first of a three-part series on strategic planning for 2025, May challenges entrepreneurs to dig deeper into what they truly want. What does financial freedom look like for you—not just in theory, but in numbers? And how would you use time freedom if you had it? She shares her own journey, the lessons learned from balancing two businesses, and the mindset shifts that helped her define success on her terms.

May reminds listeners that entrepreneurship isn’t just about pursuing your passion but also about building the structure that allows you to do so sustainably. With a mix of practical insights and real-world examples, this episode is a guide to creating clear goals and preparing for the realities of running a business. What steps will you take to align your goals with the life you want?

Quotes

• “You will come to realize in entrepreneurship that certain things you can have a general idea about. But when it comes to implementation, when it comes back to the fundamentals of why something is working or not working, why you want something or why you don’t, you have to be so specific in acknowledging your emotions, desires, and fears. These are the things that will either propel you forward or pull you back from reaching your goals.” (11:06 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to tell money how you’re going to spend it, and you need to tell time how you’re going to use it.” (39:38 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The passion for building the business has to be equal, if not greater, than the passion you have for your fulfillment, your skill set, and your craft. So, you need to start by being honest with yourself: Do I have the passion to build the business?” (48:40 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are thinking of starting a side hustle or turning your side hustle into a full time business in 2025, make sure you check out The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Book.

I had consolidated all my years of experience in the events field and how I built a multiple 6 figure profit events business, all into a book that you can finish reading in a day.

This book has become the blueprint for many event planners, designers and decorators to help guide them to turn their passion for events into a profitable business. In the book, I covered strategies and tactics, PLUS addressing the emotional roller coaster ride and how to manage those emotions to make decisions that will not only help you survive, BUT THRIVE in both your business and personal life.

Click on this link to get your copy today! https://www.amazon.com/Unstoppable-EVENTrepreneur-TM-Profitable-Business/dp/1961347105/

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

3 Reasons Why You Are Not Making Sales - Episode 166

Thu, 28 Nov 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“If they can’t find you, they can’t pay you.” For any business, visibility is essential. In this episode, May Yeo Silvers gets straight to the heart of why many entrepreneurs struggle with sales, breaking it down into three core reasons that often go unnoticed.

Are you making it easy for potential clients to discover your business? Sporadic social media posts or a static website aren’t enough. May challenges listeners to think about whether their marketing is consistent, aligned with their personality, and actually reaching the right audience.

May also asks: Are you speaking to the people who truly need and value your services? Selling to the wrong crowd—or worse, failing to address your clients’ core needs—could be why you’re not closing deals.

This isn’t about doing more; it’s about doing it smarter. Drawing from her extensive experience in the events industry, May shares actionable insights and real-world examples, offering clarity and solutions for these common pitfalls. Ready to refine your approach and connect with your ideal clients? Tune in and take the first step!

Quotes

• “You need consistent marketing, and it’s important to find a marketing style that suits your personality. In my ‘Events4Anyone’ Facebook group, I shared a tutorial on choosing a marketing strategy based on your resources—whether you have more time or money—and your personality type. Evaluating these factors helps you develop a consistent strategy to let people know you have something to sell. Remember, if they can’t find you, they can’t pay you.” (03:41 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you’re selling the product to the wrong people, they may not see the need for it right now. Without a strategy to entice them to buy now, they also might not see that what you’re offering is something they actually want. Additionally, they may not be able to afford it, or your price could be too high. They might want your service and want it now, but if your pricing is wrong, that could be a barrier.” (05:39 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “In order to upsell, you must first satisfy their core needs, then you upsell your other services that you can very confidently speak about.” (27:46 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If knowing how to sell is your Achilles heel, check out our FREE private facebook group: Events4Anyone-A-Z guide to help you start and grow your events business. Inside the facebook group, there is an entire module called "Slaying Sales" where I have several free videos teaching you how to SLAY SALES! Here's the link to join the group.

If you want more hands on help where you ask questions and also learn from others who have walked the path before you, our LIVE SUPPORT community could be what you are looking for. Click on this link to find out what the community offers!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The 3 “Red Flags” to Spot When Speaking to a Lead - Episode 165

Thu, 21 Nov 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“This is your business. If you’re going to invest time and energy qualifying a lead to decide whether to book an event, you need to ensure you’re making the right decision. Because whatever you’re saying ‘yes’ to, you’re saying ‘no’ to something else.”

May Yeo Silvers discusses recognizing red flags when speaking to potential clients, a skill every event planner needs to master. She emphasizes the importance of being selective with your time and energy, sharing three key warning signs that indicate a lead might not be the right fit for your business.

What should you do when a client mentions they already have a friend or family member in the industry? How do you respond when they want to source their own vendors, creating a potential loss of control over the event’s quality? And what’s the best way to handle objections about your fees? May walks listeners through each scenario, offering clear strategies to navigate these situations with professionalism and confidence.

This episode challenges event planners to think critically about how they are qualifying their leads. May’s actionable advice reminds listeners that being selective is not only okay—it’s a key ingredient to building a successful, sustainable business.

Quotes

• “This is your business. If you’re going to invest time and energy qualifying a lead to decide whether to book an event, you need to ensure you’re making the right decision. Because whatever you’re saying ‘yes’ to, you’re saying ‘no’ to something else.” (09:41 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You have to find out what is the ultimate desire. What is the ultimate motivation for them to have this event? What is the result that they want that they will say, ‘I will pay whatever it is to get that result’? You need to find out: What is extremely important to them about this event, and what do they want the outcome of the event to be? How is it going to impact them? How is it going to impact their business? How is it going to impact their relationship with the people at the event?” (28:30 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Anytime you spend your time and energy on something you’re uncertain about, you’re taking away from pursuing something you feel more confident about. Time and energy are so precious.” (31:34 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You can be the most skillful planner, designer, or decorator—those are all incredible skills. But if you can’t sell and close, then your skill remains a hobby. It might bring you fulfillment when you do events, but if you’re aiming to run a business and turn your passion, skill, and talent into revenue, you must learn to sell, qualify, and close.” (34:40 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

The most important skill set to have apart from being a talented planner, designer and decorator is to know HOW TO SELL. You can be the BEST in what you do, you can be the BEST marketer of your services, BUT if you don't know how to sell, your talent can only be showcased through non-paid events.

If doing events gives you fulfillment as a hobby, fantastic. But if you want to turn your passion AND talent into a profitable business, you need to learn HOW TO SELL.

Inside our 24 courses for $24 Business Kickstart Bundle, one of the modules is Slaying Sales. There are videos of roleplay and also a video of me talking to a lead and closing the lead, so you see me in action! The bundle also includes all the fundamentals of business such as pricing, marketing, legalities, and mindset and productivity hacks. Click on this link https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast to check out what the bundle offers!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Set Boundaries with Your Clients - Episode 164

Thu, 14 Nov 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“If you can’t even respect your own boundaries, how can you expect your client to respond or respect your boundaries?” says May Yeo Silvers in this episode, as she explores the art of setting firm but respectful boundaries with clients in the event planning industry.

May shares personal stories and practical advice, stressing the importance of being proactive from the outset—establishing clear expectations around communication, workflow, and availability during the initial sales process. She highlights documenting communications and maintaining professionalism as ways to reinforce these boundaries, while also advising planners to respect their own time to avoid setting unsustainable precedents.

With a blend of empathy and assertiveness, May’s insights guide event planners in creating a balanced, fulfilling work-life dynamic, ensuring both their clients’ satisfaction and their own well-being.

Quotes

• “How do you set boundaries? What do you say to clients who don’t seem to understand that they don’t own you? When they contract you, they don’t own you. I can understand from the client’s perspective that they don’t want to forget details. So, they send you an email, a text message, or ask to get on a call because, for them, it’s so urgent. So, what do you do when you have a situation like this, after they’ve already hired you? What you need to do is not react—not handle this problem in a reactive mode. You need to handle it in a proactive mode, meaning you prevent it from happening before it even begins.” (05:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “I am super protective about my boundaries, my time, and I make sure that my client is aware of that.” (24:44 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to respect your own boundaries because if you don’t, your client won’t either.” (25:11 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “All of this has to be done with finesse. It cannot be cold. It has to be done with a level of understanding, a level of curiosity, and communicated in a way that helps them understand why, for the sake of efficiency and clarity, you need certain information before getting on a call with them or responding to them. All of this comes with experience and your personality.” (26:10 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking to join a facebook group where you get to learn about how to plan events, marketing and business fundamentals to help you launch your events business PLUS a community of over 8k EVENTrepreneurs to share ideas, experience or simply to support one another, check out our FREE private facebook group: Events4Anyone:A-Z guide on how to start & grow your event planning business. Every week, we drop a new video about business strategies and event planning tips. Click the link here to join (https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone). Hope to see you inside the facebook group!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Power of the “Golden Hour” for Your Business and Personal Life - Episode 163

Thu, 07 Nov 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“Golden hour is the hour of the day that you are operating at peak efficiency or at optimum. That means you are at your most focused, your best form, you are in the zone,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she discusses the value of identifying and embracing these golden hours to boost productivity and balance in both business and life. May shares her personal experience of adjusting to life after a serious illness, explaining how tuning into these peak moments has helped her maintain progress, even when physical limitations make it challenging. She encourages listeners to cultivate self-awareness, align tasks with their available energy, and leverage these moments for impactful results.

For those looking for additional support and inspiration, May invites listeners to join the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur community—a space for networking, encouragement, and practical business strategies. May’s message is clear: finding and making the most of your golden hours, even during difficult times, can be the key to sustaining and growing a successful business.

Quotes

• “Golden hour is the hour of the day that you are operating at peak efficiency or at optimum. That means you are at your most focused, your best form, you are in the zone.” (01:35 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It’s not a situation when you’re building a business where it’s either you do nothing or you do everything... Business is like a fire. You’ve got to start with the flint.” (10:57 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to find that particular spark in your waking hours where you find that burst of motivation and energy to fan the fire in your business.” (18:56 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Once you are so self-aware of how your body is feeling, how your mind is feeling, how your emotions are feeling, then you will know when to just do a small fanning of the fire or a big fanning to create a big blaze for your business.” (22:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for business and emotional support to cheer you on your EVENTrepreneur journey, our Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur LIVE SUPPORT Community could be the answer.

We have Eventrepreneurs at different stages of their business and we share business strategies, event experiences etc so you don't make costly mistakes and learn from those who have been there and done that. Hear from these eventrepreneurs the ups and downs of being a business owner so you don't feel so lonely on this journey!

Click on this link (https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/17livesupportupsell24kb) to learn more about the EVENTrepreneur LIVE SUPPORT Community.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Things You Should NOT Say to Your Clients - Episode 162

Thu, 31 Oct 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“Every client thinks that they’re the most important client. Their event is the most important. Nothing else matters. This is their perspective, and you need to respect their perspective because they’re spending good money,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she discusses the critical role of communication in the event planning industry, focusing on how professionals can navigate client interactions with empathy and professionalism.

May points out common missteps made by event planners, designers, and decorators, such as citing multiple ongoing projects or personal financial obligations to explain delays. These explanations, while factual, can leave clients feeling undervalued and unimportant, harming the client-vendor relationship. Instead, she advocates for a client-first mindset, where every client is made to feel like the top priority.

May offers practical tips on how to reframe potentially dismissive language, such as addressing delays or additional charges by referring back to the agreed scope of work. This approach reinforces the client’s investment and avoids diminishing their sense of importance.

Clear and respectful communication, especially when discussing scope changes or missed deadlines, is essential. By assuming the best intentions from clients and their teams, event professionals can foster a positive and supportive environment, strengthening relationships and enhancing client satisfaction.

Quotes

• “Every client thinks that they’re the most important client, their event is the most important. Nothing else matters. This is their perspective, and you need to respect their perspective because they’re spending good money.” (06:55 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Ego is going to kill all deals. In this position, you never want to be the one with the big ego. Let the client be the big ego.” (17:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to make your client feel like they are the number one; the one and only client. And you also need to be very clear about what is the scope of work that they hire you for and remind your client that that is the scope of work that they hire you for. Anything beyond that is an additional cost.” (19:20 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Maintaining your relationship with your existing clients is gonna help you grow your business so much easier and faster than you think you can.” (21:24 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for a blueprint on the how’s and the what’s on starting an event planning business, check out the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur book. I laid out all the business fundamentals, strategies, the traits, the mindset work AND the emotional roller coaster ride that you will experience to start, grow and thrive in your events business. Get your copy on Amazon today!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What Do You Say When Your Client Says She Doesn’t Need an Onsite Coordinator Because She Has “Help” - Episode 161

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“It is your job to educate your client on the specific expectations for the on-site coordinator and the tasks they need to perform on that day,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she points out the importance of clearly communicating the role of an on-site coordinator to clients, especially when they assume friends, family, or venue staff can handle these responsibilities. May underscores that while these informal helpers may have good intentions, they often lack the experience needed to manage the intricate details of an event, from vendor coordination to ensuring everything runs on schedule.

May encourages event planners to take a proactive approach by explaining the value of professional coordination and the specific tasks involved. This episode empowers planners to demonstrate why investing in an on-site coordinator ensures the event flows smoothly and prevents well-meaning but unprepared helpers from becoming overwhelmed. By educating clients on the complexities of event management, planners can help them understand the importance of having experienced professionals in place on their special day.

Quotes

• “It is your job to educate your client on the specific expectations for the on-site coordinator and the tasks they need to perform on that day.” (11:16 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “As a planner, don’t discount or brush it off or be condescending when your client tells you that they have friends and family helping. It’s not because they want to save money. Sometimes it could be, but sometimes it could be out of good intention that they want to do it, but they really have no idea what is required of them.” (17:38 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You have to make it as professional, as formal as possible so that your client and the person whom they say that they’re going to be helping feels the importance of this role, which is going to be the key player.” (20:10 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are just starting to launch your events business or thinking of starting one, know that knowing how to sell IS one of the keys to profitability. You can be the best marketer, but if you don't know how to close a lead, your business eventually becomes a hobby because you can't ask for what you really want to be paid.

Inside our Business Kickstart Bundle, one of the modules is Slaying Sales. There are videos of roleplay and also a video of me talking to a lead and closing the lead, so you see me in action! The bundle also includes all the fundamentals of business such as pricing, marketing, legalities, and mindset and productivity hacks. Click on this link (https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast) to check out what the bundle offers!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should You Reduce Your Fees When the Event Size Decreases? - Episode 160

Thu, 17 Oct 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“You need to understand, from a planner’s perspective, what fees will remain unchanged, even if the number of attendees fluctuates, unless there’s a significant increase in your workload,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she addresses a common dilemma for event planners: whether to reduce fees when a client’s guest count changes. Drawing on her experience, May explains that while tangible costs like food and decor may fluctuate with the number of attendees, the essential planning tasks—such as venue sourcing, contract negotiations, and vendor coordination—remain constant, regardless of event size.

She emphasizes the importance of educating clients about this distinction, helping them understand that the time and expertise involved in planning an event are consistent, whether it’s for 10 or 1,000 people. By doing so, planners can ensure their fees reflect the true value of their work, avoiding the pitfall of reducing prices when the workload hasn’t changed. May encourages event professionals to confidently stand by their pricing, while also being transparent about when adjustments may be justified for specific, tangible services.

Quotes

• “If you need me to source for a venue, the work of sourcing the venue is still the same. It doesn’t matter whether I’m sourcing for 10 people or 1,000 people.” (03:02 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Your fee in terms of planning and designing will not go down because these are intangible services. That means they can’t really see an actual product. It’s a service that you provide.” (03:56 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The only thing that the numbers will fluctuate will be the actual product. The food and beverage cost will go down because you’re feeding less people.” (05:15 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need to understand, from a planner’s perspective, what fees will remain unchanged, even if the number of attendees fluctuates, unless there’s a significant increase in your workload.” (07:26 | May Yeo Silvers)

Make sure you go to the show notes and follow me on social media to learn more strategies about how to thrive in the competitive events industry!

Links

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Are You Managing Your Business Cash Flow Effectively? - Episode 159

Thu, 10 Oct 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“As a business owner, if you don’t work, you don’t make money. So you have to be extremely disciplined when it comes to cash flow,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she shares a personal story about her recent health scare, highlighting the critical need for both self-care and careful financial management.

May emphasizes that, while it’s easy to focus on booking events and generating revenue, many business owners neglect essential financial practices, such as tracking deposits and managing expenses. Without a clear understanding of cash flow, even successful businesses can run into trouble. She points out the importance of regularly checking bank accounts and credit card balances to avoid overspending or falling into debt, and reminds listeners that discipline is the key to staying financially healthy.

May urges entrepreneurs to move beyond the day-to-day operations of their businesses and take an active role in managing their financial health. She encourages listeners to join her live support community, where they can receive hands-on guidance and accountability in overcoming financial challenges. The community offers co-working sessions and practical support to help business owners maintain a firm grasp on their financials and sustain long-term success. Click here to learn more!

Quotes

• “As a business owner, if you don’t work, you don’t make money. So you have to be extremely disciplined when it comes to cash flow. When the money is coming in, and you’re grateful for the sales effort that’s paying off and converting into paid clients, you need the discipline to pay yourself, cover your bills, and set aside contingency funds.” (09:59 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If your credit card bill is higher than what you have in the bank, that’s a major red flag.” (14:04 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You are operating in your business instead of managing your business.” (16:02 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You have to look at your numbers. You have to be so disciplined to look at your numbers. It’s not the sexiest thing to do, but if you don’t get this part right, your business is just running in circles.” (18:08 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are a EVENTrepreneur CEO who is making "getting to know your financial numbers" a priority but you want someone who can explain to you what the numbers mean in the events business terms (not some generic quickbook lingo), check out our Live Support Community where we have co-working sessions to do CEO tasks and one of the sessions actually focuses on understanding your business finance.

Click on this link (https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/17livesupportupsell24kb) to find out what else the Live Support Community offers!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Replay: CEO Mindset vs Employee Mindset - Episode 158

Thu, 03 Oct 2024 06:00:00 -0300

When most people think of running a business, they imagine making lots of money, traveling the world, and working less. May Yeo Silvers calls this the CEO mindset. While this lifestyle is achievable, it requires a lot of groundwork. In this episode replay, she explains the difference between a CEO mindset and an employee mindset.

May points out that letting go of the employee mindset is the first step towards building a successful business, and that entails focusing on investing in your business and being prepared to go the extra mile. Unlike employees, CEOs take on more risks because they are accountable for the outcome of every decision. Before starting a business, it’s really important to understand what being a CEO truly involves.

Tune in to this week’s episode to know the key differences between a business owner and a CEO, the value of investing in your business, and how defining your “why” can help you shift from an employee mindset to a successful CEO.

Quotes

• “When you own a business and you know how to run your business, your business is profitable and your business can run without you, you certainly can enjoy the fruits of your labor where you make a lot of money and work very little, very few hours, have minimal involvement in your business, except for critical decisions and communication with your key staff who is running your business. You can take vacation anytime. So, that is the dream life of a CEO or a business owner. But in order to get there, there is some work that needs to be done.” (05:01 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “As a CEO, you are the only person. You have to make all of the decisions and you have to go figure things out.” (07:32 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “In order for your business or your side hustle to become a full-time job, you have got to stop thinking like an employee.” (12:54 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “A CEO is up for challenges. A CEO loves the potential for great results and they're not afraid to fail.” (15:55 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are ready to turn your passion for events into a profitable business instead of an expensive hobby, your lowest cost of investment to find one of the best resources in the events field is our 24 course Business Kickstart Bundle, at only $24!

The bundle focuses on the key pillar of business success: Pricing for Profit, Marketing for Brand Visibility, Sales Strategy to Close Sales, Business Legalities, Mindset and Productivity Hacks!

Click on this link (https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast) to get your bundle today!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should You Advise Your Client to Pay Venue Room Rental? - Episode 157

Thu, 26 Sep 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“Every time your client has to pay for one thing, it means they will have less money to pay for another thing. And that other thing could be you,” says May Yeo Silvers, as she explores the impact of room rental fees on overall event budgets. She emphasizes that event planners need to understand the broader financial picture, as every expense—whether it’s decor, catering, or venue rental—affects what’s left to cover their own fees.

May expresses her strong dislike for room rental fees, especially in the post-COVID environment where venues have become stricter due to rising operational costs. However, she also shares when it may be necessary to pay these fees, such as for events with large spaces or extensive setup needs. She touches on strategies like negotiating room rental fees alongside food and beverage minimums to create a win-win for both the client and the venue.

May encourages event professionals to think beyond their immediate tasks and adopt a more strategic view of the entire event budget which can strengthen relationships with clients and establish the planner as a trusted expert who can navigate financial decisions with ease.

Quotes

• “Remember, every time your client has to pay for one thing, it means they will have less money to pay for another thing. And that other thing could be you.” (01:14 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You don’t want to have your blinders on and only focus on your one thing. It’s good to understand the whole picture when an event is happening or when your client needs help with an event. Knowing the event budget will really help because it shows your expertise as an event professional who has more knowledge than just doing that one thing. Your client gains more trust in you because you’ve been able to offer advice and guidance outside your scope of work.” (01:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “I’m a strategist. I don’t just take orders from my client. I understand their vision, their needs for the events, and then I go to work when it comes to doing the event budget. I try to strategize the best way to negotiate the best contract for my client.” (21:11 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Should you advise your client to pay room rental? This is just touching the surface, but it’s a good tip you can learn, right? You, as a planner or an event strategist—if you want to call yourself that, just like I do—don’t just take orders. I question every single thing. I strategize every single component when planning the event. So, this is another piece of knowledge you can put in your tool bag to help your client and showcase your expertise and value.” (24:13 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

The bundle focuses on the key pillar of business success: Pricing for Profit, Marketing for Brand Visibility, Sales Strategy to Close Sales, Business Legalities, Mindset and Productivity Hacks! Click on this link (https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast) to get your bundle today!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Learn This SKILL and Your Clients & Vendors Would LOVE You - Episode 156

Thu, 19 Sep 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“It’s not just the money—your reputation is on the line. That’s why I say you need to learn this skill. And once you learn it, your clients and your vendors will love you,” says May Yeo Silvers. This week, May underscores a vital skill for event professionals: mastering the logistics of setup time. She explains that success hinges on knowing how much time vendors need and ensuring that venues are booked accordingly to avoid last-minute stress, added costs, and rushed setups.

May highlights how poor planning often results in rushed setups, increased labor costs, and unnecessary tension. From missing critical details like audiovisual setups to underestimating the time needed for custom designs, such oversights can jeopardize the event. One example she shares involves an event at a New York library, where the venue was booked for just the day of the event, leaving no time for proper setup—leading to a chaotic and stressful situation for both vendors and the client.

May encourages event professionals to ask detailed questions, negotiate for adequate setup time, and compare the costs between extra labor and additional venue hours. Proper communication and planning with vendors not only save money and reduce stress but also help maintain a strong reputation. By mastering these logistics, professionals can ensure smooth, well-executed events that build trust and satisfaction with clients and vendors alike.

Quotes

• “The skill I’m talking about is the ability to understand what is required for the event to happen successfully in terms of logistics—particularly the time it takes for vendors to set up the event.” (04:25 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Whether you are a planner, designer, or decorator, when you are tasked with booking a venue as part of your service—especially as a planner—if you are hired to book the venue for your client’s event, or if you are a designer or decorator hired to design or decorate the event, you need to have a crystal clear idea of how long it’s going to take for you, the designer or decorator, to execute the design. And if you’re a planner, you need to have a very clear idea of how long it’s going to take for your vendors, or the vendors that you or the client has hired, to execute the event.” (05:04 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The particular skill you need to have is knowing how long it takes for the entire event to be set up. Not just your scope, but the whole event.” (24:14 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It’s not just the money—your reputation is on the line. That’s why I say you need to learn this skill. And once you learn it, your clients and your vendors will love you. They’ll love you because you have a helicopter view of what it takes to make the event successful.” (25:44 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Join my FREE private facebook group: Events4Anyone-A-Z guide on how to start and grow your event planning business to learn more about event planning skills and business skills!

Inside the facebook group, we have modules that focus on Event Planning Skills, What you need to start your business, Sales and Marketing strategies, and even Mindset and Productivity hacks! Come join the rest of the 8k EVENTrepreneurs inside the community to grow your network and broaden your skills!

Click this link to join the free private facebook group. See you on the inside!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Lessons I Learned from My 7-9 Figure Business Mentors - Episode 155

Thu, 12 Sep 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“I spent over $100,000 on business mentors who helped me build my business, improve my wealth awareness, and taught me how to sell. I also worked with mentors who helped me understand the programming from my childhood to adulthood, and how I could change that programming. This shift in my belief system improved my relationships with my family, clients, vendors, and many other areas of my life,” shares May Yeo Silvers.

This week, May reflects on the pivotal role mentorship played in her journey, offering key lessons for personal and business growth. She debunks the idea of waiting for the “right time” to take action, urging entrepreneurs to create their own opportunities and avoid procrastination. May emphasizes the importance of financial discipline, noting that successful entrepreneurs find ways to generate and allocate resources, rather than making excuses. Understanding how clients perceive value is essential in sales, where aligning your services with their priorities can make all the difference.

May also tackles the emotional challenges of running a business, from letting go of underperforming employees to standing firm on pricing. She advocates for focusing more on the business side of things than the craft itself, urging entrepreneurs to embrace business strategies and management to achieve sustainable growth. For those struggling with these aspects, May advises seeking mentorship or partnerships to develop the essential skills needed to run a successful business.

Through her experiences and lessons learned from her mentors, May provides actionable insights for entrepreneurs looking to accelerate their business growth, highlighting the importance of continuous learning, adaptability, and a proactive approach to decision-making.

Quotes

• “When you’re building a business, there’s never really a ‘right’ time. It’s about what you make of the time you have. It’s like flying the plane while you’re still building it. Your job is to try not to crash badly. I say ‘try not to crash badly’ instead of ‘try not to crash’ because you will crash. That’s when you know that whatever you’re doing isn’t working.” (07:58 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Learning how to start, grow, and sustain a business is a completely different skill set from the actual skills needed for client fulfillment and providing your services. You need to understand that.” (17:56 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you don’t have a love for business—whether it’s starting, growing, or sustaining it, and if you don’t enjoy any part of it, including business strategies and tactics—then it will be a challenge. It’s not easy to love, as it will test you as a person and as a CEO, tearing you down while also lifting you up.” (20:02 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you don't want nor do you have the resources to invest over $100k for business mentors, the most economical way is to join our Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Live Community.

We host 4 LIVE zoom calls a month where the community members come and co-work to get their CEO stuff done, and they also get to ask questions and learn from EVENTrepreneurs, including myself, who have been there and done that. This is probably the cheapest and fastest way to grow your business where the investment is low, and the learning curve is so much smoother than trying to figure it out on your own!

Click this link to get the details of what the Live Community offers!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What Does a “Preferred Vendor List” Actually Do for Your Business? - Episode 154

Thu, 05 Sep 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“Being on a preferred vendor list doesn’t guarantee you business. In fact, sometimes it can cost you more than not being on the list at all,” says May Yeo Silvers. This week, May explores the advantages and potential pitfalls of preferred vendor lists within the event planning industry. She explains that these lists help streamline the planning process for clients by offering a curated selection of trusted vendors, benefiting both clients and venue staff. From a venue’s perspective, preferred vendor lists can be a powerful marketing tool that fosters mutually beneficial relationships with vendors who, in turn, may refer clients back to the venue.

However, May points out that for service providers, being on a preferred vendor list does not automatically translate to guaranteed business. It’s crucial for vendors to maintain strong relationships with venue staff, especially given the high turnover in the events industry, to stay top of mind for referrals. She also highlights the potential challenges vendors may face if they are not on these lists, particularly with venues that have strict policies about outside vendors.

May encourages both venues and service providers to carefully assess their strategies regarding preferred vendor lists. She emphasizes that these lists should support business growth rather than hinder it, urging both parties to consider whether participation truly aligns with their goals.

Quotes

• “If you’re a venue, it’s important to invite vendors from all categories to come and see your space. This way, you’re not just marketing yourself to the end user, but also to vendors who can refer leads to you. By doing this, you make sure that vendors know you exist, and they can refer clients who are still looking for a venue.” (06:00 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “As a service provider, should you consider being on a preferred vendor list? My take is that it depends on your goal. If you believe that paying to be on a preferred vendor list will bring in a lot more leads, and those leads are highly viable, then it could be worth considering.” (23:19 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It’s also important to ensure that the venue is careful about limiting the number of vendors in each category. A good practice for a venue is to have no more than three vendors per category, so everyone has a fair chance to bid for the business. However, if a venue has five to eight vendors per category, I wouldn’t suggest paying to be on that list.” (23:40 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Being on a preferred vendor list doesn’t guarantee you business. In fact, sometimes it can cost you more than not being on the list at all.” (25:13 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are one of those people who like to learn by reading and highlighting notes on a physical book, make sure you check out The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur book.

This is one of my "babies" that I spent countless hours on consolidating all my years of experience in the events field and how I built a multiple 6 figure profit events business, all into a book that you can finish reading in a day. This book has become the blueprint for many event planners, designers and decorators to help guide them to turn their passion for events into a profitable business.

Click on this link to get your copy today!

https://www.amazon.com/Unstoppable-EVENTrepreneur-TM-Profitable-Business/dp/1961347105/

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Are You Doing These Things to Get Repeat Clients? - Episode 153

Thu, 29 Aug 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“Statistics show that growing a business is much easier and more profitable when the majority of your clients are repeat customers rather than constantly chasing new ones,” explains May Yeo Silvers. This week, she highlights the vital role that cultivating repeat clients plays in building a sustainable and successful event planning business. May shares insights from her own company, M2 Hospitality, where long-term client relationships have been key to their ongoing success. She emphasizes that securing repeat clients is not only more cost-effective but also less time-consuming than continually acquiring new ones.

To create a resilient business, May suggests maintaining a balanced client base with 50% repeat clients and 50% new clients. This approach ensures stability even if some clients temporarily pause their services. She stresses the importance of continuous marketing and outreach to preserve this balance and prevent revenue dips. May offers actionable advice on fostering repeat business by delivering outstanding service from the first engagement and nurturing personal relationships with clients.

Quotes

• “‘Why is it important to get repeat clients? It is because statistics show that growing a business is much easier and more profitable when the majority of your clients are repeat customers rather than constantly chasing new ones.” (01:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It costs a lot more time, money, and energy to get new clients versus getting repeated business because the people who have used you once have already experienced the level of service from you, and they also know what it’s like to work with you. Therefore, there is less hesitation to want to work with you again, provided that, of course, the first experience is a good experience.” (01:42 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It’s so important that even though it doesn’t require a lot of time, energy, and money to keep repeat clients, you must continue to grow that repeat client base, and that can only happen if you grow your new client base. They move in tandem.” (06:42 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “This is Marketing 101. Get back to your repeat clients. Check in on them. Let them know you appreciate them.” (23:08 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for an event prof community where you can ask the what, the how, the accountability and support, check out our Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Community!

Inside the community, we host co-working sessions and personal development calls. Here's a glance of our sample August call schedule:

Co-Working Sessions:

Wed Aug 7 8pm EDT: Content Strategy and Digital Presence Co-Working session.

We will talk about how to use AI tools to help you create your social media content strategy. If you want to volunteer for this exercise so we can help create your social media content, please DM me. First come first serve.

If there’s time left for website and social media audit, pls DM me. First come first serve.

Tues Aug 13 8pm EST: Business legalities, system and process, Funds management, CEO schedule

Tues Aug 20 8pm EST: Style Shoot, Sales and Marketing

Hot Seat Q&A With May:

Wed Aug 28 8pm EST: Come on and ask questions!

I will also talk about the process I went through to overcome my “limiting self beliefs” when I grew my business from high 5 figures into a multiple high 6 figures profit company.

Personal Development Call:

Thurs Aug 15 8pm EST: Topic for August-Building Consistency.

Want to be in a community like ours? Find out more about our Live Support community by clicking on this link (https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/17livesupportupsell24kb) to get the details!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

You Are Doing All the “Right” Things, but Why Isn’t the Business Growing? - Episode 152

Thu, 22 Aug 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“I can totally relate to this because I feel that pain in my own business, even though we have a successful business. It can plateau, or it can decline in terms of growth. I have to do some soul-searching and a lot of auditing to understand why my business is not growing as fast as I want it to,” shares May Yeo Silvers.

Entrepreneurs need to invest time and energy in critical analysis of your marketing tactics to overcome growth plateaus and optimize results in all aspects of their business. For example, May emphasizes the need for a strategic approach to social media marketing, advising that while consistent posting is vital, success hinges on understanding what content truly drives engagement and conversions. She shares that, although her Instagram reels attract followers, it’s the static posts and carousels that generate more significant engagement and sales, underscoring the importance of focusing efforts on what works best.

Email marketing is a powerful tool, but May stresses the importance of analyzing which emails achieve higher open rates. Tailoring content to audience preferences can significantly boost engagement and sales, as evidenced by her own revenue-generating email campaigns.

May also explores the value of in-person marketing, such as trade shows and networking events, urging entrepreneurs to track ROI meticulously. By focusing on the most profitable opportunities, businesses can allocate resources more effectively.

EVENTrepreneurs should regularly audit their marketing activities to determine what works and what doesn’t, enabling them to make informed decisions and focus activity in the areas that actually drive business growth.

Quotes

• “I can totally relate to this because I feel that pain in my own business, even though we have a successful business. It can plateau, or it can decline in terms of growth. I have to do some soul-searching and a lot of auditing to understand why my business is not growing as fast as I want it to.” (02:30 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You can see that many business owners are doing the right thing, which is marketing themselves in different formats… The action is correct, but not all actions will yield the same results. And because time is limited, and resources are limited, you want to be able to focus your time and resources on those right things that are yielding results at a faster pace. So don’t think that you are doing everything correctly.” (23:31 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Do not stop doing the right things, but be more intentional and critical in auditing and analyzing the results that all the right things you’re doing are yielding. This way, you’ll know how to channel your time and resources into the things that are really working for you.” (25:16 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

It is a challenge to determine what are the "right" things to do when you are launching and growing your business. It is also a challenge to decipher if you are doing the "right" things correctly.

These are the questions that EVENTrepreneurs have swirling in their head, and also keep them from gaining momentum in their business. Why tackle the EVENTrepreneur journey alone when you can be in a community where there are other EVENTrepreneurs who have already walked this journey and can guide you from making expensive mistakes and wasting time?

Click on this link to find out what the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Live Support Community has to offer!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Things You Need To Grow from 4 to 5 to 6 Figure Profit Business - Episode 151

Thu, 15 Aug 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“How much revenue my business generates means nothing to me in reality. What I care about is the profit,” shares May Yeo Silvers. This week, May delves into the essential strategies and mindset shifts needed to grow an event planning business from four-figure to six-figure profits. Drawing from her extensive experience in the events industry, May emphasizes focusing on profit over revenue, describing revenue as merely a vanity metric. She outlines a clear path for business growth, starting with the foundational steps necessary to achieve a four-figure profit, often involving significant “sweat equity” and manual effort, especially for those balancing a full-time job with their entrepreneurial pursuits.

May highlights the importance of auditing efficiency and productivity in the early stages of business development. She advises new entrepreneurs to be frugal with resources, investing only in essential tools and software that directly contribute to sales and client acquisition. As the business grows to a five-figure profit, she recommends gradually incorporating paid marketing strategies, such as ads and trade shows, and considering hiring virtual assistants to handle time-consuming tasks, allowing the entrepreneur to focus more on sales and marketing outreach.

According to May, the transition to a six-figure profit is more about mindset than operational changes. She discusses common psychological barriers that entrepreneurs face, such as imposter syndrome and the fear of growth, which can hinder progress. May shares her personal experiences of overcoming these mental hurdles and emphasizes the need for intentional business structuring. She advocates for building a capable team and refining systems and processes to sustain and scale the business further.

Quotes

• “How much revenue my business generates means nothing to me in reality. What I care about is the profit, which can be impacted by various variables, including how much revenue you’re bringing in and what your operating expenses are, as those will ultimately affect the amount of profit you have at the end of the day.” (01:57 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The majority of the Unstoppable EVENTrepreneurs who work with us inside our mentorship program hit a five-figure profit or low five-figure profit in their very first year of launching their business, even while working a full-time job.” (05:54 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you are doing this by yourself, don’t be too hard on yourself if you don’t achieve a five-figure profit in your first year. Give yourself some grace because you don’t have someone to guide you along. You’re managing everything yourself and trying different approaches; it’s a trial-and-error process. The growth path will have many more bumps compared to when you’re working within a program with a mentor to guide you. You need to audit your efficiency and productivity.” (06:15 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Now you are the CEO—the true CEO who is the visionary—you cannot be afraid to manage people; it’s a necessary part of the role. Just acknowledge that you will make mistakes, and you may hire the wrong people. It’s a work in progress, and you have to engage in a lot of self-talk and self-auditing. Be willing to fall and get back up again.” (31:18 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for the "unicorn" of all event courses that covers Pricing, Marketing, Sales, Legalities, Mindset, Productivity at an affordable price, check out our 24 course Business Kickstart Bundle that is ONLY $24!

This is NOT your typical course where you pay for what you get. This is a course that you pay little BUT you get A LOT! The courses in the Business Kickstart Bundle are all handpicked AND taught by me and my students who had achieved REAL results. Follow the strategies and advice in the courses, and your learning curve will be smoother, less expensive and less frustrating than trying to figure things out yourself.

Click this link for more info on the 24 course for $24 Business Kickstart Bundle!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The REAL Wealth You Will Attain When You Build Your Business With Intention - Episode 150

Thu, 08 Aug 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“For me, the real wealth in starting a business lies in time flexibility and autonomy,” shares May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she delves into how true wealth encompasses more than just financial success; it includes personal freedom and time flexibility. She recounts her journey, particularly a significant year when her business flourished financially but at the expense of her well-being, prompting her to reassess her priorities.

May highlights how many entrepreneurs lose sight of their initial goals of financial and time freedom in their pursuit of profit. Through her experiences, she underscores the importance of balancing financial goals with personal well-being. She advises entrepreneurs to intentionally define their version of real wealth and build their businesses accordingly.

The episode also underscores that real wealth is subjective and varies for each individual. May shares her sister’s decision to choose a less stressful job for better work-life balance as an example that wealth isn’t always tied to high financial income. She encourages entrepreneurs to regularly evaluate and adjust their business strategies to align with their personal values and goals, emphasizing that true success in entrepreneurship is about creating a fulfilling and balanced life.

Quotes

• “To last in the business and maintain your well-being, you need to build your business with a holistic intention. This means considering how to live your life, leave a legacy, and achieve financial freedom and stability all at the same time.” (06:27 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Financial freedom may look very different for every person.” (07:22 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “When you build your business with intention, you constantly have conversations with yourself. What is the real intention here? How can I build my business in a way that allows me to gain a certain level of wealth and a certain level of financial, time, and choice freedom? Only you will have the answer to these questions. You, and only you, will know the financial numbers that matter to you, how much time you need, and what you want to do with the time you’ve gained. This is how you build the real wealth that is meaningful to you, not what social media dictates.” (34:09 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you don’t build your business with intention, you risk burning out and losing the very wealth you’ve achieved. Sacrificing time and choice freedom in the pursuit of financial gain is not sustainable. Real wealth encompasses financial success as well as the freedom to enjoy your time and make choices that align with your values and desires.” (35:06 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you are thinking of starting an event planning business and you want to build your business with INTENTION like how I explained in this podcast episode, the Mindset and Productivity module inside our 24 courses Business Kickstart Bundle will help guide you on how to manage your time to have a work life balance, one of the REAL wealth of owning a business.

The pricing module, also included in the bundle, will show you how to price for profit so you can also attain REAL financial wealth. If you are lacking the sales and marketing skills, we got you covered too in the bundle!

Click this link for more info on the 24 course for $24 Business Kickstart Bundle!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The 5 “Valid” Reasons We Give To Ourselves To Justify For Slow Business Growth - Episode 149

Thu, 01 Aug 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“If you think that you can grow a business just by cruising along or believing what some other entrepreneurs are saying—that it only takes very little time, very little effort, and very little money to start, grow, and sustain a business—I’m here to shake you with some tough love: some of it is true, and some of it is totally false,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, she dives into common excuses that hinder entrepreneurs, particularly in the event planning industry, and offers practical advice to overcome them.

May debunks the myth that minimal effort, time, and money are enough to succeed. She identifies five common “valid reasons” entrepreneurs cite for their lack of progress: family priorities, lack of funds, insufficient skills, absence of high-paying clients, and limited market potential. For each, she provides actionable solutions:

Family Priorities: Emphasize time management, set boundaries, and seek support from loved ones.
Lack of Funds: Scrutinize spending habits and make short-term sacrifices to fund the business.
Insufficient Skills: Focus on continuous learning and leverage existing strengths.
Absence of High-Paying Clients: Evaluate pricing strategies and market to different areas if necessary.
Limited Market Potential: Conduct market research and adapt to the local economic landscape.

May’s insights are grounded in her experiences and lessons from her business coach. She encourages listeners to reassess their beliefs, conduct self-audits, and make necessary sacrifices to achieve their business goals.

Quotes

• “If you think that you can grow a business just by cruising along or believing what some other entrepreneurs are saying—that it only takes very little time, very little effort, and very little money to start, grow, and sustain a business—I’m here to shake you with some tough love: some of it is true, and some of it is totally false.” (01:37 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Every single one of these valid reasons comes with a valid suggestion and solution. If you’re giving yourself reasons why your business is not growing as fast as you want, I need you to listen to this episode many times and start asking yourself all the hard questions.” (36:22 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Audit yourself. Do you have the wrong beliefs? Are you believing things that hinder your growth? Are you willing to make the sacrifices that will help you grow? Do you really want what you said you wanted? Because if you don’t, there’s no point in making all these sacrifices. So, this is what I mean by having a vigorous and rigorous self-audit in the evolution of your mindset, your goals for your business, and the goals for your life. What has changed? Did priorities change? Did your desires change? Because all this will impact how much time, energy, and sacrifice you’re willing to put in to attain what you say you want in your business.” (36:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you already have the event skills, NOW is the time to invest in learning business skills. Look no further, as our $24 for 24 course bundle has you covered!

I had intentionally chosen the best 24 courses in my year long mentorship program curriculum to help newbie “EVENTrepreneur” get a taste of what it’s like to build a business. The courses are robust but not overwhelming. It is also very well rounded as it covers pricing, marketing, sales. business legalities, mindset and productivity.

Click this link for more info on the 24 course for $24 Business Kickstart Bundle!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How Much Experience Do You Need to Start Your Event Planning and Designing Business - Episode 148

Thu, 25 Jul 2024 06:00:00 -0300

How much experience is necessary to start an event planning business? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers tackles this frequently asked question, emphasizing that the quality and diversity of experiences matter more than the number of years in the industry. She explains that many event planners begin by organizing events for friends and family, often turning a hobby into a business despite initial doubts about their skills.

May breaks down the roles of decorators, designers, and planners, highlighting the specific skills each requires. She stresses that decorators need only a few solid designs to start, while designers should understand trends and collaborate with vendors. Planners need a broad skill set, including contract negotiation and budgeting.

Investing in education and shadowing experienced professionals is crucial, with continuous learning being key. May reassures aspiring event planners that having the basic skills and a passion for growth means they’re ready to start their business, regardless of the length of their experience.

Quotes

• “Don’t worry about getting complaints from your client when you don’t know how to do certain things. You’re human. If there’s something that you don’t know, you can go learn. You can go ask. Don’t expect yourself to know every single thing.” (35:29 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “The business fundamentals, the marketing skills, the lead conversion skills, the budgeting, business finance budgeting, and sales projection are all more challenging than the actual skill set for learning how to do an event. I am not going to sugarcoat this. Two things need to go hand in hand. You can have the skill set to do an event, but if you don’t know how to run a business, what’s the point?” (36:47 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “If you’re a business owner, you should at least know the service execution part. You don’t have to know everything, but you need to know at least overall what your company provides.” (37:43 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

If you want to build your event planning skills, make sure you join my facebook group: Events4Anyone: A-Z guide to start and grow your event planning business https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Inside the Guides tab of the free private facebook group, you will see different modules on building your business to 6 figures and also event planning tutorials.

If you want to learn more, follow me on my other social media handles where the videos and posts are short, quick and easy to follow!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The 3 Step Process To Ensure Business Success - Episode 147

Thu, 18 Jul 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“This is fundamental for any business’s success. Unfortunately, it’s something that many entrepreneurs overlook,” begins May Yeo Silvers as she delves into the three-step process for ensuring business success, especially for those in the event planning industry. Clarity - belief - action: these 3 steps are interconnected and neglecting any part of this sequence can lead to struggles and hinder business growth.

Clarity involves envisioning financial and time freedom in detail, specifying exact figures for income, work hours, and lifestyle aspirations. Belief is crucial, as it fuels commitment and must be supported by evidence such as existing knowledge and skills. Action requires consistent and strategic efforts to achieve the envisioned goals. May acknowledges the challenges of maintaining belief and taking action, especially when immediate results are not visible. Fluctuating levels of motivation and belief are normal, but successful entrepreneurs stay the course.

For those looking for additional support, May offers her 24 courses for $24, covering not only the fundamentals of building a business but also how to scale it in sales and marketing, converting leads, managing your CEO schedule, understanding legalities, and more. You’ll also have the opportunity to be part of a live community where you can co-work, brainstorm, network, and help each other. Click here to see what comes with the 24-course bundle!

Quotes

• “This three-step process is interconnected with one another, and one cannot live without the others. This is the most fundamental for any business’s success. Unfortunately, it’s something that many entrepreneurs do not pay enough attention to.” (01:13 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “Measuring your energy is so important. There are seasons in business, just like there are seasons in life. There are life-changing events such as getting married, someone dying, giving birth, or somebody getting sick. All these life-changing events are going to take you away from your business and even time from yourself. Your business cannot always be going at one hundred percent or a thousand percent all the time because you are human.” (20:00 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It will be up, down, up, down—that’s the life of an entrepreneur. If you are listening to this episode, you have to constantly assess your energy and remind yourself that this is part of the game you’re playing for the long term. This is part of the mental game that life and business will test you with. So don’t give up. That’s what I want to say. Don’t give up. Go back to the three-step process. Know that this is a game, and you have to be in the game to play it and win it. If you’re not in the game, you can’t play.” (23:58 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

HAVING the belief that you CAN have what you want is THE key fundamental to achieving your dreams.But it is NOT easy to truly believe you can have what you dream of, especially when no one in your immediate environment is living the dream life you are envisioning. It is also NOT easy to take actions if you don't know what actions to take, and not knowing if you are doing everything correctly.

These are the 2 feedback I get all the time in my event planners and designers community. Because of that, I created the 24 course bundle that also comes with optional live support to give you the WHAT and the HOW, PLUS a community to support your beliefs that you CAN really do it.

These 24 courses revolve around the business fundamentals of Pricing, Marketing, Converting Leads, Business Legalities, Items you need to start your business, Mindset & Productivity hacks.

Ready to launch and scale your events business for ONLY $24? Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The 3 Things That Could Tank Your Business - Episode 146

Thu, 11 Jul 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you making one of these three common mistakes that could sabotage your business? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers explores three major pitfalls that can tank an event planning business, sharing personal examples and valuable insights for each. Although her advice is tailored for event planners, designers, and decorators, the business fundamentals she discusses apply to any service-oriented business.

Premature Investment: While reinvesting revenue back into the business is generally a good practice, doing so prematurely can stunt growth and lead to failure. May emphasizes the need to evaluate the return on investment and usage frequency before making financial commitments.
Lack of Expense Tracking: Many business owners lack a clear understanding of their monthly expenses, leading to financial mismanagement. Know exactly how much is needed to cover personal and business expenses to make informed reinvestment decisions.
Absence of a Sales Projection: A sales projection is essential for planning and meeting financial obligations. Project costs and revenue for the next three to six months to guide sales and marketing activities.

May ties these three points together, showing how they are interconnected. Premature investment often stems from not knowing one’s expenses, and without a sales projection, it’s impossible to plan effective sales and marketing strategies.

Quotes

“When you have revenue coming in, immediately deciding to reinvest it back into your business is not a bad thing, but it could be a premature investment that might stunt the growth of the business and eventually tank it.” (04:05 | May Silvers)
“To support the business, you must first have sales. If you’re making premature investments to support the business, such as software, labor, and hardware, but you don’t have enough sales coming in, that is going to tank your business. So, you have all these things that cost money, but not enough revenue is coming in to maintain this support that you purchased. Premature investment into your business is one of the things that could tank your business and stunt its growth.” (12:02 | May Silvers)
“If you don’t know your expenses, how are you going to do a sales projection? You need to get a handle on your expenses first. Then, you need to add in the extra money you want to have after paying the expenses, and that becomes your sales projection. It’s really a no-brainer.” (20:03 | May Silvers)
“That’s the fundamental of running a business. It all comes down to knowing your numbers. Once you know your numbers, you’re able to craft your sales and marketing strategy. When the money comes in, you will know exactly when to use it and for what.” (26:58 | May Silvers)

Links

If you have enjoyed my podcast, follow me on social media to learn more! Check out the show notes to find all my social media handles and follow me on the one where you hang out the most.

AND, if you are just starting your events business and want to avoid making costly mistakes financially and energetically, check out our Business Kickstart Bundle-24 courses for ONLY $24! Click this link to check it out.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Buying Psychology of a High-End Buyer - Episode 145

Thu, 04 Jul 2024 06:00:00 -0300

"If you want to attract high-end buyers, you need to constantly work on these three factors: your energy, the trust, and also your level of experience," says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, May delves into the psychology of high-end clients in the event planning industry. She discusses how the decision-making processes of these clients differ from those of more price-conscious shoppers, and she stresses that beyond expertise, a planner's energy and ability to foster trust are crucial differentiators.

May recounts a personal anecdote about how she stood out among seven other planners to secure a high-end client, emphasizing the role of transparency, moral integrity, and positive energy. She highlights the importance of using social media and personal interactions to display one's personality and values, asserting that self-awareness and authenticity are fundamental in building trust and attracting high-end clients. May encourages planners to embrace their unique qualities and invest in ongoing personal development.

Listeners are invited to join May’s community, the Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur, which is dedicated to enhancing both business skills and personal growth. This community provides a supportive space for planners to thrive and evolve. Click here to discover more about what the Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur community offers.

Quotes

• “If you want to attract high-end buyers, you need to constantly work on these three factors: your energy, the trust, and your level of experience.” (04:55 | May Silvers)

• “You must first consider, do you have the skillset? When you’re talking to a potential client, especially a high-end client, you have to consider if you have the skillset to even execute what they say they need you to execute. Once you have the skillset, then you need to start working on building trust and also your energy. That’s why I always say that not everyone is your client and you are not everyone’s planner or designer because some people are drawn to certain energy. (07:27 | May Silvers)

• “Don’t be afraid to showcase your personality. Don’t be afraid to showcase who you are as a person, and don’t be afraid to state your point of view, your opinion, because that is how your potential client is going to know you and decide, ‘Do I like this person? Do I want to work with this person?’ The level of expertise, a service, and a product can be copied. Your personality, your vibe cannot. This is where they’re going to make a distinction.” (24:26 | May Silvers)

Links

Your business will NOT outgrow you. If you want your business to grow, YOU must grow FIRST.

Business tactics and strategies will only take you this far. To get a TRUE breakthrough, it comes from WITHIN you. Your self awareness of who you are and what you need to work on INTERNALLY is YOUR SILVER BULLET to success that is sustainable. That is why I have incorporated personal development zoom calls in our LIVE support community. Coupled with savvy business skills, you will be UNSTOPPABLE.

If you have been looking for a community where you can ask questions, learn from others who have walked the path before you so you avoid making costly mistakes and wasting time and get the emotional and mental support as you continue your EVENTrepreneur journey, look no further! Click here to find out what the Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur community offers.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Handle Leads From Friends and Family - Episode 144

Thu, 27 Jun 2024 06:00:00 -0300

"In terms of the quality of the lead, whether it’s from friends, family, or a stranger, it’s the same, in my opinion. As long as you conduct yourself professionally, you should treat your friends and family just as you would a total stranger who is interested in your business or service," says May Yeo Silvers.

In this episode, May addresses a key issue for new event planners: valuing leads from friends and family equally to those from strangers. A common error is undercharging for services. To avoid this, maintain professionalism and consistent pricing across all clients, regardless of the lead source. May also highlights the importance of clear discount policies and boundaries, ensuring that friends and family respect the value of your work.

May discusses leveraging connections with friends and family to build a digital portfolio and gather testimonials, which are crucial for marketing efforts. She advises charging at least the break-even rate to cover costs and avoid financial losses. By treating all clients professionally and managing expectations, you can turn close connections into a strategic advantage for your business.

To support event entrepreneurs, May offers her $24 Kickstart Bundle, which covers the essentials and provides actionable steps to grow your business. Click here to learn more!

Quotes

• “You need to be a professional and deliver the service like a professional regardless whether it’s a friend or family. You need to remove the mindset that a lead from a friend or family is not as good.” (08:14 | May Silvers)

• “You need to start thinking of your friends and family as your supporters. A lot of business comes from friends and family referrals, and then you just extend, extend, extend.” (08:49 | May Silvers)

• “Do not think lowly of the leads from friends and family. You treat them as a professional. You charge them the same as a stranger. Do not assume that a friend or family is going to haggle the price with you and a stranger will not because they will. So do not think that a lead from friends and family is going to be worse off than a stranger. Sometimes a stranger is worse off.” (21:15 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are hesitating to show up on social media because you don't have any "grammable worthy" pictures to showcase your work, you are in luck because I have just the solution for you!

In our 24 Courses Business Kickstart Bundle, there is an entire module on how to create a style shoot so you have a professional looking digital portfolio PLUS another module on social media strategies where you learn how to create content to grow followers and turn them into buyers, all for ONLY $24 for 24 Courses!

These 24 courses revolve around the business fundamentals of Pricing, Marketing, Converting Leads, Business Legalities, Items you need to start your business, Mindset & Productivity hacks.

Ready to launch and scale your events business for ONLY $24? Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The 6 Most Important Questions You Must Include on Your Initial Inquiry Form - Episode 143

Thu, 20 Jun 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are your inquiry forms properly qualifying leads for your event planning business? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers addresses how to refine your initial inquiry forms to focus your time and energy on prospects who are right for your business.

May highlights a common mistake many event planners make: overly detailed inquiry forms that can discourage potential clients before even determining if they’re a qualified lead. She suggests including six essential questions in every initial inquiry form:

Type of Event: Understanding the nature of the event helps determine if it aligns with the planner’s services.
Scope of Services Needed: Identifying specific needs allows planners to assess if they can meet these requirements.
Client's Research and Prior Contacts: Knowing if the client has consulted other planners or done research provides insights into their understanding of event costs and readiness to hire professional services.
Urgency and Timeline: Understanding the client’s timeline helps gauge the immediacy of their needs, as prolonged decision times can jeopardize potential deals.
Overall Event Budget: Knowing what the client expects to spend on the event helps separate their financial expectations from the reality of potential costs.
Planner Budget: Clarifying the client’s budget for planning services helps determine if their expectations align with the planner’s rates.

These questions are crucial for filtering out unqualified leads, ensuring that planners invest time in clients who are serious and ready to invest in their services.

Quotes

• “These six questions are what I use for my own event planning company as the very initial contact that I have with a potential client who’s thinking of hiring me. And this inquiry form is going to help me decide whether or not I even want to respond to their inquiry... This is my first gatekeeping. That means I am gatekeeping my time and my energy and not wasting my time and energy on people who are not ready or qualified for me to want to work with them.” (02:37 | May Silvers)

• “You do not ask them event-specific questions on your very first initial inquiry form. That’s how I qualify my leads. That’s how I can reserve a lot of my time and energy for people who are really qualified to work with me. Otherwise, what’s the point of asking all these event-specific questions if I don’t even know if I want to work with them… Do not make the first initial questionnaire so long that will deter people from filling it up. Make it straightforward so they already get a feel of how you work.” (22:39 | May Silvers)

• “By adopting these six questions on your initial inquiry form, I assure you, you’ll see a tremendous amount of time and energy saved. And you may not have people who want to fill this out. If they don’t even want to fill this out, you shouldn’t even bother talking to them.” (24:04 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for a community where you can ask questions, learn from others who have walked the path before you so you avoid making costly mistakes and wasting time and get the emotional and mental support as you continue your EVENTrepreneur journey, we are HERE for you! Click here to find out what the Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur community offers.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Show Your Value as an Event Planner When You Don’t Have Anything Tangible to Show - Episode 142

Thu, 13 Jun 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you effectively showcasing the value of your event planning services to clients? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers teaches listeners how to articulate the worth of services that aren’t immediately tangible. Drawing from her extensive experience charging between $15,000 and $100,000, May shares how she justifies her fees through transparency and detailed communication.

May emphasizes the importance of demonstrating behind-the-scenes efforts and outcomes to clients. She uses practical tools like comprehensive spreadsheets and explanatory videos to highlight the thoroughness and expertise involved in her work. By meticulously explaining contract details and showcasing her process, she builds client confidence and justifies her pricing. She also addresses the psychological aspects of sales, stressing the need to make clients feel secure in their investment.

Listeners are encouraged to embrace clear communication, transparency, and a relentless pursuit of excellence to overcome price resistance and build a thriving event planning business. To get started, May offers her $24 Kickstart Bundle, packed with insights on sales psychology, pricing strategies, and marketing. This bundle is designed to help both seasoned planners and newcomers enhance their business acumen and achieve greater success. Click here to learn more!

Quotes

• “As a planner or a designer, our expertise—what we’re delivering—is not so obvious to the eye in a sense that there is nothing tangible that you can actually see, that the client has nothing to hold on to or to be able to compare to. So it’s very difficult to justify; they feel that it’s very difficult to justify their fees compared to selling a product or a decorator that actually they can see her putting things into action, into place.” (02:48 | May Silvers)

• “It’s extremely important to explain what you’re doing and the results that they’re getting.” (04:48 | May Silvers)

• “I think a lot of times, when people say that they don’t know what they’re getting or they’re not sure whether it’s worth the money, it’s when they do not see, number one, the value, and number two, the effort and time put in to create that value. That’s why I said it’s so important that as an event planner and designer, you want to be able to be more in their face by doing these things that I mentioned: recording a video, going through the process with them, and educating them on how you do your job.” (17:01 | May Silvers)

Links

If selling is your achilles heel, we have a solution for you to overcome the fear or ickiness of selling!

Our 24 Course Business Kickstart Bundle has an entire module that focuses on buyer psychology, questions to ask that will naturally lead your lead to say YES without you feeling pushy or salesy. You even get to watch a video of me "in action" where you see me selling to a potential client! There are videos of role play where you can learn and get a good idea how a sales conversation should be like to close a lead.

In addition, the 24 course bundle includes the business fundamentals of Pricing, Marketing, Converting Leads, Business Legalities, Items you need to start your business, Mindset & Productivity hacks.

Ready to launch and scale your events business for ONLY $24? Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Switch From Side Hustle to Full-Time CEO - Episode 141

Thu, 06 Jun 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“The commitment and energy that you give to your full-time job, you have to give to your side hustle,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, May provides actionable insights for transitioning from a side hustle to a full-time events business.

May emphasizes the importance of financial preparation, advising that your side hustle income should match or exceed your full-time paycheck for six months before making the leap. She also discusses the psychological readiness required, including comfort with financial uncertainty and the willingness to invest significant time and energy into the business. Drawing from her own experience with M2 Hospitality, May shares the reality of often working up to 70 hours a week to build a sustainable business.

For those planning to make the transition from side hustle to full-time, consider investing in May’s $24 kickstart bundle for aspiring “eventrepreneurs.” Click here to learn more!

Quotes

• “If you treat your side hustle like a side hustle, that means it’s a side hustle. You’re not giving it a lot of attention compared to giving your full attention when it’s a full-time job. I know that it’s not that easy. It’s easier said than done. But if you want to quit your full-time job as soon as possible, you need to really put in the extra time and the sacrifice, the commitment, the resilience, and the dedication to build your side hustle just like how you’re building it full-time.” (06:24 | May Silvers)

• “Apart from knowing your numbers, that mindset, that commitment, that dedication to continue to build your side hustle like a full-time business, to do the sales outreach, etc., you must, must, must continue to build your business and not feel comfortable that you have your full-time job paycheck to pay the bills…” (13:27 | May Silvers)

• “You have to treat your side hustle as a full-time business while you have a full-time job.” (15:53 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are looking to turn your side hustle to becoming a full time CEO for your events business, it is IMPERATIVE that you have strong BUSINESS fundamentals.

You could be the BEST in crafting events, but if you don’t have the right skills and mindset to build a business, then you have an expensive hobby.

Our 24 Course Business Kickstart Bundle focuses on the business fundamentals of Pricing, Marketing, Converting Leads, Business Legalities, Items you need to start your business, Mindset & Productivity hacks.

Ready to launch and scale your events business for ONLY $24? Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Guilt You Will Feel When Building Your Business - Episode 140

Thu, 30 May 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you struggling with balancing business growth and family responsibilities? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers addresses this common challenge for entrepreneurs, especially in the event planning industry.

May shares a personal story about a recent event she planned in Atlanta, which required her to be away from her family for several days. She talks about the detailed planning and coordination needed to ensure her daughter Mia was well cared for in her absence. This included enlisting the help of her husband, mother-in-law, neighbors, and other moms, highlighting the crucial role of a strong support system for entrepreneurs.

May discusses the guilt entrepreneurs often feel when seeking help, fearing judgment as parents, or trying to manage everything alone. She emphasizes that overcoming these feelings is essential. She reassures listeners that it’s possible to balance a fulfilling personal life and a successful business.

To support her fellow event entrepreneurs, May introduces a new live support program designed to create a community of learning and growth. The program includes coaching calls, co-working sessions, and personal development calls, providing a space to exchange experiences, receive guidance, and enhance business skills. Click here to learn more!

Quotes

• “All this guilt will be created if you don’t have control of your emotions and your thoughts. So I have to tell myself that I can trust people, I have to tell myself that I can ask for help, and I do not have to be afraid of what people are labeling me.” (08:32 | May Silvers)

• “It's so important when you're trying to start and grow a business to have a support system.” (12:34 | May Silvers)

• “There will be seasons that you’ll be more present in your business, that you’ll require more support from your ecosystem, and there will be seasons that you will have to be very present in your family, and your business will be humming instead of growing. So it will all balance out.” (18:58 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for a community to support you in your EVENTrepreneur journey, we are HERE for you! Click here to find out what the Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur community offers.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

When Using Stock Photos “Gone Wrong” - Episode 139

Thu, 23 May 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“It's okay to use stock photos,” says May Yeo Silvers, but you must be cautious about representing your work and your skills honestly. May dives into the ethical use of stock images in event planning, sparked by an experience with a florist whose misleading Instagram portfolio led to a corporate event that didn't meet expectations. This story underscores the risks of misrepresentation prevalent in the event planning industry through social media.

In her discussion, May stresses the importance of authenticity in marketing. She urges new event planners to ensure that the images they use align with their actual capabilities, to preserve their reputation and client relationships. Misleading potential clients with skills or services that cannot be delivered can lead to lost business and credibility.

May also touches on the critical aspects of responsiveness and the deep understanding of the logistics and costs involved in bringing an advertised design to life. She provides actionable advice for building a truthful and appealing digital portfolio, including conducting styled shoots that accurately showcase one's work.

For listeners looking to deepen their understanding of effective business and event planning practices, May introduces her Business Kickstart Bundle. This package includes 24 courses for $24, covering essential skills needed to thrive in the industry. This resource is designed to help planners create compelling, honest content that attracts the right clients. Click here to access the bundle!

Quotes

• “It’s okay to use stock photos and it’s okay to use pictures of other people’s events as long as you don’t say ‘I did this event.’” (02:46 | May Silvers)

• “You need to be able to stand behind whatever you post on social media to say that, ‘Yes, I can do that.’” (14:09 | May Silvers)

• “This is how you’re going to sabotage yourself—if you use a stock photo but you don’t back it up with the resources or the knowledge to be able to execute that look. It’s extremely important if you’re using stock photos, you must get this step done. You must either know how to do it or you find somebody who can do that. Otherwise, it’s false advertising. It may align with your brand and your design style, but you have to be able to pull off that look… You have to back it up. I cannot stress how important that is.” (19:32 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are hesitating to show up on social media because you don't have any "grammable worthy" pictures to showcase your work, you are in luck because I have just the solution for you!

These 24 courses revolve around the business fundamentals of Pricing, Marketing, Converting Leads, Business Legalities, Items you need to start your business, Mindset & Productivity hacks.

Ready to launch and scale your events business for ONLY $24? Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Are You “Justifying” Your Fees to Your Potential Clients? - Episode 138

Thu, 16 May 2024 06:00:00 -0300

“If you have to justify your fees, you’re doing it all wrong,” says May Yeo Silvers. In this episode, May addresses a common mistake event professionals make: over-justifying their fees based on the time and effort they put into planning and execution. She suggests shifting the conversation from costs to the value and outcomes of the event, which more closely aligns with buyer psychology.

May emphasizes the need to understand clients’ deeper motivations, such as enhancing their social standing or creating memorable experiences. She advises on asking the right questions to uncover these desires. May advocates for aligning event visions with client expectations without getting bogged down in cost details, positioning event professionals as key partners in the success of the event.

For listeners looking to refine their business and client interaction skills, May offers a new business kickstart bundle. This bundle includes 24 courses for only $24, covering essential business and event planning skills. Click here to access the bundle!

Quotes

• “If you have to justify your fees, you’re doing it all wrong.” (01:50 | May Silvers)

• “The price that they want to pay for that result is equivalent to the value that they’re putting on the results that they want. And that value has a dollar amount, but that dollar amount can fluctuate based on how you emphasize the result that they want and what they will actually get from it.” (06:21 | May Silvers)

• “How do you play their game? You play their game by understanding the buyer’s psychology and the buyer’s belief in what you can do for them.” (07:30 | May Silvers)

• “Why is it important for them to have the event look that way? And how are you going to make it happen for them so that they not only get the event to look that way, but it also satisfies what we call the unseen, the unspoken, or the unmet need and desire for the event to look that way? When I sell to high-end clients, they want the event to look a certain way, not only because they want the event to look pretty. A lot of times, people spend a lot of money on making the events look good—it’s because of ego. They want people to talk about their events.” (09:13 | May Silvers)

Links

Are you an event planner or designer who is thinking about launching your events business but you don't know what to do and how to do it?

You want to invest in a course or a mentorship program to do it "right", but the cost of investment is prohibiting you?

Well, let me introduce the "unicorn" of the events business course, the Business Kickstart Bundle-24 Courses For ONLY $24!

These 24 courses revolve around the business fundamentals of Pricing, Marketing, Converting Leads, Business Legalities, Items you need to start your business, Mindset & Productivity hacks.

This is round 2 of our Business Kickstart Bundle BETA program. We launched the BETA 10 courses for $10 a few weeks ago and our clients are getting so much momentum in their business using those 10 courses and now they want MORE!

Ready to launch and scale your events business for ONLY $24? Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Don't Expect Your Potential Client To Have a Realistic Budget - Episode 137

Thu, 09 May 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you struggling with clients who have champagne tastes on a beer budget? May Yeo Silvers dives into the common challenge of unrealistic client budgets in event planning, prompted by a controversial Instagram post that highlighted the mismatch between client budget expectations and the reality of event costs.

May argues that it's unrealistic to expect clients to have an inherent understanding of the true costs in events. Instead, she suggests that it’s the event professionals’ responsibility to educate their clients, pushing back against the trend of outright rejecting inquiries with lower budgets.

To manage expectations effectively, May incorporates detailed pricing in her marketing materials to set clear expectations upfront. For those clients who still come with lower budgets, a detailed questionnaire is used to educate them on the spot, aligning expectations and fostering appreciation, which often leads to referrals.

If you are looking for more support in developing your lead qualification and sales skills, along with many other key business skills, May is offering her new business kickstart bundle, which includes 24 courses for just $24. This offer is part of a beta test to refine the courses based on user feedback and implementation speed, providing listeners with a chance to enhance their business skills at a minimal cost. Click here to get the bundle!

Quotes

• “There's so many event planners and designers out there sharing on social media that they are frustrated that they got inquiries from potential clients, giving them a budget that is so unrealistic. This is what we call the champagne taste beer budget leads. They are so unrealistic about how much money they want to spend on the event based on the look that they want.” (02:41 | May Silvers)

• “I don’t expect my potential client to know how much it costs to do an event. And I also don’t expect my potential clients to do their own research, to talk to 10 million people, to call vendors to find out how much things cost... They come to me because they want to be able to not have to do all that themselves.” (06:29 | May Silvers)

• “What do I do in order to avoid wasting my time and energy on people who aren’t qualified, who do not have a realistic event budget? I talk about money all the time. I make their job easier. I make their research easier. Every single marketing piece that I am putting out there on my social media, on my website, or on my podcast, anything that my potential client is consuming or following me, I will take the opportunity to educate my potential clients. (06:57 | May Silvers)

• “You cannot expect your potential client to have a realistic budget because what is realistic for them is not realistic for you. You are the professional. You know how much things cost; they don't.” (11:40 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are hesitant to launch your events business because of lack of funds and business knowledge, hesitate no more!

We just launched our newest course, Business Kickstart Bundle-24 Courses For ONLY $24! This is round 2 of our BETA program. We launched the 10 courses for $10 a few weeks ago and our clients are getting so much momentum in their business using those 10 courses and now they want MORE!

Here you have it. Click the link below to see what comes with the 24 course bundle!

https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/kickstart-24ob47oto67-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Event Planners vs Event Designers vs Event Decorators - Episode 136

Thu, 02 May 2024 06:00:00 -0300

What is the difference between an event planner, an event designer, and an event decorator? In this episode, May Silvers explores the distinction between these roles to clear up common misconceptions and guide newcomers in the event industry towards finding their niche.

May explains that while event planners may have the skills to perform the roles of both designer and decorator, designers and decorators typically do not take on planning. Planners are the strategists who manage everything behind the scenes, overseeing budgets, schedules, and vendor relations to ensure every aspect meets the client's vision and objectives.

In contrast, event designers are the creatives focused solely on the event’s aesthetics, crafting the look and feel through their choice of colors, textures, and design concepts. They transform spaces to create the desired ambiance but generally don’t manage logistical or operational aspects.

Decorators are the hands-on team members who bring a designer’s vision to life. They handle the physical setup, arranging decorations and ensuring every detail matches the theme.

May emphasizes the importance of understanding these differences to better identify and define one’s career path within the event industry. She encourages her listeners to try and experiment with different roles to truly discover what they love doing before specializing.

Quotes

• “The event planner can be an event designer and an event decorator, but an event decorator and an event designer cannot be an event planner because the skill set is very different. (03:30 | May Silvers)

• “So the client tells me what they’re looking for, and then I start thinking how I want the event to look like in terms of the decor elements. I start designing based on the color, the theme, the texture, the type of furniture I want to use, the floral centerpiece—the type of flowers, the vase, and the placement—where I should be putting it in the room. Then, when I’m designing it, I already have an idea which of my vendors can fulfill this order, this event.” (08:33 | May Silvers)

• “I don’t want to say that the hierarchy is the event planner and then the designer and then the decorator. No, we all have our own space. But if you look at it on paper, that's how it looks. The event planner will do everything in terms of strategy, in terms of planning. And they can even design if they want to.” (17:54 | May Silvers)

• “If you’re joining the events field and you’re thinking, ‘I don’t know what I want to do.’ Ask yourself. You won’t know until you do it, until you try it.” (19:01 | May Silvers)

• “If you don't know what type of events you want to do, expose yourself to all of it. Then narrow down. Take out those that you don't like to do until your field becomes narrower or your niche becomes clearer.” (21:22 | May Silvers)

Links

If you like my podcast, you will LOVE what I share on my instagram. I share my "war stories", the ups and downs when building my events business and TONS of business and mindset strategies. Follow me on IG by clicking this link: https://www.instagram.com/mayyeosilvers

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How To Handle Bad Reviews - Episode 135

Thu, 25 Apr 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you a business owner who has felt disheartened by a bad review? In this episode, May Silvers shares valuable insights on handling negative feedback. As her businesses have grown, May has seen her share of both praise and criticism. She brings these experiences together with practical advice for navigating such challenges.

Receiving mixed reviews is inevitable as a business expands. May emphasizes the importance of maintaining integrity, ethics, and delivering on promises as a business owner. She advises against immediately reacting to negative feedback, suggesting a 24 to 48-hour cooling-off period to avoid emotional responses. She recommends printing out the review, identifying facts, falsehoods, and gray areas, and considering the reviewer's perspective. Empathy is key—understanding why the reviewer might see things differently can transform a defensive situation into a constructive dialogue.

May outlines an effective response strategy: thanking the reviewer for their feedback, acknowledging their feelings, and asking clarifying questions without being defensive. She suggests reaching out via email or text message rather than responding directly on the review platform, aiming to have a one-on-one conversation to resolve the issue. This approach helps maintain professionalism and control over the narrative.

Patience is important. May suggests taking time to fully assess the situation and speak with the client before offering compensation or resolutions. She views these moments as opportunities for growth and, if needed, recommends a gesture of goodwill like a credit or gift basket to end the interaction on a positive note.

May urges her listeners to handle negative reviews with grace and professionalism, turning disgruntled clients into ones who respect and value your reasonable and fair approach.

Quotes

• “When you are growing your business and you're asking for feedback, testimonials, reviews, there will be a mix of reviews.” (01:06 | May Silvers)

• “When you are growing your business and you get to a certain point that you are becoming big and successful and well-known, you will get people who want to sue you. You will have people who want to get a refund. You will have people who tell you that you are a money grabber and you didn't fulfill what you said that you will fulfill. All kinds of things just to rattle you and also to get something from you.” (01:33 | May Silvers)

• “As a business owner, make sure that you show up with integrity, show up with your good moral values, have business ethics, and deliver what you promise.” (02:05 | May Silvers)

• “Don't respond immediately because you're responding out of emotions. You need to have a clear head to understand what exactly is going on, what's the objective of this person when he or she wrote the review, and how to handle it the best way. Step away from it and calm down. Give yourself 24 to 48 hours. Then come back and read the review.” (04:55 | May Silvers)

• “Thank them for letting you work with them, thank them for writing the review, and then be empathetic and acknowledge their feelings.” (12:35 | May Silvers)

Links

Event Planners, Designers and Decorators!

Want to know which platform you should be focusing on to grow your followers, AND how to grow it?

Join me on our FREE “GROW YOUR FOLLOWERS” Challenge on May 1st 2024 8pm EST where I will be sharing the strategies to grow your followers on EVERY platform! When you have FOLLOWERS, you have LEADS. When you have LEADS, you have SALES

Click the link below to register! See you LIVE inside ZOOM on May 1st 8pm at 8pm EST!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do These 2 Things to Get Consistent Sales - Episode 134

Thu, 18 Apr 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you an event planner stuck in the cycle of unpredictable sales, never quite sure when your next booking will come? Expert event planner, business coach, and mentor, May Silvers, shares insights on two critical strategies to change this stressful pattern and create a steady stream of new clients to your business.

One of the most common pitfalls for event planners is inconsistent marketing. May explains that sporadic engagement leads to reduced brand visibility, making it difficult for potential clients to remember and choose your services over competitors. May stresses the importance of staying at the top of mind with your audience through regular, engaging content that highlights your expertise and keeps your business in the conversation.

Another key strategy is the necessity of directly asking for business. Many skilled marketers excel in crafting attractive content but fall short in converting viewers into leads and customers. May advises including a clear call to action in your communications, such as encouraging your audience to download a resource, book a consultation, or check out a special offer. Clear CTAs guide potential clients on what to do next, significantly boosting your conversion rates.

A tip from May’s own marketing strategies is to vary marketing content to serve different purposes: some posts inspire and engage, while others aim to sell. This approach keeps the content dynamic and prevents audience fatigue, ensuring that your followers remain excited and responsive to both the value you provide and the services you offer.

When you apply these strategies consistently, you will see a noticeable improvement in your business outcomes. If you would like to dive deeper into these tactics, May offers her 10-course Business Kickstart Bundle specifically designed for event planners looking to expand their reach and effectiveness.

Quotes

• “The reason why a lot of businesses don't have consistent sales is because they don't have consistent marketing efforts to grow their brand visibility. If you don't market yourself consistently, you are not growing your brand.” (01:40 | May Silvers)

• “We have small business owners who are very religious in marketing themselves all the time. They have a solid marketing strategy schedule, they post on social media, they go to networking events, but they're so afraid to ask for business. It has to go hand in hand. When you are marketing yourself, it's important to let people know who you help, what you do, and the results you deliver, and how much it costs to hire you. On the other hand, you should also follow up with asking for the business. (04:05 | May Silvers)

• “You have to ask for the business and you have to make it easy for people to get in contact with you based on your CTA.” (09:46 | May Silvers)

• “You need to consistently market yourself with good content. The other strategy is you need to ask for the sale. You need to ask them to do something that's going to bring you closer to the sale.” (22:55 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are struggling to create a digital presence, staying consistent with your marketing efforts or finding it hard to ask for the sale, I have something for you and then some!

Our Business Kickstart Bundle includes video tutorials and downloadable plug and play templates that will help you to learn and implement the 2 very things I mentioned in this podcast episode: Marketing your business AND Asking for the sale.

The bundle also includes video tutorials and templates on business legalities, productivity hacks and converting sales. There are a total of 10 courses! Grab your 10 courses bundle at $10 before the price goes up! Click this link to get your bundle.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

5 Reasons Why Most People Won’t Achieve Their Dreams - Episode 133

Thu, 11 Apr 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Are you truly ready to pursue your dreams, or are you allowing barriers to hold you back? Drawing from her extensive experiences as an expert event planner and business coach and mentor, host May Silvers explores the five reasons why many individuals get stuck and fail to achieve their potential.

They don't know what to do: Individuals may not know the steps necessary to achieve their dreams, whether it involves financial success, personal health, or starting a business. This gap is the easiest to bridge with the abundance of resources available today.
They don't know how to do it: Even when aware of the necessary steps, some fail to execute them effectively. Overcoming this requires dedication to learning and applying new information.
They think more than they do: A tendency to overthink and plan excessively without taking tangible steps towards goal achievement. This involves getting stuck in contemplation rather than action.
They talk more than they do: May labels these individuals as “NATO” (No Action, Talk Only). Individuals talk about their aspirations more than they take concrete steps towards realizing them. This behavior results in little to no progress.
They think and they talk themselves out of the doing: Fear leads many to talk themselves out of action, making excuses to justify their inaction. This final barrier is often the hardest to overcome, as it requires confronting and overcoming personal fears.

May urges listeners to reflect on which reasons align with their own experiences, and to remember - resilience and a positive mindset are cultivated through action rather than before it. She encourages listeners to take the leap and seek hands-on help if you find that you aren’t moving forward or you feel stuck.

May shares the beta round for her business kickstart bundle, which offers ten courses for $10, with topics ranging from pricing strategies to mindset development. It’s an ideal toolkit for anyone aiming to enhance their entrepreneurial skills, effectively manage time, and navigate the complexities of starting and growing a business in today's digital landscape. Click here to get the course!

Quotes

• "If you put in the effort to find out what needs to be done, you need to continue to put in the effort to learn how to do it. You need to put in the time and the energy to learn how to do the things that need to be done." (05:42 | May Silvers)

• "How would your dream come true if you do nothing to go pursue that dream?" (07:27 | May Silvers)

• "Your mindset will only be built if you implement." (15:13 | May Silvers)

• "Your current situation is not permanent. You have a choice. It may be more difficult for you to make that choice compared to other people who already have the advantage to get out of a bad situation compared to you, but you are never truly, truly stuck. Only you can decide whether you want to be stuck or not." (17:29 | May Silvers)

• "When you finally accept that you do know what to do and how to do it, but you are not moving forward, or you can't figure out why you are not consistently doing what you're supposed to do, that's when you have to get alternative help, which is more hands-on help." (20:41 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are an event planner, designer or decorator who doesn't know what to do, how to do or need support to launch and scale your events business, check out our newest digital course, the Business Kickstart Bundle. It is a 10 course module that focuses on pricing, marketing, sales, business legalities, productivity hack and mindset.

Grab the BETA user price now at $10 for 10 courses plus $7 live support option. Better hurry as we have VERY limited Beta user spots left after we launched it 2 weeks ago. Click this link to get the course at ONLY $10!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Day 1 vs Day 100 - Episode 132

Thu, 04 Apr 2024 06:00:00 -0300

While early failures are inevitable, they serve as invaluable learning opportunities that pave the way for growth. In this episode, May Silvers shares insights from her personal experience learning to ski, drawing parallels to the journey of building a successful business.

May uses her first-time skiing experience to illustrate the importance of perseverance and learning from failures in business. She recounts how she fell numerous times during her first group ski lesson but remained determined to get back up each time, emphasizing that early failures are less costly and easier to recover from. She stresses that dedication and commitment are more crucial than motivation when facing repeated failures.

Highlighting the value of tailored guidance, May contrasts her struggles in the group ski lesson with the rapid progress she made under one-on-one instruction. She relates this to the business world, suggesting that entrepreneurs may need personalized mentorship or coaching rather than generic courses to overcome specific challenges and accelerate their growth.

May also discusses the pitfalls of comparing oneself to others, noting that everyone has different resources and backgrounds. She encourages listeners to focus on their own progress rather than measuring success against others. She shares how she resisted pressure to advance to more challenging ski slopes before she felt mentally ready, drawing a parallel to business owners who may feel pressured to uplevel before they are prepared.

In the early days of your business, setting action-based goals and conducting regular progress check-ins rather than fixating on financial outcomes is May’s suggested approach. She emphasizes the importance of consistency, strategy, and mindset in achieving success.

Personal and business lives are intertwined, and the way you approach personal challenges often mirrors the way you approach business. In the end, discipline and dedication will set you apart from competitors and will lead to success in your business.

Quotes

• "You will fail many times, sometimes more painful than the others. But if you fail when you're just starting out, the failure is cheaper. It's cheaper and it's faster to recover versus when you're failing at a high level. So don't be afraid to fail." (03:08 | May Silvers)

• "When you fail so many times, nothing's going to motivate you. It's always going to be dedication and commitment over motivation. You need to have the discipline. You need to have the commitment and dedication to tell yourself that you are going to make it, you're going to do it, you're going to learn how to do it, and you're going to learn how to do it well." (03:35 | May Silvers)

• "You will continue to fail without knowing what to correct. When you don't know what to correct, day 2, day 3, day 4, up to day 100, you may be making the same mistakes or you may be making different mistakes, but your progress is so slow, it will be almost impossible to find a reason to continue." (06:04 | May Silvers)

• "Don't set financial goals. Set action-based goals." (14:28 | May Silvers)

• "How you show up in your personal life is how you're going to show up in your business. And how you show up in your business is a reflection of how you show up in your personal life." (16:08 | May Silvers)

Links

Ready to gain some REAL business momentum for your events business? Schedule your FREE business consult call by clicking the link below. On the call, we will audit your pricing, packages and marketing strategies.

https://chatwith.mayyeosilvers.com/businessconsultcallapplication-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

THIS Is How You Will Win EVERY TIME - Episode 131

Thu, 28 Mar 2024 06:00:00 -0300

Success in business often hinges on factors within your control, notably resilience and commitment. In this episode of the podcast, May Silvers, who has navigated the highs and lows of the event planning industry for over two decades, delves into how these qualities are at the root of high achievement.

She points out that while many competitors may start with similar resources or ambitions, it's the sustained effort to show up and improve that sets the successful apart over time. As competitors fade away, deterred by challenges or lured by new distractions, the field clears for those who persist. Success in business is not just a result of consistent hard work but also of working smart—continuously seeking ways to grow and improve.

With two personal stories, one involving her daughter, Mia, and one about May’s initial forays into social media through Facebook Live, she illustrates that if you are doing the work and showing up with heart, you will eventually win. Others will stop showing up, or they will show up less.

In the spirit of showing up, trying new things and consistently bringing value, May is offering something that she’s never done before: she’s offering a one-night-only bootcamp scheduled for April 2nd at 8 p.m. Eastern Time. In this event, May will share the five pillars of business success that drove her businesses to the six-figure mark: pricing, marketing, sales, legalities, and time management. This session promises to be an invaluable resource for anyone aiming to elevate their business, offering both strategic insights and motivational wisdom. Click here to sign up.

Quotes

• "In business, you will win if you continue to show up and sharpen your craft. And you will win because other people stop showing up and sharpening their craft." (03:38 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "Do not be discouraged by the vanity matrix, like how many views, how many downloads, no. You never know who's watching. And your opponent, your competitors, 99% of them will pay attention to those metrics. They will get discouraged and they will be broken down again and again and again. Whatever you're experiencing, they will be experiencing. But you know what's the difference? The difference is you throw yourself a pity party at the point in time when you only have one view or one person who’s on live with you. But you move on because you know this is your job to show up." (10:12 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "To win is not just showing up, it is also a stroke of luck, banking on the fact that 99% of the people will stop showing up or show up less. If you don't show up consistently, you don't have the discipline, you do not commit to showing up on a regular basis, and the other people also stop showing up, then the person who is going to show up a little bit more is going to win." (14:58 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "You will win if you continue to give your full heart and your odds of winning are extremely high because the rest of the people will stop showing up or show up less." (16:54 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

On April 2 8pm EST, I will be hosting a 1 NIGHT only bootcamp where I will reveal the 5 strategies I used to build my event planning company into a SIX FIGURE business. Click on this link to sign up: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll245pillarslandingpage-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do Your Ideal Clients Even Know That You Are Speaking To Them? - Episode 130

Thu, 21 Mar 2024 06:00:00 -0300

What are you looking for in an ideal client…a good event budget? Host May Silvers says an ideal client must have the budget, but it’s about much more than that. In this episode, May introduces a nuanced approach to selecting your ideal clients, prioritizing compatibility in energy, work ethic, and mutual respect in addition to their ability to pay. May says that finding your ideal client requires establishing a meaningful and productive connection.

Once you are clear on what makes an ideal client, you must examine your ability to attract and qualify those clients through your marketing. A common mistake May notes among event professionals is their broad, generic marketing efforts that fail to directly address the needs of their most suitable clients. She emphasizes the importance of precise, targeted marketing to attract these ideal clients; being extremely direct in speaking exactly to a particular person or status or company you are trying to reach and then showing them the results they want and that you can deliver. Through deliberate and targeted communication, she illustrates how you can attract your ideal clients to your business, while naturally filtering out those who are not a perfect fit.

To help event planners, designers, and decorators get clarity with this concept, along with May’s 5 pillars for business success, she’s launched the Kickstart Bundle. This is a complete set of resources that includes advice on pricing, building a portfolio, excelling on social media, and understanding legal basics. It provides guidance on improving mindset and productivity, dealing with rejection, and managing time efficiently. As a special incentive, the Kickstart Bundle is currently available for an introductory price of $20 for a 10 course bundle, complete with live support, co-working sessions, and personal development calls. Click here to learn more.

Quotes

• "The first thing I look for is: “Can we work well together? Do we have the same mentality when it comes to working together?” This person doesn't have to be my BFF but they need to be able to follow my process and I need to be able to follow their process. We need to have a very clear understanding of how I work and how they respond to what I ask for. It has to be easy, no chasing, no begging for information, no yelling, no shouting, no sarcasm. It has to be good energy and also it has to be efficient." (03:46 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "If you're working with somebody, especially when it's something as personal to them as their events, you want to find somebody who respects you, your process, and also enjoys your energy, your personality, and your vibe." (07:16 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "When I do a marketing message, I'm calling out to the people I want to work with. And I'm also highlighting my superpower, my solution to a constantly faced problem. How do I know this is a constantly faced problem? Because I do my market research." (13:17 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "I want you to ask yourself, does your marketing message address a particular person, a status, or a company? Does your marketing message address a solution to a problem that you know this group of people are facing? Does your marketing message deliver a promise of a result that these people are looking for? Hit those three points, especially the part about the person. You have to call out that person." (17:30 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Yes you heard it right...We have created our LOWEST priced product for our mentorship program, introducing the Business Kickstart Bundle. It is a 10 courses bundle PLUS live support to help you implement what you are learning in the 10 courses. These 10 courses are carefully selected from our library of over 250 resources inside our mentorship program to give you the tool kit to kick start your events business, all at ONLY $20!!!!! Click on this link to check it out!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Things to Consider When Trying out New Strategies - Episode 129

Thu, 14 Mar 2024 06:00:00 -0300

As a business owner, you're constantly on a quest to bolster your business and enhance your outcomes. This journey demands a thorough assessment of where you stand and a willingness to explore new strategies and tactics. But the critical question remains: When and how do you decide it's time for a change?

In this episode, May Silvers dives into the complexities of adopting new business strategies, balancing the comfort of tried-and-tested methods against the promise of uncharted approaches. She lays out a roadmap for entrepreneurs contemplating a shift, centered around two fundamental principles: giving new strategies ample time to prove their worth and committing wholeheartedly to their implementation.

May stresses the importance of a strategic evaluation, identifying what aspects of your current operations are successful and which are not meeting expectations. She notes the common pitfalls business owners face—sticking too long with familiar routines or frequently jumping between new strategies without giving them a chance to flourish. Her advice is to practice patience and maintain a strong, consistent effort over at least a six-month period to accurately assess the impact of any new strategy.

Achieving clarity on your goals and the motivations behind pursuing a new direction is crucial. This understanding will serve as your anchor, helping you stay focused through the ups and downs of the transition. May also touches on the inevitable sacrifices that come with change, be they mental, emotional, physical, or financial, and the importance of approaching these sacrifices with openness and readiness.

This episode speaks directly to entrepreneurs and business leaders who are navigating the decision-making process around strategic change. May's insights offer valuable guidance for those looking to make informed, impactful decisions to drive their business forward.

Quotes

• "In order to become the market leader, you need to take the initiative to really assess the market to see if what you have been doing, all the different strategies that you have been doing to elevate your business, is still gaining the momentum as it was." (03:23 | May Silvers)

• "Sales generation and closing sales is a three to six month cycle. And you have to give yourself time. You can't say that I go on social media for 30 days and you're going to see momentum." (05:54 | May Silvers)

• "You have to find yourself a formula, a strategy that is going to respect your current circumstances, your current energy, your current resources, and then find a solution. Find your consistency and give it time, at least six months. Showing up with the same strategy every single time. And that six months is going to allow you to collect the data to see whether it's working or not." (07:45 | May Silvers)

• "You also have to ask yourself when you're doing this new strategy, what is the ultimate goal that you want to achieve when adapting this strategy?" (10:20 | May Silvers)

• "Just know that when you're trying out something new, it's going to be difficult. It's going to have a lot of resistance. It's going to test you on all levels, mentally, emotionally, physically." (10:58 | May Silvers)

Links

https://chatwith.mayyeosilvers.com/businessconsultcallapplication-podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

When and Where To Hire & How to Keep Good Help - Episode 128

Thu, 07 Mar 2024 06:00:00 -0400

“A lot of businesses are not able to scale and grow at the pace that they want because they are not able to find good help,” declares May Yeo Silvers as she tackles the common issue of hiring and managing your talent by sharing insights from her own experiences. She defines what “good help” means for your business, emphasizing the importance of understanding exactly what kind of help you need before starting the hiring process and taking your time to avoid common pitfalls.

May outlines a comprehensive hiring strategy into key areas: identifying who to hire, deciding when it's the right time to hire, understanding the best way to go about the hiring process, and figuring out how to keep your employees or contractors engaged and efficiently part of the team for the long haul. She recommends starting with a virtual assistant to manage backend tasks, allowing you to focus on enhancing brand visibility and expanding sales outreach. Timing is everything, May advises, suggesting a proactive approach to hiring that anticipates needs rather than reacts to pressures.

Retention is key and May discusses how to maintain a productive team through clear communication and setting clear expectations. She touches on the challenges of letting go of team members who aren't able to adapt and grow with the business, acknowledging how tough but necessary those decisions can be.

May offers practical advice on where to look for potential hires, from networking events to employment agencies. She reminds listeners that finding and keeping the right team members is a continuous effort that requires patience and adaptability. It is a process that helps in both your personal and professional growth.

Listeners are encouraged to sign up for the upcoming Slaying Sales Workshop, taking place from March 5th to 7th. The workshop is designed to equip event planners with sales techniques, help them set achievable sales goals, understand sales metrics, and build effective sales funnels to attract their ideal clients. Learn more by clicking here!

Quotes

• “You never want to hire in a hurry. Give yourself time to look at the different options and talk to different people to find the best fit.” (07:45 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “You need, as a leader, to be able to communicate your expectations very clearly. Very, very clearly. I cannot stress how important this is. You need to express how you measure their performance and how you expect them to fulfill the job.” (10:04 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “To build a team, it's not just knowing the job, but really finding someone who can gel with your personality and most importantly, also support and see the reason why you do certain things. And support your vision, your mission, your cause, and your purpose.” (16:15 | May Yeo Silvers)

• “It's moving along, molding as you go along to find that person, molding the person, molding yourself so that everybody fits into this sphere of a company culture that nobody wants to leave.” (27:57 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Mar 7 is the LAST DAY of our Slaying Sales workshop! If you missed the last 2 days where I covered how to set realistic sales goals and build a robust sales pipeline, you DO NOT want to miss tonight's session as I will dive into sales psychology, How to Sell Without Selling.

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Handling Sales Objections Is About Prevention, Not Reaction - Episode 127

Thu, 29 Feb 2024 06:00:00 -0400

When you’re in a sales discussion, are you encountering objections or are you having the opportunity to have a clarifying conversation? In this episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast, host May Yeo Silvers dives into the vital topic of sales objection prevention. The approach May takes herself and recommends for the clients she coaches is to prevent sales objections before they happen rather than having to react to them in a sales conversation.

Preventing objections starts with a marketing message that resonates with the target audience and communicates the value of the services provided. This message should clearly define whom the business serves, the problems it solves, and the unique benefits it offers, ensuring clients are pre-qualified before entering a sales conversation.

May also encourages taking the time to understand and address the deeper emotional needs of prospects, such as peace of mind, safety, and happiness. Aligning sales messages with these intangible emotional outcomes can make potential clients see the value of the services offered and create clarity about why you and not someone else with the same problem solving skills, should be hired.

Transparency and authenticity in marketing and sales conversations are also vital. Event planners should be clear about what they can deliver and their expectations from clients, building trust and ensuring a good fit.

Listeners eager to dive deeper into refining their sales strategies should not miss May's upcoming marketing workshop, "Slaying Sales." This workshop is specifically designed to equip event planners with advanced sales techniques, help set achievable goals, decode the intricacies of sales metrics, and build sales funnels that effectively convert prospects into clients. Learn more by clicking here.

Quotes

• “It's no longer talking about the money and why they want it cheaper and why it should be cheaper. It's all about clarification, how to work with me and the process of how it will look like when we work together.” (05:31 | May Silvers)

• “People are not only buying a solution when they decide to work with you. They are buying, at the end of the day, a sense of safety, a peace of mind, and a sense of happiness when they decide to work with you.” (06:21 | May Silvers)

Links

Event Planners! You have turned your passion for events into a business. But do you REALLY have a business?

If you don’t have regular sales, you don’t have a business, you have a hobby. Probably an EXPENSIVE hobby

A REAL business has:

Sales goals and metrics

Sales funnels

Proven sales strategies

You can plan and design events all day long, but when it comes to selling, you feel

Don't worry, I have got you covered! Join us on Mar 5-7 2024 for our SLAYING SALES workshop to learn the sales process and strategy to sell and close leads! Click on this link to register: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll23mar2024podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is Your Business Structured to Have Sustainable Profit? - Episode 126

Thu, 22 Feb 2024 06:00:00 -0400

It's a curious paradox that many entrepreneurs in the event industry venture into the business world seeking financial and time freedom, only to find themselves shackled by the structure of their own creations.

May zeroes in on the traps of day-to-day business operations that ensnare event planners, decorators, and designers, preventing the scalability and freedom they initially sought. She draws a vivid contrast between the conventional model of stocking up on inventory and micromanaging every event, and her own practice of concentrating on event design while delegating the execution to trusted vendors. This strategic delegation, May illustrates, is key to breaking free from operational burdens and steering towards a business model that truly offers freedom.

For event entrepreneurs struggling with the inventory dilemma, May lays out actionable strategies: training a capable team or hiring contractors to handle event setups, exploring additional revenue streams such as event rentals, and adopting a pricing model that compensates for personal involvement. These steps are not just about reducing workload; they're about enhancing the business's value proposition and ensuring profitability.

May encourages listeners to realign their business structures with their original goals of financial independence and time flexibility. She advocates for a mindful balance between satisfying client needs and building a robust sales pipeline that secures the business's future.

Quotes

• “I structure my business in a way that I respect and I understand why I want to have a business, which is I want to have the freedom of time and also financial freedom. So I need to be able to scale the business and I need to be able to have the time to do whatever I want and to work wherever I want. So these three goals. So location, I want to be able to work wherever I want. And I want to be able to scale the business so I can make money when I'm not even at the venue, okay?” (12:33 | May Silvers)

• "If your business requires you to do all the client-facing work every single day, you can never scale. Never, never, never scale." (18:16 | May Silvers)

• "When you take on something, you're giving up something else. So you've got to make sure that you understand what you're giving up. So it all comes down to how are you structuring your business." (24:25 | May Silvers)

Links

EVENTrepreneurs! You are the best in your craft. but are you good in sales too? If your business does not have consistent income, you have a hobby, not a business.

Join us on Mar 5-7 2024 for our SLAYING SALES workshop to learn the sales process and strategy to sell and close leads! Click on this link to register: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll23mar2024podcast

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should You Invest In A Course Or A Mentorship Program? - Episode 125

Thu, 15 Feb 2024 06:00:00 -0400

If you want to accelerate your event planning or design business, should you enroll in a course or engage in a mentorship program? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers breaks down the essentials, starting with courses—a self-paced learning experience often accompanied by varying levels of support, from email and group assistance to live Zoom sessions. These options present a more affordable entry point into professional development but demand a high degree of self-discipline and motivation.

In contrast, mentorship programs represent a deeper dive, offering a comprehensive and structured curriculum supported by live interactions, personal development coaching, and a strong emphasis on accountability and community. Spanning six to twelve months, these programs are designed to foster significant mindset shifts and self-belief, crucial elements for long-term success.

Understanding your learning style and personal needs is key, May suggests. She outlines how self-starters with a strong track record of independent success might thrive in a course setting. Meanwhile, those seeking transformational change and who benefit from external motivation and accountability might find mentorship programs more aligned with their needs.

Reflecting on her journey, May shares insights from her progression from mentorship to self-guided learning, underscoring the importance of self-awareness in choosing the right investment. She encourages listeners to seek perspectives from trusted advisors to illuminate which path might suit them best.

Concluding, May reaffirms the value of investing in personal and business growth, stressing that the choice between a course and mentorship should align with one’s unique circumstances and commitment to growth. It’s not just about choosing an educational investment but about selecting a path that resonates with your personal journey towards achieving your business dreams.

Quotes

• “You have to ask yourself, okay, can you count on yourself to show up to do the work? If you have not shown any track record in your life that you are a person of integrity in terms of doing what you say you will do and always do it to the end, no matter how many times you fail, you get up and you still do it. If you haven't had that track record, then you will need a mentorship program.” (14:47 | May Silvers)

• “When people tell me that they invest in things, regardless whether it's a course or mentorship program and it didn't work, I don't look at what they invest in. I look at their behavior. What kind of excuses are they giving to me? What's are the reasons they're giving to me that they say that they cannot work? Because if it works for some other people, it will work for you if you're willing to go through a certain process.” (16:41 | May Silvers)

• “Unfortunately, a lot of people refuse to get the help they need because they don't see that the investment is worth it.” (29:12 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for advice to launch, grow or scale your business, we have a few more slots open for our FREE Business Consult Call. On that call, we can talk about how to price for profit, how to grow your social media presence, what to do to attract ideal clients, what you need to start your events business, where to find good help etc.. Click on this link to schedule your FREE Business Consult Call: Aha! Moment Business Consult Call

https://chatwith.mayyeosilvers.com/business-consult-calendar

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Business Financial Numbers to Know at the Beginning and Ending of the Year - Episode 124

Thu, 08 Feb 2024 06:00:00 -0400

Do you know your numbers? In this episode, May Yeo Silvers takes listeners beyond the surface of basic profit and loss, into the heart of what truly determines a business’s financial health. With insights grounded in her own entrepreneurial journey with M2 Hospitality and Events4Anyone, May opens up about the often-overlooked aspects of financial analysis that can spell the difference between growth and stagnation.

The essence of May’s discussion lies in the critical examination of opening and closing balances, a simple yet profound indicator of a business's profitability over the year. But the journey doesn’t stop at these balances; May delves deeper, examining the intricacies of expenses across various categories such as technology, labor, and marketing. It’s not just about tracking where the money goes but understanding the return on these investments that illuminates the path to informed decision-making.

Turning the attention to revenue, May explains the importance of knowing not just how much you earn, but how and where from. This analysis isn’t merely reflective but predictive, guiding where resources should be channeled in the future to maximize profitability.

The concept of working capital is demystified as May explains its role in ensuring operational liquidity. She brings practicality to the forefront, advising on how to calculate the necessary working capital to keep the business afloat during tough times.

May’s narrative is interspersed with personal anecdotes of efficiency and cost-savings, like her strategic move to consolidate software platforms, showcasing how operational tweaks can lead to significant financial savings.

This episode stands as a testament to the power of financial literacy in the entrepreneurial journey. May doesn’t just share a formula for analyzing business finances; she invites her listeners to adopt a mindset shift. By embracing a deeper understanding of their financials, entrepreneurs can unlock new levels of insight, leading to more strategic decisions, optimized profitability, and ultimately, a healthier business.

Quotes

• “At the end of the year and at the beginning of the year, I always look at a few numbers and then I make business decisions based on what the numbers are telling me. Emotions come into play, of course, they are taken into consideration, but numbers don't lie.” (2:58 | May Silvers)

• “So let's just say that your opening balance is $20,000. The opening balance, $20,000, if you're a brand new business. Let's keep this simple. If you're a brand new business, $20,000 you put in at the beginning of the year as a working capital for your business. That means you don't have any revenue come in yet. And then at the end of the year, you can see that your closing balance is $30,000. So you're very happy that you have more money at the end of the year than the beginning of the year.” (5:19 | May Silvers)

• “I also need to know where the revenue came from. So I start looking at, okay, I booked this event, and this event came from where? Who referred me the lead? Or Did it come from Facebook ads? Or did it come from my social media where, you know, people reach out to me based on the content that I created?” (10:00 | May Silvers)

• “So before you go into thinking that, oh, you know what, just cut, cut, cut, save money. I also have to think about the efficiency of the business. doesn't make sense for me to have two separate platforms to do two separate things, whereas I can have a platform that can do it all. So it's not just the money, but also the efficiency of how the business is being run, because the efficiency will ultimately affect how profitable you are.” (19:59 | May Silvers)

• “My marketing strategy for 2024, is it going to require more working capital? If it's going to require more working capital, how much more? Is $20,000 enough? If $20,000 is enough, which is my working capital for 2023, okay, if $20,000 is sufficient based on the pipeline of the leads or sales that's coming in, so I know that there's more business coming into the business. I can actually take that $10,000 out and then put it in somewhere else where I can earn interest or invest.” (22:03 | May Silvers)

Links

If you are looking for a software that allows you to book calls, automate your proposal, contract and invoicing process, project and funds management, HoneyBook, one of the most popular software used by the majority of event prof is for you! If you want to get 50% off for the first year of your subscription, click this link to start a free trial!

Connect with May at: may@events4anyone.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mayyeosilvers/

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is Staying Status Quo a Good Place to Be? - Episode 123

Thu, 01 Feb 2024 06:00:00 -0400

Are You Settling for Less Without Realizing It? In this episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast, host May Yeo Silvers delves into a thought-provoking topic: the tendency to accept the status quo in our personal and business lives. Inspired by her own experience at a mini-clinic, where she learned she had adapted to breathing with congestion, May reflects on the broader implications of getting too comfortable with less than ideal situations.

May discusses the risks of complacency, pointing out how easily people tolerate and accept discomforts, from physical pain to financial struggles, or even neglect their well-being. She challenges listeners to introspect: Are there things you tolerate that actually are not acceptable to you? And why? Are you avoiding the changes necessary for improvement due to fear or perceived effort?

Highlighting the influence of one's social circle, May underscores the importance of surrounding oneself with people who refuse to settle for mediocrity. Being in the company of those who are content with the status quo can be a significant barrier to personal growth and achievement. May encourages her listeners to be truthful about their ambitions, seek community with achievers, and to actively pursue what they genuinely desire.

This episode serves as a powerful call to action, urging listeners to be curious about and to regularly assess their lives and businesses and to embrace the journey of personal and professional development, rather than remaining stagnant in the toleration of the status quo.

Quotes

• “We're depriving ourselves to show up at 100% because we thought that the difference between 100% and 98% is not that great. In reality, it is.” (10:34 | May Silvers)

• “Status quo means staying where you are right now, not moving forward, not moving backwards. But know that if you're not moving forward, you're not actually status quo. You're moving backwards in many other ways. you're just refusing to look at it. And you say that you've tried everything, right? Everything. But nothing's working. And finally, you gave up. How about trying not giving up?” (13:18 | May Silvers)

• “Status quo is a very dangerous way to live personally and also in your business. Staying status quo means you're getting used to things that are not serving you.” (13:45 | May Silvers)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

3 Ways to Overcome Price Objections - Episode 122

Thu, 25 Jan 2024 06:00:00 -0400

One skillset that will transform your proposal close rate is learning to overcome price objections. In a must-listen episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast, host May Yeo Silvers provides invaluable insights into understanding and navigating clients' perspectives on pricing.

The crux of the issue, May reveals, is perception. She elaborates on the importance of showcasing the complexity and expertise required in event planning. When clients see the intricate details and the level of professional skill needed, they begin to understand the true value of the services offered. This shifts their focus from cost to value.

May also delves into the psychological aspect of pricing – the subconscious price tag clients put on their own time and effort. If clients believe they can save money by taking on the task themselves, your fee must convincingly reflect the savings they would enjoy in terms of time, effort, and stress by hiring a professional instead.

Throughout the episode, May lays out a three-tiered strategy to counter price objections effectively. First, demonstrate the complexity and expertise of your work. Second, make potential clients feel the burden and effort of managing such tasks themselves. And third, highlight the extraordinary benefits they gain by employing your services – a stress-free experience, valuable time saved, and overall cost-effectiveness.

This episode is packed with strategies to transform the way you communicate value to your clients, ultimately empowering you to elevate your work, articulate your worth, and boost your business's revenue.

Quotes:

• “I don't believe in price objection. It's more about potential clients don't see the value they will get versus the amount of money they're going to invest in you.” (1:58 | May Silvers)

• “Does your work look like I can go to different stores and put it all together and make it look that way? If I can, I will be hesitant or your potential client will be hesitant to want to do it.” (10:10 | May Silvers)

• “You need to be able to communicate your price, why they should pay, and also elevate why they don't want to do it themselves, right? You need to understand what exactly is the buying motivation. So if you are getting a price objection, it's because they're not valuing something. It's not because they're not valuing your work because they look like your work is a DIY work. They are not valuing what they would be missing if they were to do it themselves. So we have to go find out what are they valuing?” (12:12 | May Silvers)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Don't Adjust Your Goals to Match Your Actions - Episode 121

Thu, 18 Jan 2024 06:00:00 -0400

Have you ever been tempted to lower a goal you’ve set for yourself when it seems too hard to achieve? In this first live recording of 2024, May Silvers warns listeners that lowering goals is a pathway to mediocrity, not success.

At the start of the year, it's common for people to set high ambitions, fueled by optimism and motivation. But around the 90-day mark, enthusiasm can wane, and doubts can arise, especially if results aren't immediately visible. It's at this critical juncture that it can be tempting to negotiate with yourself and scale back your goals.

May warns that by reducing goals to match current actions, people inadvertently settle for less, justifying reduced efforts and accepting subpar results. This mindset, she argues, not only leads to mediocrity but also stunts personal and professional growth.

To break this cycle, May advocates for adopting a strategy of baby milestones and steps. By breaking larger objectives into smaller, achievable targets, individuals can progressively amplify their efforts and maintain momentum. Align your actions with your high goals and commit to consistent, incremental progress.

If you want to kick off the year strong and create momentum for your business, check out May Silvers’ Passion to Profit workshop on Jan 23-25th. This event promises to guide participants through the critical stages of business development, including preparation, launch, and scaling.

Quotes:

• “The first 30 days is the easiest. Because everything is new and fresh. It becomes a little bit more tedious when it comes to Day 60. And it becomes almost intolerable when it comes to Day 90, especially when you haven't seen any results that you have put in for day 30 and day 60. This is when self-doubt comes in.” (4:01)

• “Ask yourself, is this the value that you will want to show to people around you? That it's okay that I adjust my goal because I really don't want to work so hard for it? That's the reality. That you adjusted your goal not because you want less. You adjusted your goal because you don't want to work so hard for the real goal that you said to yourself.” (9:50 | May Silvers)

• “When you set baby milestones, you only have to take baby steps.” (11:07 | May Silvers)

• “In order for you to reach your goal, having an action plan, having accountability, having a clear path of what needs to be done, and taking the path that is guided by people who have done it before, telling you what to do, sharing with you what to do, so that you can reduce the number of mistakes that you make yourself, that plays a huge role in staying consistent and hitting your goal in a timely fashion.” (19:01 | May Silvers)

Links

Event planners! Are you hesitant to launch your event planning business because:

You don’t know what business legalities you need to make your business legit

You don’t know how to attract your ideal clients and close them

You don’t know how to price your services, how much to pay yourself nor know when you are financially ready to hire help

Join our virtual 3 Day Passion To Profit “P.L.S” workshop starting on Jan 23-25 where I will show you:

What you need to legalize ALL areas of your events business

The BEST marketing and sales strategy to attract your ideal clients, sell without being “salesy” and get paid your worth

How to price for PROFIT, pay yourself a full time salary and budget funds to hire help to scale your events business

Let 2024 be THE Year for you to PREP, LAUNCH, SCALE your events business & turn your PASSION into PROFIT!

Spots are limited, reserve yours now! Click on this link to reserve your spot: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll22plsjan2024podcastfunnel

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Believing in AND Embodying Your 2024 Goals - Episode 120

Thu, 11 Jan 2024 06:00:00 -0400

Can you feel tomorrow's success today? Host May Silvers says a powerful tool in achieving our success is actually embodying the success today, visualizing and emotionally connecting with the successes of your future self.

May emphasizes the power of fully immersing yourself in the emotions of success now, even in your current circumstances. It's about not just talking about success or achieving goals, but truly feeling the victories of the future you. Coupled with effective tactics, experiencing these emotions in the present and aligning your actions accordingly, you fuel your journey and manifest your future success.

May also announces a resource to help you as you start your year. This January 23-25, she is offering a three-day virtual event called Passion to Profit. This workshop will cover everything from legalities and marketing to pricing for profit and scaling your business. Whether you're a seasoned event planner or just starting out, this workshop will provide you with the tools and knowledge to take your business to the next level.

Quotes:

• “It's not that the goal is difficult. It's because you think it's difficult - because you don't believe you can do all that.” (7:31 | May Silvers)

• “If you want to be a wealthy woman, you need to start to think and act like a wealthy woman. Every single decision you make, you are your future self. (7:50 | May Silvers)

• “So when I am trying to hit or break my income ceiling, I have to start thinking that I'm wealthy already. What would a wealthy person do? What would a CEO do? What would a successful CEO do in their business when they're presented this opportunity? Would a successful CEO be nickel and diming? Like, oh, should I invest in this or should I invest in that? The successful CEO will already know what is the best decision to make for their business because they're already farsighted. They are not making decisions based on their current reality. So this is a game that I play with myself all the time. I envision that I'm already there. You have to envision that you are already there and then get into that feeling and then make a decision based on that.” (9:46)

• “This is a game that I play with myself all the time. I envision that I'm already there. You have to envision that you are already there and then get into that feeling and then make a decision based on that.” (10:29 | May Silvers)

• “I am the boss. That money is mine. The success is mine. Show up and act like one. Okay? You say you want something, show up and act like you already have it. So your reality has to be so much stronger than your current view of your current reality. That's how you're going to achieve your goal.” (17:00 | May Silvers)

Links

Event planners! Is 2024 YOUR year to LAUNCH & SCALE your event planning business?

If your answer is “YES!”, join us at our virtual 3 Day Passion To Profit “P.L.S” workshop where you will learn:

PREP: What you need to legalize ALL areas of your events business

LAUNCH: The BEST marketing and sales strategy to attract your ideal clients, sell without being “salesy” and get paid your worth

SCALE: How to price for PROFIT, pay yourself a full time salary and budget funds to hire help to scale your events business

The virtual workshop starts on Jan 23-25 2023 and will be hosted by May Yeo Silvers, a multiple 6 figure events veteran and business mentor who has helped several event planners PREP, LAUNCH, SCALE their events business & turned their PASSION into PROFIT!

Click on this link to sign up: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll22plsjan2024podcastfunnel

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Don’t Lose Sight of Your REAL Goal When Chasing Your 2024 Goals - Episode 119

Thu, 04 Jan 2024 06:00:00 -0400

In the inaugural episode of 2024, host May Yeo Silvers takes on the challenge of finding balance and harmony between financial ambition and personal happiness and fulfillment. May opens up about her own experiences, offering a heartfelt and transparent look at how significant business successes in the past years, though gratifying, came with a cost to her personal life and relationships and what she changed to improve her overall happiness.

May warns that relentlessly pursuing financial milestones can inadvertently erode the very freedom and joy that entrepreneurship promises, transforming it into a perpetual quest for more. Furthermore, May addresses how ego can sometimes drive this pursuit to unhealthy extremes, compromising both well-being and personal connections.

The key, as May discovered, was in redefining what prosperity truly means. She describes her journey towards a more balanced approach to life, where success is not defined solely by financial achievement but also by the quality of life's experiences and the depth of relationships.

This episode serves as a reminder for entrepreneurs setting new year’s goals to stay true to their core values while seeking success. It's about finding a balance that not only fosters financial growth but also enriches personal and relational well-being. May’s journey encourages listeners to consider: How can you redefine success to encompass not just wealth, but a life that fulfills you on all levels?

Quotes:

• “My account was fat, fat, fat. But for everything else, I was in the negative.” (25:30 | May Silvers)

• “May, why are you working so hard? Even though we put on our mantra that we want all those things, we want to spend time with our family, be intentional, be present. I wasn't living out what I wrote.” (26:01 | May Silvers)

• “When you're chasing your financial 2024 goal, bear in mind, why? What's the whole purpose of all this money?” (30:26 | May Silvers)

Links:

Lifeonaire: An Uncommon Approach to Wealth, Success, and Prosperity - https://a.co/d/eVkEdtY

Event planners! Is 2024 YOUR year to LAUNCH & SCALE your event planning business?

If your answer is “YES!”, join us at our virtual 3 Day Passion To Profit “P.L.S” workshop where you will learn:

PREP: What you need to legalize ALL areas of your events business

LAUNCH: The BEST marketing and sales strategy to attract your ideal clients, sell without being “salesy” and get paid your worth

SCALE: How to price for PROFIT, pay yourself a full time salary and budget funds to hire help to scale your events business

Click on this link to sign up: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll22plsjan2024podcastfunnel

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

If It Is Not on the Calendar, It Ain’t Happening! - Episode 118

Thu, 28 Dec 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Embrace your calendar as more than just a scheduling tool! In this episode, May emphasizes that living life on autopilot leads to missed opportunities and a lack of fulfillment. She advocates for intentional scheduling, which involves deliberately setting goals and the technique of creating milestones for each goal on the calendar. This practice creates opportunities to regularly evaluate progress, audit actions, and make necessary adjustments to stay on track.

May explains that this kind of structured approach provides a framework for not only setting goals but also for continuously assessing how well you're moving toward them. It allows for moments of reflection, where you can course-correct or amplify efforts to accelerate positive outcomes. This level of accountability ensures that you're actively engaged in your journey towards your goals.

Another crucial aspect that May discusses is understanding the 'why' behind your goals. Knowing the deeper reasons for pursuing certain objectives can be a massive driving force. This, coupled with a calendar-centric approach, forms a powerful combination for goal attainment.

May's mantra encourages listeners who are thinking about 2024 to step out of the mundane flow of life and to take control of their time and, ultimately, their success so that they can enjoy the life and business they desire next year.

In this last episode of 2023, May shares her wishes that all listeners will be intentional, be present and savor every single moment they are blessed with!

Quotes:

• “For me, living is really knowing what you're doing every single minute in a day, really being present.” (3:47 | May Silvers)

• “Today I'm going to talk about not going through the motion. And if it's not on the calendar, it doesn't count. Why is it important to be on the calendar? The reason why we want to put it on the calendar is we have set an intention. Okay? We set an intention that something's going to happen on that day.” (5:25 | May Silvers)

• “You want to be already tracking yourself month after month. So if you don't see any progress, you have time to catch what are you not doing correctly, what needs to be done, and then you can course correct. So when you are every single month closer to the date of your date of achievement you are auditing your progress and your process you are giving yourself time to course correct and this is the part that people tend to forget.” (10:37 | May Silvers)

• “You need to do some work in regards to understanding your why. Why do you want to have this? Why do you want to have this goal? Because if you don't define your why, the desire is not there. If you never had it, you never have the loss of not having it. So it's easy to give up.” (16:04 | May Silvers)

Links

This is the LAST week before the 50% discount expires for HoneyBook, one of the most popular software used by the majority of event prof! If you want to get 50% off for the first year of your subscription, click this link to start a free trial! The offer expires on Dec 31 2023. After Dec 31st 2023, the discount will be 35% off the first year.

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Fitting Your Business into Your Life, Not the Other Way Around - Episode 117

Thu, 21 Dec 2023 06:00:00 -0400

“Many entrepreneurs make the mistake of trying to work their life around the business, which is insane," says May Silvers. In this episode, May lays out a step-by-step plan for entrepreneurs to harmonize their personal and professional commitments within one master calendar.

May's plan begins with prioritizing personal life. She advises starting with a 12-month calendar and first marking off time for personal and family commitments, vacations, and personal retreats. This approach ensures that these crucial life moments are secured and not overrun by business demands.

Next, May suggests moving to professional goals. She instructs listeners to then schedule their business-related activities, like speaking engagements, trade shows, and client events. The key here, as May illustrates through her own examples, is to find a balance. This might mean making compromises to align business events with already blocked-off personal time.

May emphasizes the importance of teamwork and communication with family and loved ones. She advises discussing and coordinating these planned schedules with family members to ensure mutual support and respect for each other's commitments.

The final step in May's plan involves financial planning. She encourages listeners to be mindful of the budgetary aspects of both leisure and business activities. May suggests developing a financial strategy to generate the necessary funds for both personal and professional goals.

This step-by-step guide approach to annual planning is a fresh and practical framework for entrepreneurs to achieve balance, ensuring that both their personal well-being and professional growth are nurtured.

Quotes

• “I want to stress that you are merging what you're doing for your business into your personal life, not the other way round. Okay? So by doing that, we are honoring the whole reason why we start a business. We get to live in the present with our family, with our loved ones, not just living for the business.” (2:32 | May Silvers)

• “Everything is already on my calendar. Once we can see it at one glance, it feels good because I'm not giving up my personal time to put in a lot of business activity. And I'm not putting in so much personal time that I don't have time for my business activity. Everything has its place.” (15:46 | May Silvers)

• “We start planning from the big picture, and then we go into the medium picture, and then we eventually go down to the monthly and weekly picture. So yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly.” (18:07 | May Silvers)

Links

There are two more weeks left before the 50% discount expires for HoneyBook, one of the most popular software used by the majority of event professionals! If you want to get 50% off for the first year of your subscription, click this link to start a free trial! The offer expires on Dec 31, 2023. After Dec 31st 2023, the discount will be 35% off the first year.

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Auditing Your Business Investment & Opportunity Cost for 2023 - Episode 116

Thu, 14 Dec 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Event planners, this exercise can unlock a bigger future for your business! Join host May Yeo Silvers in a deep dive into auditing your business investments and opportunities in 2023. This critical analysis helps you understand what happened in your business and what you may want to change for better results in 2024.

May begins this episode by addressing the financial and emotional risks event planners often take, such as paying for leads, attending trade shows, or hiring social media experts. She urges a thorough evaluation of these decisions. Did these investments drive qualified leads and enhanced brand visibility? Understanding what benchmarks are associated with each tactic, and auditing those results are key to gauging their effectiveness, and your own sales and marketing effectiveness, as well.

Shifting focus to opportunity costs, May prompts listeners to consider what they might have lost by not investing in certain areas. She poses reflective questions: What if you didn't use a paid leads platform or participate in a trade show? How much time and effort did you invest in generating leads organically? And if you decided against hiring a social media manager, could you have achieved the same level of success independently?

Personal and business growth investments also come under scrutiny. May encourages evaluating the real impact of mentorship programs or courses on personal development and business progress. If you know you need help but for whatever reason decided not to invest in yourself/business, did you get the results you are looking for by holding yourself accountable to do the research, implement and audit your process? If your answer is no, it might be time to rethink strategies for the new year.

Throughout the episode, May stresses the importance of introspection and accountability. It's about learning from past choices and using those lessons to make smarter decisions moving forward.

In her concluding remarks, May reminds listeners to weigh both the risks taken and potential opportunities missed. There is a lot of homework in this episode, but May encourages listeners to take the time to do this comprehensive audit. It is pivotal for event planners aiming to make informed decisions and set themselves up for success in the next year.

Quotes:

• “Look at the investment that you made for a paid leads platform. How much money did you invest? How many leads did you get?” (6:50 | May Silvers)

• “Whether you close any leads from this leads platform does not measure the efficiency or the effectiveness of the portal. But you should still consider evaluating, did you close those leads? Because it may give you an idea whether you have a marketing problem or a sales problem.” (7:16 | May Silvers)

• “So that's when you know that, okay, in 2024, I need to work on my pitch, my sales, my sales conversation. So you don't have a problem getting leads, you’ve got a problem closing them.” (8:31 | May Silvers)

• “Personal development is also one thing that I want you to audit as well. Where you were before and where you are after, okay? If you are not where you want to be, that means you don't believe that you have changed at all, okay? If you don't believe you have changed at all, then you have to look at what happened.” (21:56 | May Silvers)

• “I want you to really take the time to evaluate what happened in 2023, the investment that you made, the investment that you did not make, what worked and what didn't.” (33:26 | May Silvers)

Links

3 more weeks left before the 50% discount expires for HoneyBook, one of the most popular software used by the majority of event prof! If EFFICIENCY if your word for 2024, HoneyBook could be your solution!

From proposal stage to billing, it is as easy as ABC. If you want to get 50% off for the first year of your subscription, click this link to start a free trial! The offer expires on Dec 31 2023. After Dec 31st 2023, the discount will be 35% off the first year.

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What It Really Takes To Own A Successful Venue with Jonathan Aymin - Episode 115

Thu, 07 Dec 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Meet event venue management pioneer, Jonathan Aymin on this episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast. May Silvers invites listeners on an educational journey with her guest, who shares his transition from a staffing company to venue management.

Jonathan begins by drawing a parallel between venue management and event management, emphasizing the tailored solutions, marketing finesse, and operational expertise crucial in the wedding industry. He speaks about the benefits of having a team focused on this niche, significantly impacting revenue and achieving specific property goals.

His personal evolution into venue management stemmed from a desire for broader influence within the industry. With experiences in both hospitality and staffing, Jonathan was well-prepared for the challenges and steep learning curve of venue management. He openly discusses the nuances and hurdles encountered during this transition. A critical decision in this journey, as Jonathan explains, is whether to lease or purchase a venue. Initially opting to lease minimized risks and offered real industry insights, but he also outlines plans for future purchases, stressing the importance of understanding the ‘owner DNA’ and ‘venue DNA’ in making such decisions.

Jonathan advises potential venue owners to evaluate their personal goals, financial situation, and readiness to handle operational demands. He suggests gaining firsthand experience or consulting with industry experts as essential steps. Understanding the distinct ‘DNA’ of the owner and the venue is vital – it’s about aligning personal traits and goals with the venue’s character and market position.

May Yeo Silvers wraps up the episode, reinforcing Jonathan’s insights on comprehending one's capabilities, market dynamics, and financial considerations in venue leasing and ownership. She emphasizes the necessity of aligning one's actions with their goals.

This episode is like a mini-masterclass! Listeners are treated to a comprehensive and insightful discussion, offering valuable takeaways for anyone aspiring to venture into venue management and ownership. Jonathan’s journey and advice serve as a compelling guide, illustrating the importance of understanding the deeper aspects of venue ownership and management.

Quotes:

• "What our company specializes in is creating custom solutions for a property owner who either is looking for extra revenue for their property and they don't know how to turn it into a venue yet." (34:06 | Jonathan Aymin)

• "You have to look at those three things. What's the venue DNA? What's the owner DNA? And then the actual money side of it." (34:14 | Jonathan Aymin)

• "You can find, as you evolve, as you learn, as your business teaches you lessons about yourself, you start to realize, I like this more, and you have the opportunity to listen to your business, to listen to your heart and mind as it's developing. Gently move over so even though we didn't have specific experience in venue management we had enough associated experience that we were already starting at an elevated standpoint than someone maybe who was coming brand new to the industry. " (16:34 | Jonathan Aymin)

Links

Connect with Jonathan Aymin:

Venue Management & Consulting: https://www.cseventservices.com

CSE Venues: https://csevenues.com

Podcast: https://www.thevenuerx.com

WEVA: https://www.wevahub.com

Email: venues@cseventservices.com

LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonathan-aymin-065aa679/

Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/jonoaymin

YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCd5m3xiVauCEvQPPaVWraIg

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Buying Cycle Of Cold, Warm and Referral Leads - Episode 114

Thu, 30 Nov 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Understanding different types of leads and what to do about them is a game-changer for growing your business. In her latest episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast, May Yeo Silvers delves into the nuances of managing different types of leads in your business. She categorizes leads into three groups: cold, warm, and referral, each requiring a unique approach so you can effectively move them closer to conversion.

May defines cold leads as those who have minimal awareness of your business, whereas warm leads have engaged with your content and are considering your services. The most valuable referral leads, come from past clients or those familiar with your brand, bringing a level of trust and familiarity to the table.

Highlighting the significance of referral leads, May advises allocating about half of your sales efforts to strengthening relationships with past and current clients, as well as brand enthusiasts. This group, while not directly using your services, can act as powerful advocates.

In terms of sales outreach, May recommends a balanced approach. Spend a quarter of your time creating authoritative content that demonstrates your expertise. This establishes your brand's credibility and attracts warm leads, who should receive the remaining 25% of your effort, guiding them towards feeling safe to engage further.

Moving leads through the buying cycle is another key focus. May outlines clear strategies for each lead type: providing solution clarity and results for cold leads, offering evidence and testimonials to warm leads, and giving reassurance and a sense of safety to referral leads to encourage their buying decision.

Wrapping up the episode, May introduces an exciting opportunity for listeners: her upcoming in-person event on vision and strategic planning for 2024. Attendees will be equipped with the tools to set intentional goals and craft a comprehensive roadmap for success. Don't miss this chance to turn your aspirations into actionable plans. Secure your spot now and get ready to transform your approach to business in the coming year. Join May and other like-minded professionals for a day of learning, growth, and strategic planning!

Quotes:

• “Just say, ‘Hey, I saw you post about this problem that you are facing or that you have a question about how to plan this particular event. Here, this is the content that I've created to help my clients, to help my followers. So watch this”. Send it to them. so now they'll be like ‘Oh wow, they really are seeing me, they see that I have a problem and they're actually taking the time to send me this information.’ Now you've got their attention.” (14:14 | May Silvers)

• “After having some form of communication in terms of sending them the content, and then maybe follow up to say, ‘Hey, did you enjoy the content? Did you get a chance to watch this?’ But don't stalk them. When they follow you on your social media, you follow them back on their social media. You want to be able to see what they're doing. You want to hit the like and the love button and give some form of a comment. So the whole goal here is to let them be familiar with your name, you peak their curiosity, and then they research you.” (14:53 | May Silvers)

• “Share an event that has a similar challenge to the client. Tell them your process, so you're making them feel comfortable. So they know what it's like if they were to work with you. Now you are making them feel safe.” (16:59 | May Silvers)

Links

Join me at our last in-person event for 2023 at Fort Lauderdale, Florida on Dec 2 2023!

This impactful and life changing event starts at 8am-5pm and there is a virtual and in-person option. Click on this link to get more details: Virtual Ticket, In-Person Ticket

Click here to see what the attendees who attended our Vision & Strategic Planning 2023 had to say about the event!

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Learn All About SEO With Sara Dunn - Episode 113

Thu, 23 Nov 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Are you tired of your website not showing up on Google? Do you want to learn the secrets of SEO and how it can transform your event planning business? In this episode, host May Silvers interviews SEO expert Sara Dunn. Sara shares her background in digital marketing and how she got started in the events industry. She explains that SEO stands for search engine optimization and is the art of influencing where a website shows up on search engines like Google. Sara emphasizes the importance of using keywords that potential clients would search for when optimizing a website. She advises event professionals to think about what their ideal clients would search for and incorporate those keywords into their website content.

When comparing SEO to other outlets like Google ads, Facebook ads, and organic social media outreach, Sara acknowledges that SEO may not be the right fit for every business. However, she emphasizes that SEO is ideal for long-term strategists who want to do something right that will pay off over time. She believes that SEO is the only strategy that is free, only needs to be done once, and continues to bring in new clients year after year.

If you’re ready to reach rockstar status on Google, Sara’s ready to be your geeky best friend that shows you how it’s done! For those interested in learning more about SEO, Sara offers her Wedding SEO Bootcamp program, which teaches event professionals how to set up SEO on their websites in just two weeks.

Quotes:

• "SEO is the art of influencing where your website and your business shows up on search engines." (06:11 | Sara Dunn)

• "The most common mistake is not thinking about the actual keywords that your ideal clients would be searching for." (21:23 | Sara Dunn)

• "SEO is the only strategy that is free, that you only have to do once, that keeps paying off for you year after year." (31:59 | Sara Dunn)

• "The most transformative way to learn SEO is to actually learn the step-by-step process of everything you need to know." (35:58 | Sara Dunn)

Links

We completed the 2 part series of Lead Generation last week. This week, we highlighted one of the lead generation strategies, Search Engine Optimization, SEO for short. If you have enjoyed today's episode and want to learn more SEO tips from Sara, click on this link to access more resources!

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

2 Part Series of Lead Generation - Part 2 - Which lead generation strategy should you consider - Episode 112

Thu, 16 Nov 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Lead generation takes a personal twist in the second installment of our two-part series on this vital topic. If you haven't listened to part 1 yet, be sure to catch up for the full picture. In this episode, May zeroes in on the importance of customizing lead generation strategies to fit individual needs and situations. She identifies three key factors to consider: available time, resources, and personal preference.

For those with ample time but limited budgets, May suggests organic outreach. Building strong relationships with vendors, actively participating in networking events, and making an impact at trade shows are her recommended approaches. However, she advises those who may struggle with social anxiety to consider alternatives to these face-to-face methods. Conversely, event professionals facing time constraints but with some budgetary flexibility might benefit more from paid lead platforms and targeted advertising. This approach offers a quicker lead acquisition, bypassing the need for extensive personal networking.

The role of personality in shaping your lead generation strategy is crucial. May explains how digital natives may thrive using online marketing tactics like SEO, blogging, and social media engagement, whereas those who are more extroverted may prefer traditional, in-person marketing techniques.

Drawing from her experiences, May contrasts the lead generation strategies she employed for her event planning business, M2 Hospitality, with the digital-centric methods used for her coaching business, Events4Anyone. She encourages listeners to find and adopt strategies that resonate with their own personalities and objectives, highlighting the need for setting practical goals and occasionally stepping outside their comfort zones.

For those seeking guidance in crafting their lead generation approach or overall planning for 2024, May extends an invitation to her upcoming in-person event on December 2nd in Ft. Lauderdale, Florida. This event, dedicated to vision and strategic planning, promises to be an invaluable resource for the year ahead.

Quotes:

• “If you totally decide you are doing something and you're forced to do it, you will do less of it. So I want to teach you to find something that you can do first and have this sense of accomplishment. And then when you grow confident, then you will have less resistance to do the things that you don't like to do.” (9:08 | May Silvers)

• “G-O-L-D, the money is there, but you have to move from this place to that place to go get the money. You have to move yourself closer to the money. And that only happens if you take action and not just - ‘look at that, oh my God, all those leads, over there why these people have all this business and I don't?’ - because they move! They move towards where the leads are and then they continue to do what they need to do to close them.” (16:25 | May Silvers)

• “Look at these three factors, okay? Time, resources, personality. And then decide what suits you the best and then immediately take action on the lowest hanging fruit.” (17:02 | May Silvers)

Links

Join me at our last in-person event for 2023 at Fort Lauderdale, Florida on Dec 2 2023!

This impactful and life changing event starts at 8am-5pm and there is a virtual and in-person option. Click on this link to get more details: Virtual Ticket , In-Person Ticket.

Early bird pricing expires on Nov 19 2023!

Click here to hear what the attendees who attended our Vision & Strategic Planning 2023 had to say about the event!

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Part 1 of a 2 Part Series of Lead Generation: Where are all the leads? - Episode 111

Thu, 09 Nov 2023 06:00:00 -0400

The cornerstone of any thriving event planning business is effective lead generation. In the first installment of a two-part series, master event planner and business coach, May Silvers, focuses on three fundamental strategies for generating leads: the power of referrals, the potential in reactivation, and the advantage of renewal.

May explains that referral marketing involves building strong relationships with vendors, venues, and past clients who can refer new leads to your business. She emphasizes the need for these referral partners to be familiar with your brand, services, and pricing in order to make effective referrals and advocate for your brand. Revisiting prospects that have previously shown interest can uncover untapped opportunities. May explains the process of reactivating these leads by re-establishing contact at just the right moment to capture their business. Renewal strategy centers on your existing client base and their forthcoming events. May discusses practical ways to stay connected with former clients, ensuring your event planning services remain their first choice.

Traditional marketing still holds value in the digital age. May breaks down how participation in trade shows, networking events, and direct outreach can substantially expand your lead pool. Shifting to digital avenues, May clarifies the role of SEO, social media presence, and email marketing in establishing online credibility and enhancing visibility to prospective clients. When it comes to paid lead strategies, May outlines how popular platforms can streamline the lead acquisition process, though she advises a balanced approach to using these tools.

This episode is packed with actionable advice on lead generation that will help you to build a robust pipeline. Be sure to join us for part two, where we'll continue to uncover effective lead generation strategies for your event planning business.
As you are planning for a successful 2024, May offers listeners a very special early bird offer for her upcoming in-person event on December 2nd in Ft. Lauderdale, FL which is focused on creating your vision and strategic planning for next year!

Quotes:

• "Lead generation is probably one of the biggest challenges that a lot of entrepreneurs face." (01:44 | May Silvers)

• “What's your sales activities calendar? Do you have a calendar? Does it guide you on which day of the week you're going to do what activities? Which day of the month you're going to do what activities? If you don't have that, you don't have a sales outreach strategy.” (26:08 | May Silvers)

• "Paid leads platforms are great because it's no longer sweat equity, you don't have to work a long period of time to get leads." (26:48 | May Silvers)

• "You should always spread out your lead generation strategies across traditional marketing, digital marketing, and paid leads platforms." (29:10 | May Silvers)

Links

Join me at our last in-person event for 2023 at Fort Lauderdale, Florida on Dec 2 2023!

This impactful and life changing event starts at 8am-5pm and there is a virtual and in-person option. Click on this link to get more details: Virtual Ticket , In-Person Ticket.

Early bird pricing expires on Nov 19 2023!

Click here to hear what the attendees who attended our Vision & Strategic Planning 2023 had to say about the event!

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Introducing the Unicorn of the Event Planning and Designer Software - The Planning Diva - Episode 110

Thu, 02 Nov 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are you tired of juggling multiple tabs, emails, and messages while planning events? Meet Planning Diva, an all-in-one event planning and design software designed to streamline your workflow, boost your efficiency and improve communication internally, with vendors and with clients.

In this episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast, Jenny Maxwell shares her journey from event planner and designer to software developer for event planners. Listen to how Jenny started her event planning and designing business, hear about a lesson she learned the hard way about owning inventory, and how her journey as an EVENTrepreneur led her to developing a software that is a UNICORN in the industry.

Discover how Jenny's frustration with scattered communication and inefficiency led her to create Planning Diva, a powerful tool that combines project management, collaboration, and 3D visualization in one place. With Planning Diva, you can easily create mood boards, manage budgets, and communicate seamlessly with clients and vendors, PLUS sending proposal, contracts AND processing payments. Say goodbye to endless email threads and hello to a more organized and productive event planning experience.

Jenny is offering our listeners a MAJOR discount for the launch of her software. She is offering the first 100 subscriptions at $500 a year instead of $1500 and this is a lifetime guarantee. This price will not go up even with everything she adds in the next few years. She is also offering a 2 week free trial on the Planning Diva page. When you are ready to sign up, use this link to lock in the $500 lifetime guarantee price!

Quotes:

• "I felt like I was scattered and inefficient and I felt like there has to be a better way of organizing and doing things." (33:03 | Jenny Maxwell)

• "Efficiency is key in business. And I felt like I was being so inefficient by having so many different tabs open. I was using my Google Docs. I was using, you know, my to-do, my budget, my calendar. I had a Microsoft Publisher was how I was doing my layouts and mood boards from Pinterest. I was just all over the place. And it wasn't easy for me to share with a client. And it wasn't easy for me to share with my vendors. And so I had a couple of problems going on. I couldn't collaborate with vendors very well. And I wasn't organized" (38:25 | Jenny Maxwell)

• "I wanted anyone that's involved in Mary's wedding to be able to talk about Mary's wedding. And anyone that happens to have questions about AV can talk about AV. And so I wanted to build that collaboration piece so that you're not looking through DMs and emails and Facebook Messenger and text messages trying to find answers to these things. It's all right there. And if someone, say the client, might want to know a question, they can directly ask it there as well." (43:18 | Jenny Maxwell)

• “You are definitely a very courageous, forward-thinking business owner, not just an event planner, but doing a software that marries with your passion, that's a winning strategy because you can feel the pain of the problem and you can also feel the relief of the solution. And you're surrounded by a good community of all event planners who can give you feedback to constantly evolve the product, which is great. Congratulations!” (51:33 | May Silvers)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

To visit get your 2 week free trial of Planning Diva visit: www.planningdiva.com

Subscribe to Planning Diva with an exclusive $500 lifetime guarantee price: https://buy.stripe.com/6oE17SgzD5D269qfZ1

Part 3 of the 3 Part Series of Things To Consider When Planning A Ticketed In-Person - Episode 109

Thu, 26 Oct 2023 06:00:00 -0300

What you do when you are onsite and after the event is all about being prepared, managing on-site challenges, and gathering and analyzing many types of feedback. These are the cornerstones of post-event success and the focus of part 3 of our 3-part series about running a successful, profitable ticketed in-person event. May Silvers, master event planner and business coach, shares her crucial tips in these areas. If you haven't yet, be sure to listen to parts 1 and 2 of this series.

What should happen on-site should be a bigger focus for event planners. May reveals the secrets to managing your event like a pro on-site, checklists for what to bring, tips for booking ample time before the event to checking room setups and run walkthroughs, all the way to practicing scenarios for registration and AV setups and materials. May shares the reports and invoices she reviews every single day, and her insider tips on avoiding unnecessary food and beverage charges, avoiding fees and and catching errors on invoices from the venue.

As your event starts to end, your work is not done. Be certain to bring printed surveys to your event and collect attendee feedback on-site. Why? Because immediate insights are fresher and often more genuine. And, close your event by teasing the next one. Get them excited and offer super early bird pricing. There are many details on this strategy in Part 2 of this series.

Understanding success of your event goes back to the objective of the event. You will measure the benchmarks and metrics that relate to your objective, but May dives deep into both tangible metrics, like ticket sales and new client sign-ups, and intangible metrics like growth in social media followers and email database expansion. These key pieces of feedback are vital facets of your event's ROI. Post-event reflection isn't just for metrics; it's an opportunity to celebrate the team and gather feedback from the host to the crew. Those who went the extra mile for the event deserve acknowledgment and their feedback is gold for your future endeavors.

If you aspire to elevate your event planning game, and want more support, May has just the thing: her Ticketed In-Person Event course or a one-on-one consulting engagement with her. You can schedule a call with May to discuss how she can support your event success.

Quotes:

• “Many of the event planners I work with do not understand how important the on-site and after event work is compared to the rest of the planning process." (1:19 | May Silvers)

• "Always book at least four hours before the start time of the event, or ideally the day before the start day of your event." (03:32 | May Silvers)

• “I want to see the no show report. I want to see the in-house report. I want to see the arrival report. I want to see the cancellation report. OK, so these four reports, for sure, I will always ask, and I will review every single day. I will also ask to see the daily invoice.” (11:32 | May Silvers)

• "You want to make sure that your registration table should be all ready to go, what we call show ready, 30 minutes before the official start time of registration or for your event." (17:37 | May Silvers)

• "You want to measure things that are a little bit intangible, such as did you see a peak from your social media following? Did your email database increase as well?" (23:26 | May Silvers)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Part 2 of the 3 Part Series of Things To Consider When Planning A Ticketed In-Person Event - Episode 108

Thu, 19 Oct 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Ticket pricing, ticket sales strategy and sponsorship sales: these 3 areas of focus are key to running a successful, profitable ticketed in-person event. In this episode, which is part 2 of the 3-part series, May Silvers explains concepts you must learn in these areas. If you haven't yet, be sure to catch up with part 1 which covers defining the objective of your event and avoiding common mistakes.

Grasping the costs associated with your event is pivotal. May dissects them into three categories: fixed costs, which include costs like venue fees, variable costs include costs like food and décor which change based on the number of attendees, and the 'nice-to-have' costs, which can be a blend of the previous two. To optimize ticket pricing, take the event's production cost, add your desired profit, and divide by the number of tickets you aim to sell. By doing this, you ensure profit with every ticket, especially once fixed costs are covered. A smart trick she shares is to calculate ticket prices with and without those 'nice-to-have' costs, letting you see both ticket price points and gauge market tolerance.

A pivotal 90-day pre-event checkpoint: at this time, ticket sales should have covered your event's expenses. Falling short? May advises strategies from paid promotions to organic outreach and even affiliate partnerships. Consider tiered pricing, like early bird rates, to prompt quicker ticket buys.

Sponsorships play a crucial role in covering event costs and maximizing revenue from in-person ticketed events, and May provides insights on approaching sponsors effectively. It's essential to approach sponsors that align with your brand and services. When you understand the sponsors' objectives, you can tailor sponsorship packages to fulfill their marketing goals. An important tip is to Initiate these conversations around year-end when many firms set their marketing budgets.

For those wanting support with an in-person ticketed event, May offers a specialized Ticketed In-Person Event course or a one-on-one consulting engagement with her. You can schedule a call with May to discuss how she can support your event success.

Quotes:

• "You take the cost of producing the event and you add on the potential profit that you want to make from the ticketed in-person event, and you divide that by the number of people you want to have in your event." (06:32 | May Silvers)

• "You want to put a cap on the maximum number of tickets that you can sell for super early bird and early bird tickets because you are not selling those tickets at a price point that is going to help you cover the cost." (23:15 | May Silvers)

• "Sponsorship is a great way to bring in revenue to cover the cost for the event." (32:45 | May Silvers)

• "When you're approaching sponsors, you have to think about who is coming to the event. Will these people buy from this company, the company who's sponsoring some component of your event?" (36:15 | May Silvers)

• "A lot of corporations look at their marketing budget at the end of the year. When you pitch sponsorship, you want to pitch by September, October. So whatever they did not use for the year, they can spend on you." (42:45 | May Silvers)

Links

Sign up for our last virtual workshop for 2023: CEO Business Audit Masterclass on October 25-26, 2023.
Click the link for more info: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll21bizauditmasterclass37podcast

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Part 1 of the 3 Part Series of Things To Consider When Planning A Ticketed In-Person Event - Episode 107

Thu, 12 Oct 2023 06:00:00 -0300

"Planning a ticketed in-person event? Avoid these common mistakes!" In this episode of the Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast, May Yeo Silvers, an experienced event planner, shares valuable insights on the key considerations when hosting a ticketed in-person event. May announces an exciting three-part series on planning and hosting ticketed in-person events. She shares that each episode will cover different aspects of event planning, including common mistakes, ticket pricing, sales strategy, and sponsorships.

When crafting an event agenda, it is crucial to prioritize the needs and wants of the attendees over those of the host. This common mistake often occurs when event planners focus on their own preferences and fail to consider what the attendees actually want. By putting the host's needs and wants first, the event may not be as beneficial or engaging for the attendees. For instance, the host may have a personal preference for an oceanfront venue, but the attendees may prioritize cost reduction over location. Similarly, without input from attendees, hosts may prioritize the wrong topics or the wrong level of information for their guests. To avoid this mistake, event planners should actively gather data and feedback from potential attendees. By considering the needs and wants of the attendees, event planners can create an agenda that is tailored to their interests, resulting in a more successful and engaging event.

Quotes:

• "The deciding factor is, to pick a venue, is the venue, does it have a conducive facility that people can learn from you?" (16:45 | May Silvers)

• "So there's no point talking about the topics that I want to talk about, even though I think it's beneficial for them. But I must first make sure that I talk about the topics that they want me to talk about. And if time allows, then I will include the topics that I want to talk about. OK? So you want to be able to collect data to find out What do they want you to talk about? And not just you talking about the things you want to talk about, okay?" (19:34 | May Silvers)

• "I want to be able to have time to network with the people who's there with me or who are the other attendees and also have some workshop incorporated in it so we can implement and do some work in addition to listen to you teach." (21:17 | May Silvers)

• "Three months before the start date of the event, you need to be able to already sell enough tickets to cover at least 50% to 75% of the cost of the event." (27:55 | May Silvers)

• "You don't want to just move on so fast without spending time to audit your whole process and also the return on investment, was it worth your time and money to do this event? (35:17 | May Silvers)

Links

Sign up for our last virtual workshop for 2023: CEO Business Audit Masterclass on October 25-26 2023. Click the link for more info: https://learnwith.mayyeosilvers.com/ll21bizauditmasterclass37podcast

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Don’t Start a Business Because You Hate Your Day Job - Episode 106

Thu, 05 Oct 2023 06:00:00 -0300

"If you think that it's easier or the grass is greener when you start your own business compared to doing your day job, you are absolutely wrong," says May Silvers. Sick and tired of your 9-5 and dreaming of starting a business? Before you take that leap and leave your day job, you must listen to the sage advice offered in this eye-opening episode. May Silvers shares a very honest reality check for aspiring entrepreneurs who think that starting a business will solve all their problems. She debunks the myth that entrepreneurship is easier or more fun than a day job, highlighting the challenges and risks involved. May emphasizes the importance of evaluating your mindset, including how you handle rejection, imposter syndrome, self-belief, and your relationship with money. Being an entrepreneur can be one of the most rewarding jobs you could ever have; this episode will help you evaluate if it’s right for you and help you get started with your eyes wide open.

Quotes:

• "Your day job has its perks that you may not think about when you're thinking of starting your business." (09:07 | May Silvers)

• "So you have to think, why do I want to start a business? That's because I don't want to have my earnings capped. That's because I want to have lifestyle freedom. That's because I want to do what I love to do. So those three motivators are great reasons, not because you hate your day job." (11:22 | May Silvers)

• "So do not quit your day job because you hate it to start a business. Thank your day job for being able to pay the bills and giving you the liberty, the freedom to be able to build your side hustle and let you experience what it feels like to be a business owner without having to worry about when is the next paycheck coming in." (23:57 | May Silvers)

Links

I'm thrilled to be speaking at The Event Planner Expo 2023, New York, October 10th -12th , Featuring Keynote speaker Gary Vaynerchuk CEO of VaynerMedia, Social Media and Marketing Expert and Entrepreneur and Marcy Blum, Event Icon!

Join me for three amazing days of learning, networking, and forming strategic partnerships on Thursday, October 12th at the Metropolitan Pavilion for my Fireside Chat.

Come Hear Me Speak at

On Thursday October 12th

The Event Planner Expo 2023

For Complimentary (only 20 are available, first come first serve) 1 Day VIP Tickets to the Fireside Chats at Metropolitan Pavilion on Thursday, October 12th

Select the ticket "VIP Event Planners-1 Day-Thursday Oct 12th", Use Promo Code: MayComp

Upgrade to 3 DAY EDUCATION, VIP EDUCATION, OR ALL ACCESS TICKETS

3 Days
Keynotes Speaker Gary Vaynerchuk and Marcy Blum
50 Speakers
Educational Speaker Series with top Business Leaders
Hospitality Lounge
Complimentary Cocktails and Gourmet Appetizers
125 + Exhibitor Booths and Immersive Activations
Live Entertainment and Celebrity Performance

To Experience All 3 Days with Keynote Speakers Gary Vaynerchuk and Marcy Blum

Use Promo Code: May30 for 30% off all tickets

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

If You Don’t Like Being Sold To, You Will NOT Do Well in Sales

Thu, 28 Sep 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Everyone starts on an equal footing when it comes to sales; it's not an inborn talent but a skill you can develop. And given the frequency with which event planners cite sales as a challenge in their business, there's no time like the present to master this craft.

May says that if selling feels uncomfortable to you, it's probably tied to how you feel about being sold to. She identifies common issues people feel about sales like the conflict and anxiety of declining an offer or the tension of feeling cornered into buying something. She warns that you may unintentionally be bringing that type of energy to your own sales calls.

What’s better? Taking the emotion out of sales calls and cultivating curiosity about your prospect’s needs. The focus of your sales conversions should be making sure both you and the prospect are evaluating if you are the right person to help them. Creating an opportunity, or giving permission, for each of you to end a conversation if either of you find that you are not a good fit can make sales conversations far more productive. You never have to feel you are trying to convince someone to buy.

If you want to assess, recalibrate, and rejuvenate your sales approach, May is happy to help you. She extends an invitation for personalized consultations or mentorship to boost listeners' effectiveness and comfort in sales.

Quotes:

• "Sales involves some sales strategies and tactics, and it involves skills as well, but it all starts from the mindset and your feelings towards selling." (02:07 | May Silvers)

• "You're in control of whether you want to buy or not. You're in control of how you feel about the conversation, where the conversation is going. You're in control of physically taking out your credit card or your money to pay to buy a product or service. So, what is there to fear? You're in total control." (07:25 | May Silvers)

• "Take away all emotions. Come in with curiosity. Ask questions that lead them to tell you, tell me more. Tell me more. I'd like to hear more. How can we work together?" (19:24 | May Silvers)

Links

Come Hear Me Speak at:

On Thursday October 12th

at New York, The Event Planner Expo 2023

For Complimentary 1 Day VIP Tickets to the Fireside Chats at Metropolitan (only 20 are available, first come first served)

Pavilion on Thursday, October 12th, Use Promo Code: MayComp. Please pick the ticket that says VIP Event Planners - 1 Day - Thursday, Oct 12th

Upgrade to 3 DAY EDUCATION, VIP EDUCATION, OR ALL ACCESS TICKETS

3 Days
Keynotes Speaker Gary Vaynerchuk and Marcy Blum
50 Speakers
Educational Speaker Series with top Business Leaders
Hospitality Lounge
Complimentary Cocktails and Gourmet Appetizers
125 + Exhibitor Booths and Immersive Activations
Live Entertainment and Celebrity Performance

To Experience All 3 Days with Keynote Speakers Gary Vaynerchuk and Marcy Blum

Use Promo Code: May30 for 30% off all tickets

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Are You Proud of the Work You Displayed Online?

Thu, 21 Sep 2023 06:00:00 -0300

“If you’re not proud of your work, then why are you showing your work?” May asks on this solo episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur. Using real-life examples from a recent chat on social media, May notes how many business owners post pictures of events that they’re not particularly confident in, or which depict events for which they had to compromise their vision to suit the client. May understands the need for taking on less-than-ideal clients in order to make money; however, these are not the clients who should be featured as examples of your work. Posting less than stellar images means you will continue to attract less than stellar clients.

Instead, May says, when people see your pictures, they should be asking themselves how you put the event together and how long it took you to complete it. The better the pictures, the more those viewing it should be deterred from throwing the event themselves and eager to hire you instead. May shares a key question you should ask family and friends outside of the event business to gauge whether your online photos are portraying the image you wish to project. After this episode, you’ll be well on your way to establishing a digital presence that you will be proud of and that attracts your ideal clients!

Quotes

• “Show me your work and I will tell you whether your work is attracting champagne tastes via budget clients, or if you are getting your ideal clients.” (2:58 | May)

• “If you are already telling me these pictures are not the best pictures…If you're not proud of your work, why are you showing your work?” (9:54 | May)

• “Just remember this: if you post pictures of an event that do not represent your brand because this is a low end client, or this client doesn’t want to follow your vision, they have their own vision, but it doesn't align with your brand, when you post pictures like that, you're going to attract more of those same people.” (11:29 | May)

• “If your work looks like a kindergartener can put it together, or a seven-year or 10-year-old who's good at art and crafts can do it themselves, why should they hire you? These are the things that you have to think about when you put something on your digital platform.” (18:30 | May)

• “Every single time you work with a client that doesn't align with your brand or with the perception that you're trying to create about your work, it’s going to pull you back.” (20:35 | May)

Links

If you want to learn more about how to have a strong digital presence and attract your ideal clients, check out my newly published book: The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur. In the book, I show you the blueprint on how to start and scale your events business and cover a whole section on social media presence. Click on this link to get a copy of the book: https://www.amazon.com/Unstoppable-EVENTrepreneur-TM-Profitable-Business/dp/1961347105/

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

4 Ways to Help You Get Unstuck

Thu, 14 Sep 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Feeling stuck? May Yeo Silvers provides practical advice, or fast “hacks”, to boost your personal and professional success. Drawing from a recent conversation with a savvy business associate, May shares the 4 big takeaways she learned that can help you shift your results.

First, she emphasizes the critical link between physical health, mental clarity and business success, stressing diet, exercise, sleep, and stress management. Second, be cautious about your media intake; avoid negative content and choose sources of information and advice that you’ve researched and who align with your values. Next, remember that your close circle of friends and business associates matter; your success often mirrors the average success of your five closest associates. Choose them wisely. Lastly, visualize your goals, immersing yourself mentally in where you aim to be. Imagining business and life success before you have it can make it more possible for you to achieve.

This short episode is packed with advice to help you get unstuck and transform your outcomes.

Quotes

• "Physical health directly relates to mental health, emotional health, and also your health of your business." (02:46 | May)

• "Your potential for success in life and in business is the average of the five people that you surround yourself with." (10:47 | May)

• "Your current environment, is it a reflection of where you want to go?" (14:52 | May)

• “You want to be able to extract yourself from an environment that's not serving you and physically plant yourself in another environment that's going to serve you.” (16:23 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

https://workshop.mayyeosilvers.com/optin-passion-to-profit-sept-2023

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

For more information about our virtual Passion To Profit Workshop on September 13-14 2023: How To Attract Your Ideal Clients & Book Them, click on this link to register:

If you want the FULL EXPERIENCE, for only $37, you get an ADDITIONAL bonus of a pricing video tutorial that teaches you how to price for profit PLUS a pricing calculator with embedded formulas where you can input your numbers and calculate your fees.

Click this link to access your FULL EXPERIENCE for the workshop:

https://workshop.mayyeosilvers.com/optin-passion-to-profit-sept-2023-free-37

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

Should You Charge a Consultation Fee?

Thu, 07 Sep 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Should you be charging a consultation fee? In today's episode, the question of whether to charge a consultation fee is explored by host May Yeo Silvers. This topic can be quite divisive in the business world, with some advocating for fees and others against it. May firmly stands on the side of not charging for discovery calls, BUT charge for consultations, which most people often confuse the two. Discovery calls are for you to find out more details about what your potential clients need help with and determine if you have the capability and bandwidth to help them. Consultation calls are for you to CONSULT AND SHARE PROFESSIONAL ADVICE, hence, you should charge a consultation fee.

The best way to grow a business is to build a safe and trustworthy relationship with your potential clients. Because when people can trust you, they are more likely to invest into your services. For example, May draws inspiration from successful business models like Costco, which uses the concept of free samples to attract and engage customers. And for event planners, the easiest way to input this strategy into your own business is by providing free content through newsletters, videos, and social media posts.

Ultimately, the decision to charge a consultation fee depends on your business model, expertise, and client base. But May’s approach aims to create a strong foundation for attracting and converting clients without tripping over a thousand dollars to pick up a dollar by charging a “consultation fee”.

Quotes

• "To make people part with their hard earned money and want to work with you, you have to create an environment that it is safe for them to invest in you." (2:08 | May)

• "Giving away something for free is a good way to close the gap of trying to get this person to pay me to fulfill a service. It can make it easier for me to convert a lead into a paying client." (4:06 | May)

• "I like being able to learn from within my own industry and also learn from people from other industries to see what they have done and see how I can customize it and implement it in my own events business." (6:13 | May)

• "When people pay a consultation fee, they expect you to show that you are legit." (33:45 | May)

• "If you have nothing to show in the digital world or your local market, you should not consider charging a consultation fee. Build a presence, share free content, and create goodwill before asking for payment." (34:27 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: @mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How Doing Physical Activity in Your Daily Life Affects the Success of Your Business

Thu, 31 Aug 2023 06:00:00 -0300

In today's episode, we're diving into a surprising topic: how staying active and getting physically fit can actually boost your business success. Host May Yeo Silvers suggests that the way you handle personal challenges can be a sneak peek into how you tackle business obstacles.

May shares a personal story from her past to highlight the concept of mental toughness. She recalls a not-so-great moment in a badminton tournament where she faced a crushing defeat. Despite feeling embarrassed, her passion for the game pushed her to keep going, leading to continuous improvement. This experience became the cornerstone for developing not only physical skills but mental resilience. Participating in sports can be similar to starting a business. There will be times where there are setbacks, but to persevere, you must track and refine your processes along the way.

It’s important to learn from your personal achievements and setbacks, using them as building blocks for a strong and confident mindset in entrepreneurship. The key takeaway is to remember the times you've triumphed over challenges and apply that same resilience to your business journey.

Quotes

• “However you do something in your personal life is how you will show up in your business life." (01:02 | May)

• "You can train your mind to be tough, just like you can train your muscle to be tough. If you can train your body to be tough, you can also train your mind to be tough." (01:58 | May)

• "Your mind has different muscles, different levels of personal toughness that you can train." (02:34 | May)

• "When I show myself that I can do hard things it will naturally show to the others that they can also do it." (13:21 | May)

Links

For more information about our virtual Passion To Profit Workshop on September 13-14 2023: How To Attract Your Ideal Clients & Book Them, click on this link to register:https://workshop.mayyeosilvers.com/optin-passion-to-profit-sept-2023

Click this link to access your FULL EXPERIENCE for the workshop:

https://workshop.mayyeosilvers.com/optin-passion-to-profit-sept-2023-free-37

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

TikTok: https://www.tiktok.com/@mayyeosilversofficial

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do THIS to Avoid Being Ghosted

Thu, 24 Aug 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Do you know the main reason why you’re being ghosted by clients? According to host May Yeo Silvers it has to do with “hidden” numbers. So in today’s episode, she dives into into the challenges posed by hidden budgets, explores their significance in aligning expectations, and emphasizes the need for genuine conversations.

Clients are like poker players- they keep their money close to their chests, especially when it comes to initially discussing their budget. And unfortunately, not knowing your potential client’s true budget can prevent you from closing the sale particularly if they have champagne taste on a beer budget. But unlocking the secrets behind their budgets is the key to success. Even though it can be uncomfortable to discuss money initially, you want to have a full understanding of what your client wants and how much money they have to spend. By aligning your proposals within your clients’ financial comfort zones, you are more likely to prevent any future ghosting.

By peeling back the layers of hidden budgets, we can prevent misunderstandings, enhance client interactions, and ultimately succeed in the art of sales. Avoiding discussions about costs can prevent effective communication, but engaging in real conversations upfront lays the foundation for mutual understanding and paves the way for trusting business relationships.

Quotes

• "The main reason why your potential clients are ghosting you is probably because you don’t know their hidden numbers.” (03:57 | May)

• "What do I mean about the hidden numbers? We tend to have this tendency to ask, what's your budget when we are talking to a potential client, right? Nine out of 10, they wouldn't tell you what's their budget because they are uncomfortable in telling you how much they want to spend because they don't want to be labeled as cheap." (04:04 | May)

• "They don’t wanna be labeled as someone who has a champagne taste and a beer budget. And they also do not want to go in back and forth arguing why they only have this much money. Or justifying why they can't spend more, so they don't want all this hassle and all this conflict, so they don't tell you the truth." (04:26 | May)

• "Because if you don't find out what is that number and you quote a fee that is so far off from their set point of their budget, it would be very difficult for them to reconcile the idea, why do I need to spend that much?" (05:42 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

https://www.amazon.com/Unstoppable.../dp/1961347105

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur book is officially launched!!

This has been a labor of love for 2 years. This book summarizes all the business strategies and mindset that I apply myself in my events businesses and also teaches inside our Unstoppable Eventrepreneur mentorship program that have gotten several EVENTrepreneurs great results!

This book is a great representation of me, no fluff, only facts and truth. I hope this book gives event planners who want to turn their passion for events into a profitable business the blueprint of how to start and scale an events business and equip these EVENTrepreneurs with a REAL understanding on what it takes to be an Unstoppable EVENTrepreneur!

Here’s the amazon link to purchase the book. FYI, as it just got launched on 8/14/2023, it is still new in the internet world so it doesn’t show up when you search for the book on google and amazon, yet.

If you are an event planner and want to turn your passion for events into profit, or you know someone who is very talented in their craft for events and are considering starting an events business, refer them to get a copy of the book!

If you are ready to start and scale your events business and want to learn from someone who has already walked the path you are about to walk and has great results to show, schedule a call with me and we can chat about our 12 weeks Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Academy or our 12 months Unstoppable Eventrepreneur mentorship program is the right fit for you: https://chatwith.mayyeosilvers.com/aha-moment

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

The Success Story of Chick-Fil-A: How Focusing On 1 Thing Can Make You Millions

Thu, 17 Aug 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Many entrepreneurs make the mistake of thinking they need to be good at everything in order to be successful. But in many cases, mastering one thing is the key to unlocking that millionaire success. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers takes a deep dive into the extraordinary saga of Chick-fil-A, a renowned fast-food establishment celebrated for its commitment to a singular product category: chicken-based offerings. Operating actively from Monday to Saturday while reserving Sundays for rest, Chick-fil-A's distinctive practice stems from their dedication to their core values.

The key insight to their success? Concentrating on a distinct specialization. Rather than spreading oneself thin by managing a plethora of services or products, narrowing in on one area can yield exceptional outcomes in any industry. May tells listeners to find that "one thing" that you're passionate about and make it your thing. Forget about spreading yourself thin. Instead, get super skilled, build a stellar reputation, and if and when the time is right, consider broadening your horizons.

If you're in the business world – whether you're planning events or running the show – adopting Chick-fil-A's mindset could be your secret sauce. Embracing specialization and unwavering commitment to a chosen path can lead you to lasting success.

Quotes

• "Chick-fil-A only sells one thing, which is anything chicken." (01:21 | May)

• "The reason why I'm talking about this particular fast food restaurant, Chick-fil-A, is because the business fundamental behind the people, their founding, their franchise owners, the entire way this business is run." (01:34 | May)

• "This brand is unwavering in terms of their level of service and in terms of the products that they have committed to serve their customers, and also they stick by their values and their principles, and they're unafraid of what people say about them." (02:46 | May)

• "Whatever you do in your business, always focus on that one thing. Once you get it done really, really well, then move on to the next thing." (26:38 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Skills Don’t Directly Equate to Profits

Thu, 10 Aug 2023 06:00:00 -0300

In today's discussion, host May Yeo Silvers takes us on a journey to challenge a prevailing misconception: the belief that sheer skill is the ultimate key to unlocking profits in our events businesses. While undeniably crucial, possessing skills in event planning, design, and decoration isn't a one-way ticket to success when you're at the helm of your events venture. May Yeo Silvers adeptly articulates how thriving in this competitive landscape demands a holistic approach – one that encompasses not only your creative prowess but also a mastery of the art of effective marketing and sales.

Through insightful anecdotes and profound analysis, this episode sheds light on the experiences of highly skilled event planners and designers who found themselves grappling with a lack of profitability. The root causes? An oversight of the intricate business facet that accompanies entrepreneurship. May Yeo Silvers underscores a pivotal truth: excellence in your craft should be coupled with a strategic display of your work, proactive self-promotion, and the nurturing of a brand that resonates trust and admiration. It's when potential clients recognize and are willing to pay for your expertise that you truly stand out in the industry. This podcast episode isn't just a discourse on skills versus business acumen; it's a call to action. It challenges you to reshape your perspective and embrace the multifaceted realm of entrepreneurship.

So, whether you're an established event entrepreneur or just setting out on this exhilarating path, this episode has something compelling to offer. Tune in to gain a fresh perspective, be inspired by real stories, and equip yourself with the insights needed to transform your passion for events into a thriving, profitable venture. Remember, success is best achieved together.

Quotes

• "The more skillful you are doesn't mean that you're going to get booked. I can tell you for a fact that I know very talented event planners, designers, and decorators, but why are they not getting booked? Because they're not opening their mouth. They're not telling people about their business." (04:26 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "Being great at sales is only one part of the equation. Determining and keeping track of your numbers will help you make the best decisions for yourself and your business, as well as protect you from having to go back to a corporate job." (14:42 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "Confidence in your craft comes from clients willing to pay for your services. So, instead of constantly focusing on improving your skills, shift your attention to learning how to market yourself and showcase your incredible talents." (14:42 | May Yeo Silvers)

• "Let's figure out what is the existing skill that you have that people say, 'I'll pay you to do this, you should charge money for this.' Let's focus on that first, and if you get an inquiry because you are focusing your energy on how to market to the outside world that your skill set is balloon installation, for instance, 99% will hire you for that thing." (14:42 | May Yeo Silvers)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

A Case Study of Having Return to Corporate Even Though Business Was Good

Thu, 03 Aug 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Have you really sat down and taken the time to figure out your sales numbers? If not, you are doing yourself a disservice and may even find yourself having to go back to working a corporate job. Today, host May Yeo Silvers shares real life examples as case studies of entrepreneurs who have had to go back to corporate in spite of their business looking like they were doing well.

When business is “good” and you have lots of money coming into your bank account every month, you may make the mistake of thinking you are in the clear and can go ahead and spend that money. However, you might just be making a big mistake! As CEO, it is critical that you take a step back and really get serious about knowing your numbers. Just making sales is not enough if you do not know how many sales you actually need to make in order to afford to pay both your personal bills and your business bills. Also, unlike a corporate job where you make a set amount of money every month, entrepreneurship is trickier. You will likely have some months that are slower where you make much less money or might not have any sales at all. By accounting for this in your calculations, you can determine exactly how many sales you need to be making and how much money you need to have in the bank at all times in order to afford your lifestyle and keep your business afloat even in hard times.

Even if you do not consider yourself a numbers person, it is a crucial component of being a successful CEO. Being great at sales is only one part of the equation. Determining and keeping track of your numbers will help you to make the best decisions for yourself and your business as well as protect you from having to go back to a corporate job.

Quotes

• “In running a business, you have to understand what are the must track numbers… all these numbers will determine what you need to do, the next course of action in your business.” (3:53 | May)

• “These four numbers are what's going to save you from not having to go back to corporate.” (5:09 | May)

• “You not only need to do the selling, you need to know how much to sell.” (7:39 | May)

• “I should have taken the time to sit down and determine how much money I need in order to live and thrive as a full time CEO for my business.” (9:17 | May)

• “When you are in a corporate world, you have a fixed paycheck, so you know how much money is coming in. But when you're in business, you don't know how much money is coming in unless you do your sales projection.” (19:06 | May)

• “If you are running a full time business, it is so important to incorporate a line item, which is your salary that you need to pay your personal bills.” (28:50 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Are You REALLY Going All in for Your Business?

Thu, 27 Jul 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are you really giving your business your all? It’s one thing to go through the motions, but it’s another to be fully present and put your heart into everything that you do for your business. Today, host May shares the importance of self-awareness and the ability to self audit in order to really be sure you are going all in for your business’ success.

In order for your business to grow, you must first grow as a person. Assuming you are a full time CEO, there are around 8 hours available for you to devote to your business each day. How many of those hours do you actually spend on sales generating activities or coming up with creative ideas for your business? If you’re being honest with yourself, you will likely find that you are not actually giving all you could be to being a CEO. You are getting your day to day activities done, but maybe your heart is not really in it or your mind is elsewhere. It can be daunting to ask yourself why you are procrastinating certain tasks or why you are struggling to be fully present, but self-awareness is key for accessing a growth mindset.

You owe it to yourself and to your business to give it your all. If you are struggling with really dedicating yourself to taking inspired action rather than just checking off tasks, you first need to have the courage to ask yourself the hard questions and face whatever fears and doubts are standing in the way.

Quotes

• “If you want your business to grow, you have got to grow first.” (2:42 | May)

• “How many hours are you taking inspired action? Taking action is not good enough. Taking inspired action is what is going to move the success needle. Taking actions by just checking off, okay, I got to do this, I got to do this, I got to do this. That means your heart is not there. When your heart is not there your people can feel it in terms of your content. You're just a robot reading a script.” (10:50 | May)

• “When you put in your heart, your emotions, in carrying out an action, a sales generating action, delivering a message, communicating your value, your expertise, talking about your brand, connecting with people, those are sales generating activities.” (13:11 | May)

• “You can work all day long. But all day long, are you really working? Are you really present? If you are not, you're just doing it for the sake of doing it, then you're not really giving it all.” (16:53 | May)

• “Self awareness is key.” (18:22 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Create a Business Plan That Actually Works

Thu, 20 Jul 2023 06:00:00 -0300

No matter what stage of business ownership you are in, you need to have a business plan that you can actually follow. If you are unfamiliar with what makes having a business plan so vital for your success, this is the episode for you. Today, host May explains what a business plan is, why you need one, and how to create one that is simple and that can evolve, change, and grow alongside your business.

A business plan is like a GPS. It acts as a guide that you can follow to reach your goals. Since your goals are going to be ever changing and your plans will need to adjust depending on market conditions and personal growth evolution, you will need to revisit and revise your plan throughout the year. Don’t worry about making it perfect, because it will always be changing and growing as your business does. A lot of entrepreneurs make the mistake of overcomplicating their business plan and making it too hard to stick with. Instead of writing a complicated twenty page plan, keep it simple. A successful business plan needs only a handful of key things; your vision, your mission, and the specific service you wish to provide, who will want and need that service, how to market do this group of people and how much to charge for your services.

One of the most exciting parts about having your own business is that you have the flexibility to tweak and change anything you want as you go. Instead of getting hung up on trying to have everything perfect right from the start, remember that you can adjust your plan whenever you want to. Start off with a simple, easy to follow plan and you will be on your way to achieving your goals.

Quotes

• “Every single business, especially when they're starting their business, needs to have a business plan. A business plan is like a North Star. It's like your GPS. Your business plan is the GPS for your business.” (2:02 | May)

• “The business plan should be very simple and easy to follow, and easy to create.” (4:17 | May)

• “If you want to know the truth about owning a business, you're constantly flying the plane while tweaking your engine at the same time.” (5:36 | May)

• “That's the beauty of owning your business, being a business owner that has the flexibility to twist and turn to make changes without going through all the bureaucracy. That's the fun of having a business that is constantly evolving.” (21:47 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: www.mayyeosilvers.com.

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Busting the Biggest Myth of All You Need to Start Your Event Planning Business

Thu, 13 Jul 2023 06:00:00 -0300

It is finally time to bust the biggest myth of all when it comes to starting your event planning business. If you’ve been told that in order to be an event planner you need to purchase your own inventory, listen up, because May is here to explain why this could not be further from the truth. In fact, if you do decide to invest in your own inventory, you could actually be limiting your business growth potential.

While it may seem like less of a hassle or even a way to save money in the long run, owning your own inventory comes with a lot of additional costs than just buying it in the first place. You will have to maintain that inventory, store it somewhere, set it up at the event and break it down afterward. That’s a lot of extra work! These are all labor costs and taking up valuable time that you could be spending on growing your business and generating sales. If your goal is to be an event planner, then you do not need to spend your money, time, and energy on physically designing and staging the materials for the event. You’re a planner, not a designer! Doing all that extra work on top of your planning duties will quickly cause you to wear down and risk burning out, all while not really benefiting your business in terms of revenue.

Don’t let not being able to afford your own inventory stop you from starting your event planning business! The top most successful event planners in the industry do not own or manage their own inventory. You should not have to be responsible for manual labor at your events like setting up and breaking down equipment, because this takes from your time to actually manage the event and generate more sales. The next time someone tells you that you need to own your own inventory in order to be a successful event planner, direct them to May for some much needed myth busting.

Quotes

• “It's a widespread belief that you need to purchase inventory in order to start your event planning business.” (1:28-1:41 | May)

• “If you want to own inventory, you were probably given this idea that it's so much cheaper to just own it than to rent it from a vendor.” (8:55-9:09 | May)

• “You forget the costs of maintaining the inventory, of keeping the inventory, of setting up the inventory. You forget the costs of breaking down the inventory. All those are labor hours.” (9:48-10:08 | May)

• “You want to copycat? Find the right cat to copy.” (14:04-14:06 | May)

• “If you are living in a small town and you need this inventory, find a cheaper labor than you that costs less than what you're charging yourself.” (16:50-17:01 | May)

• “If you are doing something, that means you're not able to do something else. You also limit your growth. If you are actively involved in the inventory portion, that means you're doing things that's not sales generating.” (18:10-18:24 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is the Passion for Your Craft Killing the Profit for Your Business?

Thu, 06 Jul 2023 06:00:00 -0300

If you are an event planner or designer who wants to build a sustainable business both in terms of profit AND freedom based lifestyle, you CANNOT be personally handling every manual task at each event. Instead, envision yourself as the CEO or boss lady, overseeing a team of talented individuals who specialize in different aspects of your craft. By delegating tasks and trusting others, you can scale your business, cater to multiple events in a day, and avoid limiting your earning potential.

The key here is finding the right balance between honoring your passion and maximizing your income. You deserve to enjoy what you do, but you must also consider the opportunity cost of your time. Charging premium rates for your presence at events is a fair and effective way to ensure you're adequately compensated for your expertise. By openly communicating with clients about the additional fee for your on-site involvement, you can maintain transparency while aligning your income goals. Remember, you don't have to be physically present at every event to provide exceptional service. Instead, selectively choose which events require your direct involvement and charge accordingly, allowing you to play to your strengths, earn a substantial income, and nurture your passion for your craft without sacrificing your financial success.

It's crucial to recognize that your passion for your craft shouldn't come at the expense of your profit margin. Embrace the role of a business owner and delegate tasks to a competent team, but find the right compromise that allows you to maximize your income without compromising your love for your craft.

Quotes

• "If you are hearing from other people or seeing how other people are running their business by having to use your talent and your time doing all these manual tasks that you could actually delegate to someone else to do it or hire a vendor to do that, that means you are limiting your earning income." (06:20-06:38 | May)

• “You’ve got to have a good balance of really honoring your passion for your craft and making the money that you want to make.” (09:52-09:59 | May)

• "If you wanna make money, start looking at how very successful wealthy people run their business. They are not in the day-to-day operation. They're not in the day-to-day client facing operation. They do more strategy work." (11:19-11:32 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Budget Your Business Finance to Hire a Team

Thu, 29 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are you planning to be a solopreneur or is your goal to eventually hire a team of employees? Depending on your business goals and desired income, you may benefit from not having to do everything yourself. It is very difficult to scale your business when you are doing everything on your own. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers shares her tips for determining how to budget your business finances so that you can hire a team.

If you do not want to hire anybody, you do not have to. However, you will have to charge much higher prices in order for your business to be profitable. You also run the risk of burning out, because you are having to wear too many hats all the time. If you don’t want to do it all on your own, but still feel uncomfortable with the idea of managing employees, contractors are a great compromise. By hiring a contractor for each project, you can get some tasks off your back without having to manage a full time employee. If you do want to grow your company and build a team of employees, it is important to make sure your business is bringing in enough revenue for that investment to make sense. This means that your business is generating enough money each month to pay not only your business expenses (including the salary you plan to pay the employee whom you are planning to hire in the next 6 months), but also your personal bills. May recommends that your business be successfully generating this level of revenue for six months prior to hiring an employee. Then, when you do hire someone, make sure that they can bring in at least four to ten times what you are paying them so they are paying for their own salary PLUS generating profit for the company.

As your business grows you may find yourself needing to hire someone to help you. Whether you decide to do it all yourself, hire a contractor, or hire a full time employee or team of employees, you need to get very clear on your business finances first. Understand how much income your business is bringing in and how much you can afford to spend on hiring. This way you can scale your business while maintaining profitability.

Quotes

• “There's only this much you can do by yourself, so scaling almost becomes impossible.” (3:55-4:01 | May)

• “I don't want to have a big team, I don't want to manage people. So what I do is, I hire contractors, because I also understand that I don't want to do everything myself.” (7:31-7:42 | May)

• “They cannot just bring in enough money to break even, to pay for their own salary. It has to be at least 4 to 10 times of what you're paying them in order for you to have a profitable business.” (18:03-18:16 | May)

• “If you don't want to hire anybody, then you have got to make sure that you charge a lot of money.” (25:09-25:13 | May)

• “When you hire a team or contractor to do the work, you may not need to tell the client that somebody else is doing the work.” (25:36-25:42 | May)

• “In order for a company to grow in building a team, you have to elevate the status of your team member to instill the confidence in your clients that they are as capable as you.” (26:40-26:55 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Planning Destination Weddings with Katie Mast

Thu, 22 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Do you dream of planning beautiful destination weddings all across the globe for your clients? Destination wedding planning is a whole different beast from planning local events. It requires someone who can stay calm no matter what challenges pop up. For a confident, authentic and honest salesperson, destination weddings provide incredible opportunities to upsell and earn more money. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers sits down with Katie Mast, community manager for Rock Paper Coin and former owner of Cotton & Oak, to discuss everything you need to know about planning destination weddings.

Katie Mast was the business owner of Cotton & Oak, a 6 figure destination wedding services company, for nearly 12 years while residing in the San Francisco Bay Area. After covid, her family moved to South Carolina, and Katie decided to retire from her business. During her 12 years as a destination wedding planner, Katie learned how to confidently plan gorgeous weddings from afar, gain her clients’ trust, and pivot on the spot whenever challenges arose. Destination weddings are more complicated, because you have to have not only have a plan A, but several backup plans. When you are on site at a far off destination, you will not have access to the same resources you would have if you were planning a local wedding. This means you really have to know your stuff and research the location thoroughly during the planning process. The good news is that once you have done all of that, you have the opportunity to make a lot more money off destination weddings, as you can upsell for pre and post wedding events.

If you have been considering transitioning into destination wedding planning, tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the skills needed to succeed.

Quotes

• “It is a completely different beast, when it comes to wedding planning versus destination wedding planning. Because you have to be just as confident planning a wedding from afar as you would in your own backyard.” (7:36-7:50 | Katie)

• “Always start with your easiest service that you know that you're going to be able to deliver on, and that is month of coordination.” (23:13-23:22 | Katie)

• “You can have the ability to upsell so much more in destination wedding planning.” (28:22-28:28 | Katie)

• “If you are going to invest in any kind of marketing, make it be SEO.” (40:15-40:19 | Katie)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

If you are looking for a simple easy to use software for your business that can generate professional looking proposals, contracts, invoices and also integrates with a payment merchant, Rock Paper Coin could be your solution.

This software is so easy to use and helps to lessen the overwhelm that you could face when using more robust software.. The best part is, it has the lowest credit card processing fee at 2.5% compared to the industry rate of 2.9%! Use my affiliate link to get 60% off your first year of subscription. If you like to start a trial, use my link as well and it will NOT ask you for any credit card info. Here is the link: https://app.rockpapercoin.com/SignUp?promoCode=RPCEVENTS4ANYONE

Interview With Will Curran-How To Set Up Your Business for Early Retirement

Thu, 15 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0300

When you think of retirement, what does it look like to you? Retirement does not have to mean that you do nothing or even require you to fully leave your business behind. There are many steps you can take to set up your business in a way that enables you to step back from the day to day activities and retire early. Whether you plan to retire or not, these steps will help your business to run more smoothly with less reliance on you. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers sits down with serial entrepreneur Will Curran to discuss the steps required to set your business up for early retirement.

As the founder of Endless Events, & creator of the #EventProfs Community, and host of the event industry podcasts, #EventIcons, Event Brew, and Event Tech Podcast, Will Curran has been named one of the most influential people in the meeting and events industry. By designing Endless Events to run successfully without him there, Will was able to semi-retire at just 33 years old. Although he maintains ownership of his business, he now has a COO who can manage everything for him and keep business running smoothly. As an entrepreneur, the goal is to not have to be doing every single thing for your business until the end of time. It can be hard to step back and allow someone else to have control, but it is necessary in order to continue to grow and free up time you could be using in other ways. In order to set your business up for your early retirement, you must become a master at both delegation and documentation, hire and build a trustworthy team of people who can follow the documented processes to the letter, and choose an integrator who will be able to take over your CEO duties.

Retirement does not have to mean doing nothing with your day. What it really means is having more freedom to choose what you want to do with your time. If you are still involved in the day to day on-site work, then you are less able to take advantage of the freedom that comes with entrepreneurship. Tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the steps necessary to build your business into one that can run smoothly without you being there, so that you can retire whenever you wish.

Quotes

• “Your business doesn't own you, you own it. And it generates income for you to do what you want to do.” (11:33-11:38 | Will)

• “We think to ourselves that no one can ever do what I do, but in reality, if you wrote down everything and captured it, you can distill everything you've done into a very simple and easy process.” (24:51-25:03 | Will)

• “If you have documented really well and you have delegated really well, a person will start to emerge sometimes within your organization who can follow your vision and take it moving forward.” (27:37-27:47 | Will)

• “Whenever you do a task, just write out how you're doing it as you do it.” (30:43-30:46 | Will)

• “First tip I'd have for almost every entrepreneur is, hire a personal assistant.” (45:01-45:06 | Will)

Links

Connect with Will Curran:

Website: www.helloendless.com

Website: www.eventprofscommunity.com

Podcasts: #EventIcons, Event Brew, and Event Tech Podcast

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Your Business Shouldn’t Stop When You Stop

Thu, 08 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0300

When you go on vacation, do you shut down your business? As a business owner, you cannot afford for business to stop just because you stop. Assuming this is your main source of income, you will need to plan accordingly ahead of time so that essential business tasks are still getting done even while you are away from work. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers explains the importance of doing your homework in advance so that your business can keep running smoothly without you there.

There are always going to be things that come up that you did not anticipate, such as an illness or a family emergency. However, there are ways you can prepare your business so that you can still keep generating income even when you need to step away. May shares the story of a client who worked with her to create a strong team to support her business. When she ended up becoming very ill and being hospitalized, her business did not have to stop because she had prepared in advance by building a reliable team. However, let’s say you are not ill and are simply wanting to take a vacation. This is entirely possible to do without shutting down your business as long as you shift your schedule accordingly, get critical tasks done before going on vacation, and have a team in place who can keep things rolling for you.

Your bills do not stop coming just because you want to take a vacation or you fall ill, so your business should not stop either. Tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about how to plan in advance for an absence from your business so that you can keep generating income no matter what life throws your way.

Quotes

• “The reasons that people tell me that they can't work on their business for me, it's just a lack of planning on your end. In fact, for me, it sounds just like a poor excuse.” (7:19-7:30 | May)

• “This woman was near death, near death experience from COVID, but the business did not stop because she had good planning.” (11:16-11:25 | May)

• “Your non-negotiable business activities on your CEO schedule does not stop even when you go on vacation.” (13:15-13:21 | May)

• “If you're not committed to your why, you're not committed to your calling, no amount of me telling you what to do, no amount of strategies, planning, is going to happen.” (18:17-18:26 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Why Assuming the Sales May Not Be the Best Sales Strategy

Thu, 01 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Have you been taught by sales professionals that you should always go into a sale assuming that it is a done deal? While assuming the sales is an important piece of a sales strategy, it is not the complete equation. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the other 50% of the equation for forming a successful sales strategy.

Building up your confidence is a big part of being successful in sales. You always want to go into a conversation with a potential client with a lot of confidence in yourself and the services you are offering, as well as with an assumption that they will want to work with you. However, if you go into it leaning too heavily into your assumptions, that potential client might feel like they are being forced to say yes to you. Instead, give that person a way out by asking them questions that enable them to explain in their own words why they want to work with you. When people have a chance to articulate their reasoning, they will be much more likely to go through with the sale.

Most people are not inclined to argue against themselves. So, instead of insisting that someone work with you, give them an opportunity to choose to work with you and explain their reasoning in their own words. Tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about why assuming the sales is not always enough.

Quotes

• “Assuming the sales is 50% of the equation.” (7:14-7:17 | May)

• “You need to create an opportunity for your potential client to tell you, to articulate it themselves, that you are the person that they want to work with.” (7:59-8:15 | May)

• “You want them to explain why they want to work with you. Because when they say out loud the reasons why they want to work with you, they are justifying to themselves and they probably will hear 100% of what they're saying.” (11:44-12:22 | May)

• “You want to be confident in presenting your services and assuming the sales. But then at the later part, you want to be curious by asking them questions, so they don't feel that they are being pushed to have to work with you.” (15:04-15:16 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The 4 Demons That You Will Face When Building Your Business

Thu, 25 May 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are you afraid of being judged or rejected? Do you struggle with imposter syndrome? Knowing strategy and tactics is only a small part of being successful when building a business. You also have to be able to execute that strategy, but that can be hard to do when your ego is getting in the way. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses what she refers to as the four demons you face when building a business and shares her tips for dealing with them.

May explains that the four demons are imposter syndrome, the fear of failure, the fear of rejection and the fear of judgment. All of these fears are tied to the ego and to your pride. With imposter syndrome, it is important to check the source and verify the facts. If someone is calling you a fake, who are they to say that? Unless you are lying about your services, you are not an imposter. When thinking about the fear of failure, judgment, and rejection, these fears are linked to a desire for external validation and come from your ego trying to protect itself. Remind your ego that you are grateful for it keeping you safe all these years, but that it is no longer necessary.

If you focus only on learning strategy and do not put in the work to get past your own ego and imposter syndrome, then you will not be able to implement these strategies effectively. Tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a closer look at the four demons and ways to navigate them.

Quotes

• “Knowing strategies and tactics are only probably 20% of what you need in your business and the rest of the percentage all depends on how you manage these four demons.” (2:58-3:12 | May)

• “Unless you are lying about it, you are not an impostor. You may not know the ins and outs, or you may not be an expert in the subject topic, but that doesn't mean that you're an impostor.” (5:50-6:07 | May)

• “You should not need someone's validation to tell you whether you're doing a good job or not.” (6:38-6:44 | May)

• “A lot of times what we fear are not real fears. A lot of times it’s our pride.” (10:05-10:10 | May)

• “If you have impostor syndrome, if you have a fear of failure, that means you are afraid of being judged.” (13:55-14:03 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Sales Numbers You Must Know In Your Business

Thu, 18 May 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Do you know all of your sales numbers for your business? It is a common mistake for new entrepreneurs to not understand the difference between financial numbers and sales numbers. Without knowing your sales numbers, you cannot turn your passion into profit. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers talks about the sales numbers you absolutely must know in your business.

May explains that while exact sales numbers differ for every business owner, they do not differ in the manner in which they are calculated. She gives an example working backward from an income goal of $120,000 and walks through how to arrive at each sales number including calculating conversion rate, number of qualified leads, and how many sales you need to make to reach the desired income. May also explains the 80/20 rule which states that in a room of 100 people, only 20 will actually hear you and maybe 1 or 2 will become a sale. When you can see each sales number tracked, then you have a better understanding of what is required to reach your goals.

Sales numbers are different from financial numbers, but are just as important for running a successful and profitable business. Tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a deeper dive into the sales numbers every business owner must know.

Quotes

• “There's a big difference between financial numbers and sales numbers.” (1:41-1:45 | May)

• “A lead is someone who knows the services you provide and they want and need the services you provide. They know how much you cost and they're able to pay how much you are charging.” (5:05-5:23 | May)

• “The goal here is to work less and make more. So you need to keep testing your price point to see where you are in terms of your conversion rate.” (9:07-9:18 | May)

• “You want to be able to track all these numbers to see what your closing rate is. You want to be able to reverse engineer the numbers.” (17:11-17:18 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Numbers You MUST Know In Your Business

Thu, 11 May 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Do you know the difference between a 6-figure revenue versus a 6-figure profit? Many new business owners make the mistake of not knowing the difference between the two. And by not understanding your numbers, it is impossible to run a business. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers talks about the numbers that every eventrepreneur must know in order to maintain and run a profitable business.

In terms of numbers related to your business, it is important to get familiar with and focus on a few terms. First, you need to know what your operating costs are. Aka the cost of doing business. May explains that operating costs are broken down into two categories: fixed costs (anything related to staying in business) and variable costs (costs to bring in business). Next, you need to understand revenue, loss, profit, and net income. Revenue is all the money that you bring in from doing business, but it does not equal the amount that you take in profit. For example, if you brought in $10,000 of revenue, but your operating costs were $5,000, that means you only have $5,000 left over in profit. However, this can change from month to month because your operating costs are subject to change. So to calculate your net income, you need to track your profit and loss on a regular basis. That way you know how much money is in your bank account and you avoid making any bad financial decisions.

While many people fear numbers, it is a necessary part of running your business. Tune into this episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a deeper dive into the numbers every business owner must know so that you can run a profitable business.

Quotes

• “To me, if you don't know your numbers, you don't have a business.” (02:01-02:05 | May)

• “Do you like money? Do you like to live your best life doing what you love most? If you do, let's develop a different relationship with numbers.” (03:12-03:22 | May)

• “Revenue basically means the money that you collect every time someone pays you for your service.” (09:54-10:00 | May)

• “If you don't know your profit and loss you will have no idea how much money your business has at any moment in time.” (16:42-16:53 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should I Set a Minimum Expected Revenue Before Saying Yes to a Lead?

Thu, 04 May 2023 06:00:00 -0300

When it comes to saying yes to a lead, many event planners are eager to know how much money they are going to make. And while money is a motivating factor, it isn’t the only one. In fact, being motivated only by money could be a huge mistake. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers answers the question, should you set a minimum revenue before accepting a job?

If you are motivated only by money, you most likely don’t have a good understanding on how to analyze your numbers, differentiate a good lead from a bad lead, and you could probably benefit from having a better relationship with money. Before accepting a job, is it important to ask yourself a series of questions to help determine whether or not the job is good for you. Ask yourself these questions, what is the scope of work? Do you feel good about the lead themselves? And how many hours will it take me to complete this job? A job that is $5,000 might take you 100 hours to complete which means your hourly rate would be dropped down to $50. In this case, it might not be worth your time or effort if your regular hourly rate is $100. Because ultimately, your hourly rate is what determines whether or not you will hit your income goals.

In the end, not all money is good money and the minimum revenue goal you set for yourself should not be the ultimate determining factor of whether or not you say yes to a lead. You should make sure that you are qualifying your leads from all angles. That way you are getting paid what you deserve while serving clients who are ideal for you.

Quotes

• “The minimum you set for yourself should not be the determining factor whether you say yes or no to the lead.” (03:03-03:14 | May)

• “If you are governed by the criteria that you need to make at least $5,000 for the job, you already have this belief that you will take the job and it doesn't matter what the scope of work is.” (04:42-04:58 | May)

• “Your hourly rate is going to determine whether you're going to hit your income goal or not.” (08:39-08:43 | May)

• “I always say to overestimate because if you underestimate and then you work more hours than you thought, you will make less money every hour.” (09:18-09:34 | May)

• “Not all money is good money.” (13:18-13:22 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is the Highest Paying Job the Best Lead?

Thu, 27 Apr 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are the highest paying jobs automatically the best leads for you? While many people would jump to the conclusion that yes, they are, this may not always be true. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers takes the time to bust this common myth and leave you with a surprising piece of advice that will help you run your business more successfully.

On the front end, a large and expensive event may sound exciting to you. And if you feel you can do the job and you like the client enough to take the time to put it all together, it may be the right decision for you to take that lead. However, as May becomes a more seasoned business owner, she also understands alternative ways she can work to make her time worth the money. Before accepting any job, you must thoroughly evaluate your leads. High paying jobs often require a lot more of your time and attention, therefore, your hourly rate is likely to decrease. To get a better idea of whether or not this job is worth accepting, you must understand your opportunity cost. How much money are you going to make on this event? Do you have the time in your schedule to forgo other events that may fulfill your hourly rate? To maximize her hourly rate and hit her income goals, May takes a variety of events that range in price and time spent working.

Are the highest paying jobs the best leads? The truth is, the answer is never cut and dry. That’s why it is important for you to spend time evaluating your hourly rate and accessing your opportunity costs so that you can make the best decision for yourself and your business financially.

Quotes

• “Every time I take on a big client that pays me between $30,000-$50,000, I know I'm going to have to devote at least 120 to 150 hours of my time to do that job.” (03:39-04:01 | May)

• “As I grow my business, I am becoming more savvy with numbers. And also understanding how best to use my time to gain the most traction financially.” (04:31-04:45 | May)

• “When you are evaluating your leads, it's not just about the numbers. There are other things involved.” (04:51-04:57 | May)

• “Instead of taking on only big jobs, my business model is a combination of big jobs, medium size jobs, and small jobs. Because always taking on the big job doesn't mean that I'm going to make my income goal.” (14:39-14:54 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How To Say NO Without Feeling Guilty

Thu, 20 Apr 2023 06:00:00 -0300

We are taught from a young age that a lot of our value has to do with how much we help others. And while it is important to be a kind and helpful person, it is also okay to say no from time to time. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers teaches listeners how they can say no without feeling the backlash of guilt.

As entrepreneurs, our time and resources are already very limited. And while we understand the value of help, it doesn’t always make sense for us to overextend ourselves to others. Before you agree to do something for someone else, May suggests walking yourself through a series of questions. That way, you are more intentional about the things you do for yourself and others. First ask yourself whether or not this person has only come to you for help. And if not, then why are other people saying no? Secondly, do you even have the resources and time to offer this help? And by offering your help, are you enabling them to continue to use you for your time and expertise. If you can answer all of these questions easily, you must ask yourself the final and most important question: how is helping going to impact your personal and business lives? If you realize that doing something for someone else is going to cause you hardship or turmoil, then it might be time to say no.

In the end, if we are not in the position to help ourselves, there is no way we can help others and that is why it is okay to say no sometimes. By being more intentional about where we put our time and energy, we not only open opportunities to create an abundant life for ourselves, but others too.

Quotes

• “My ultimate goal is to understand when I say yes to something, I am at peace. And when I say no to something, I am also at peace.” (02:18-02:34 | May)

• “When someone comes to me for help, before I readily say yes or no, I ask myself a few questions. So that when I come to the final decision, regardless whether it's a yes or a no, I have gone through an intentional process to come to that conclusion.” (02:58-03:21 | May)

• “The reason why we have a hard time saying no is because we want people to love us and not label us as being selfish.” (05:12-05:20 | May)

• “When you're running a full cup, you can give a lot more. But if you are not able to even sustain yourself emotionally or financially, how can you sustain another person?” (08:58-09:14 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Strategy I Use to Tackle a New Challenge

Thu, 13 Apr 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Do you want to take on new challenges but don’t know where to start? For many of us, it can be hard to implement new strategies into our lives and businesses that we are not familiar with. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers goes through the six-step process she uses to tackle new challenges with ease.

After you have identified what the task is that you need to take on, you must ask yourself what it will do for your life and your business. You then must understand what resources you have or might need to complete this task. Do you need to hire someone to help you accomplish this task? Or can you do it yourself? Then, identify the obstacles that are preventing you from checking this task off your to-do list. For many entrepreneurs, their habits or belief systems are constantly blocking them from achieving their goals. Once you have addressed the root problem, you will be able to complete tasks more easily. But in the end, you must implement and audit. Ask yourself what is working, what isn’t, and how you can tweak your process to become more efficient and effective.

The easiest way to achieve our goals is to implement thorough processes that help keep us in check. Tune in to learn more about this six-step process and how you can implement it in your life to help you tackle new challenges successfully!

Quotes

• “Step number one is to identify the task that you say you want to tackle. And then, you have to ask yourself, ‘By tackling this task, how is that going to impact or affect my business and my personal life?’ This is where we get really intentional.” (03:08-03:25 | May)

• “What obstacles are preventing you to not just carry out the task, but to complete it?” (04:46-04:56 | May)

• “The problem that most of the people face is they start something, but they never finish.” (05:02-05:06 | May)

• “Step number six is to implement and audit. This is a step that a lot of people miss. They implement, but then they don't audit. They just do, do, do. And then they don't collect data to analyze, ‘How come things are not working?’ Or, ‘How come things are working? What can we pour more gasoline into the things that are working? And what do we need to tweak with the things that aren’t working?’” (09:43-10:06 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Get More Done in a Day

Thu, 06 Apr 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Do you struggle to check everything off of your to-do list? As a successful veteran entrepreneur and event planner, host May Yeo Silvers has mastered time management. In today’s episode, she shares her secrets on how she created a life that many others aspire to have.

Many entrepreneurs wish there were more hours in a day to get everything done. And while most people rely on their to-do lists, May has spent the last year perfecting her process that ensures she gets everything she needs done in a timely manner. The first place to start is by brain dumping on a piece of paper all of the tasks you need to complete in both your business and personal life. And then organize your to-do list based on the priority these tasks need to get done and see if any of these things are able to be delegated to someone else. To ensure that you hold yourself accountable, May explains that you need to write down the potential consequences of not completing that item.

The reality is that most of the time, we pack our schedules with too many things and expect to get it all completed. But by following May’s five-step process, you can make the most of your day without becoming overwhelmed.

Quotes

• “The common problem is we pack too many things in one day or one week expecting that we can do it all.” (02:03-02:10 | May)

• “For every single task that you have on the piece of paper, you're going to then write down the consequences if this task does not get done.” (04:43-04:51 | May)

• “I also will determine if I can delegate some of these tasks or roll them over into the next week.” (06:35-06:41 | May)

• “In summary, I started with four tasks, but I ended up with only one thing that needs to be done. This is how I avoid becoming overwhelmed.” (08:50-08:59 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How To Recoup On Your Business Investments

Thu, 30 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are you investing in your business and not seeing it pay off? Whether you’re investing in lead services, an assistant, or a coaching program, you should be able to get a return on all of your business investments. If you feel like the processes aren’t working out, it could be because of you. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to ensure that you recoup on all of your business investments now and in the future.

One of the biggest mistakes that new business owners make is not giving their investment enough time to pay off. While it can be frustrating to spend money you don’t necessarily have in the beginning, you have to be patient and give whatever strategy you invested in time to start making you money. Ultimately, if an investment strategy isn’t working in your favor, you need to take a step back and evaluate your process. For example, if you aren’t closing leads, you need to ask yourself if you are following the right steps to qualify your leads? Are you following up? Are you even targeting the right leads for you?

But at the end of the day, recouping the money you spent on your investments comes down to you. You need to be investing in the right things, with the right strategies, and have a good mindset about what you are doing. Join the conversation to hear examples of successful investing strategies and how you can tweak your actions so that you can win back your investments tenfold.

Quotes

• “Every single investment strategy out there, they all work. If it is not working for you, the common denominator is you.” (01:44-01:55 | May)

• “One of the common mistakes that people often make is they don't give the investment enough time to evaluate whether or not it's working.” (06:33-06:46 | May)

• “Your return on investment is not how many leads you get. It's how many leads you close and the dollar amount that you close them for.” (10:00-10:12 | May)

• “Another rule of thumb to remember is the cheaper your service, the more you need to sell in order to recoup your investment.” (15:41-15:48 | May)

• “Every time you do any form of investment, you need to have an idea of how many outreaches and conversations you need to have to make it a conversion.” (20:30-20:44 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What Should You Be Investing in Your Business

Thu, 23 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Have you been wondering what you should be investing in your business? The answer depends on what stage of your business you are in, your strengths and weaknesses, and what you actually want to be doing with your time. Host May Yeo Silvers explains that when you are first starting out, the most important thing to understand is the day to day operations of building and running your business. This means things like bookkeeping, marketing, sales generating activities, and even attending in person networking events and trade shows.

Investing in a business coach is a great way to get started because they can help you decide where to invest your money. Whether you decide to do it alone or get a coach, the majority of your time building your business will be spent on sales generating activities. It is always a good idea to invest in anything that will help to generate leads, such as a photographer for an event portfolio, CRM software for generating sales outreach emails, and a website designer to build a robust website if you do not feel comfortable building one yourself. Once you have leads, you will have to also know how to close them and much of closing leads comes down to mindset. The right coach can help you to develop the business mindset you need to be successful.

In order to build a successful business, you need to be very clear on what is required to keep the business running on the day to day. Think about your skills and what you enjoy doing so that you can figure out where you need to invest your time and money.

Quotes

• “When you're starting your business, you need to understand what goes into the day to day activities.” (3:57-4:03 | May)

• “Building your pipeline, building your leads, building your visibility is your day to day operation.” (5:27-5:33 | May)

• “Buying insurance for your business, that's not an investment. That is what we call the cost of doing business.” (8:11-8:18 | May)

• “Unless you hire a very, very good copywriter who's able to imitate your voice, I strongly suggest you write the content yourself.” (9:37-9:45 | May)

• “When you are able to get leads, that's 50% of the equation. What's the other 50%? You’ve got to know how to close the leads.” (13:04-13:13 | May)

• “Invest in a coach that is able to help you build the mindset that you need to build a business.” (15:24-15:31 | May)

• “When you are at a certain level, your next step is no longer just building the pipeline, because you're still continuously building a pipeline. Now you can actually switch out your focus to building brand visibility, because once you build brand visibility, it will automatically build your pipeline.” (24:00-24:17 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

One Stop Shop or Niche Down?

Thu, 16 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0300

Are you at the start of your business and trying to decide whether to niche down or be a one stop shop? Host May Yeo Silvers suggests not making a decision right away, but instead, trying everything first to figure out what your passion is. Unless you already know what you do or do not like doing for event planning, you may want to consider being open to doing different type of events and decorations (for event designer and decorator) to have an idea what your REAL passion is after doing these events.

You may be very passionate and want to do it all, but consider that this may not be a sustainable path. If you are creating everything from flower arrangements to balloon arches and have a lot of hands-on activities, it may be difficult to maintain everything. Even if you enjoy doing it all, it will make your business harder to scale and cause you to risk burnout. You don’t have to do it all to still be a one stop shop. Decide what you will keep your hands on and then hire vendors to provide auxiliary services.

To determine your niche, you may have to experience planning and executing different events at least a few times before you say YES or NEVER AGAIN. If you find yourself enjoying lots of different niches, really consider whether it is a sustainable path for you to be involved in everything.

Quotes

• “When you're first starting the business, I would say don't be so quick to want to niche down until you have tried it all to know what your passion is.” (5:36-5:48 | May)

• “You may not agree that you want to niche down to only doing one thing, because you have interest in every single thing. So I would suggest that if that's the path that you want to take, considering that it may not be sustainable.” (13:07-13:28 | May)

• “If you go through the process of elimination and you still can't eliminate anything, just try it.” (16:40-16:46 | May)

• “You can still be a production house or a one stop shop, but you don't have to do every single part yourself.” (22:58-23:04 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should I Lower My Fees?

Thu, 09 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Have you been considering lowering your fees? Host May Yeo Silvers suggests that if you want to lower your fees, you can, but it can quickly become a habit that causes you to devalue your worth. The better route would be to slowly raise your fees so that you do not shock your pre-existing clients and can build your self-worth over time.

If you start out charging say $50 and then you try for a huge price increase all at once, you will likely lose some of your current clients who were unprepared for that change. You may also struggle to book at that higher cost initially and that can reinforce limiting beliefs about your self-worth. Instead of hiking your rate up a ton all at once, raise it slowly over time and inform your pre-existing clients of the coming changes. By raising your rates slowly, you will retain more of your clients and be more likely to get more new bookings at the higher rate which will raise your confidence level. This way you won’t need to consider lowering your fees, because you never raised them unsustainably high in the first place.

There will always be someone willing to pay whatever rate you wish to charge. If you want to lower your fees, that is your right. However, if you raise your fees slowly and build your self-worth, you may not ever need to lower your fees in the first place, because you will be booking clients consistently.

Quotes

• “You have to be mindful when you're raising your fees whether it makes sense to do it in a short period of time with such a big chunk.” (2:44-2:53 | May)

• “Stand firm because in a sales conversation. Whoever has the biggest conviction is going to win.” (3:17-3:22 | May)

• “There will always be someone who's going to pay that price at whatever price you charge.” (7:24-7:28 | May)

• “At the end of the day, should you lower your fees? Yes you can. But just know that it will become a habit. And if you're okay with that, that's okay because it's your business. But I would rather that you raise your fees slowly.” (13:11-13:24 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Attract Your Ideal Client By Doing This

Thu, 02 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Have you been attracting the wrong type of clients instead of ones who are aligned with your style of working? Host May Yeo Silvers suggests that the underlying issue may lie in a lack of honesty between yourself and a prospective client.

If you are typically a people-pleaser, it may be more difficult for you to say no to a potential client even if your intuition is telling you upfront that they will not be a good fit. You may hesitate to set expectations and honor your own boundaries in favor of trying to work and communicate in the way the client prefers. Ultimately, this does both yourself and that client a disservice, because neither of you are well-aligned. To attract your ideal client, be upfront and honest about your style of working and communicating, and encourage your clients to be honest with you about their desired working style and expectations.

By qualifying that you and a potential client are a match before ever getting into rates or contracts, you create an environment of authenticity and honesty. This also helps you to honor your own boundaries and not agree to take on a client for the wrong reasons such as people-pleasing or monetary need.

Quotes

• “What went wrong was in that sales conversation nobody was being honest.” (6:07-6:13 | May)

• “You are the leader in the sales consultation and you need to lead the conversation by creating an environment that your potential client can be themself to tell you how they want things done.” (6:28-6:45 | May)

• “I basically set the boundaries and expectations at the very beginning.” (9:35-9:38 | May)

• “Before I drop my fee, I want to know whether I like this person.” (12:53-12:57 | May)

• “A lot of entrepreneurs, not just event planners, who said that they are not attracting the ideal client, it's because they're not being honest. They are not being honest with themself of what they want. They are also not being honest with their clients, and they are also not encouraging their clients to be honest with them.” (15:16-15:39 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The REAL Reason Why Your Clients Hire You

Thu, 23 Feb 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Do you understand why your past and potential clients choose to hire you? According to host May Yeo Silvers, this is a question that every event planner needs to have an answer to because it can help you get more business in the future.

On the surface, it is easy to assume that your clients have hired you for their convenience. And while this may be the case for some people, always trying to sell to the surface level needs of your customers is not a sustainable way to generate business. If you focus just on price, you will always be able to be easily out bid. If you want to form a real business relationship with your clients, you need to focus on identifying the one thing that you can give them that is unique to you and your business.

When you stop trying to sell your services just for their price, and you shift your focus to addressing BEYOND the surface needs of your clients, you will be able to close more sales calls and bring in high-end clients that will appreciate your expertise and work.

Quotes

• “The problem with a lot of event planners that is blocking them from going to the next level is they are selling to the surface needs of their potential client. Which is, ‘I help you save time and money and I have the expertise to do this.’” (02:58-03:20 | May)

• "There are always people who object to the price. Even though the potential client may not have the time nor the expertise to do what they say they want for the events, once they are quoted the price, immediately time becomes an abundance for them.” (03:32-03:54 | May)

• “You will never win when it comes to price bidding because there will always be somebody who's more than willing to charge less than you in order to win the business.” (04:48-05:00 | May)

• “As a consumer, it's easy for us to find comparable items to compare. But what is the one thing that a potential client can’t find anywhere else? You. You are the most precious, rarest commodity. You are selling a unique experience.” (11:11-11:27 | May)

• “I don’t convince anyone to work with me. I show them my value. I show them that they can trust me” (12:10-12:20 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do You Have the “Right” Expectations for Your Business?

Thu, 16 Feb 2023 06:00:00 -0400

You love actually doing events, but lately you are feeling less passionate and excited about actually running your business. Does that sound familiar? This is very normal and does not mean that you are not cut out for doing events. Your passion for events has not wavered, however, taking care of the business side is new and can be very stressful. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers shares her own experience of burnout for running a business and how to keep things running when you don’t feel like doing it.

Consistency is extremely important when you are running a business, especially in the beginning when you are still making a name for yourself. You do not always have to be running everything at 1000%. In fact, you’re likely to burn out if you try to do that. Instead, if you feel your passion waning, allow yourself some grace to take a step back and only do the bare minimum of keeping your business running.

Not everyone enjoys running a business. You got into event planning, because you love actually doing events. Not necessarily because you love all the administrative tasks that go into keeping a business running profitably. To get back the passion for your ‘why’, take a step back whenever you need to instead of pushing yourself and risking burnout.

Quotes

• “The why is still there, but the passion for running the business is simmering.” (7:09-7:15 | May)

• “You are cut out to do events. Never ever forget that.” (7:42-7:46 | May)

• “If you don't have the passion to build the business, at least tolerate it and keep it at simmer.” (13:24-13:30 | May)

• “Give yourself some grace, that it’s okay to step away. It’s okay to step away and not do anything about the business when you don’t feel like it.” (13:37-13:48 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What Does a Venue Coordinator Do Versus a Day of Coordinator

Thu, 09 Feb 2023 06:00:00 -0400

When planning events, there is a common misconception that the venue coordinator and the day-of event coordinator are the same person. In reality, the venue coordinator is much too busy with their own tasks to have time to be your client’s helper. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the difference between the responsibilities of a venue coordinator and a day of coordinator.

Say you have clients who hired you to plan a wedding, but they did not hire you to do the day of coordination on their wedding day. They are mistakenly expecting the venue coordinator to be functioning as a day of coordinator as well, which can lead to a lot of disappointment and confusion at the event. A venue coordinator will be making sure things are running smoothly with the kitchen, the bar, and the rest of the staff, so they will not typically have time to help with much else. Make sure your clients are very specific about putting everything the venue agrees to handle in the written contract so that there are no surprises on the big day.

Your clients should not assume that the venue coordinator will be serving as a day of coordinator for an event. This is often not the case, and unless it is explicitly written into the contract, the venue coordinator will not be expecting to act as your client’s personal helper.

Quotes

• “I know of many venues, high end venues especially, that make it mandatory for the client who’s having an event at their venue to have a pointed person who is the helper for the client.” (02:42-03:00 | May)

• “You have to tell your potential client, ‘Go ask the venue if they're doing all these things’. If they say yes, make sure that they put it on the contract.” (12:04-12:12 | May)

• “You must have a helper on that day and your helper is supposed to do everything that the hotel does not do, or the venue does not do.” (15:02-15:10 | May)

• “You as a planner need to understand what the venue coordinator does.” (15:20-15:24 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Productivity Hack for 2023

Thu, 02 Feb 2023 06:00:00 -0400

If you think about time with a scarcity mindset, you will always struggle to have enough of it. Instead, you should try to approach time management with an abundance mindset. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers shares one of her most effective productivity hacks for getting more accomplished by being more intentional with your time.

Think about how much time it actually takes to do a task. Write down everything you want to do for yourself, others, around the house, for work and estimate the time each task will take to complete as accurately as you can. For tasks that you are unfamiliar with, put down a longer estimate at first and then time yourself to get a better understanding of how long it takes. Then, whenever you find yourself with gaps of time, even if they are only two or five minutes long, choose a task on your list that can fill in that gap.

By being more intentional about how you use your time, even small gaps throughout your day, you can really increase your productivity. Instead of just scrolling mindlessly on your phone when you have a gap in your day, choose to use that time more wisely. You will be surprised how much you can accomplish when you are mindful of your time.

Quotes

• “Do you have a scarcity mindset about time, that there is never enough time? Or do you have an abundance mindset?” (3:37-3:45 | May)

• “Identify what you can do in your personal life, and in your business, or in your career, that is going to help you move you along.” (5:38-5:48 | May)

• “When you start identifying how much you can do, what are the things you can do in those gaps, you become highly efficient.” (11:04-11:12 | May)

• “Every single thing that you do in life, not just in your business, you should have an idea how long it takes for you to do that. That's how you're able to do proper planning to avoid disappointment.” (12:27-12:39 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What It Really Means to Own a Business

Thu, 26 Jan 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Owning a business can be a dream, but it can also be a nightmare. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers breaks down what it really means to own a business without shying away from the uglier truths.

Entrepreneurship provides amazing opportunities for reaching your goals, but it also is not for everyone. You may have a lot of passion for the service or product you want to provide, but you also need to have a similar amount of passion for the business side of things. You will need to run payroll, social media, marketing, hiring and firing, and everything else that makes a business actually run.

Entrepreneurship is not for the faint of heart and requires a lot of time and effort to really be successful. Before opening the doors to your business, really consider all the aspects that owning a business entails.

Quotes

• “When you're building a business, there are some big moments that are going to be super ugly, and very uncomfortable. And if you're thinking to start a business, I want you to go all in with your eyes and your ears and your mind and your heart wide open, so you don't feel that you're blindsided.” (2:11-2:39 | May)

• “Welcome to entrepreneurship where there are highs of the highest and lows of the lowest. And the lowest will rip you apart if you do not have the aptitude.” (4:06-4:19 | May)

• “In order to have a successful business, you not only have to love what you're offering, you also have to love what you have to do for business.” (10:15-10:29 | May)

• “Your business can't grow without you growing first. So you need to be the one leading the business and not let the business push you.” (21:56-22:06 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What Exactly Is “Mindset” & How Do You Change It?

Thu, 19 Jan 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Has anyone ever told you that you have to have the right mindset to find success? While this can sound a bit cliche in the coaching world, do you know what it actually means? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers defines that word “mindset” and gives listeners insight on how to change it for the better.

First and foremost, if you don’t have the right mindset, you cannot materialize the goals you have set for yourself. So when someone tells you that you need to change your mindset, they are basically saying that you need to change the way you think. But how do you do that? According to May, it all goes back to your thoughts and beliefs that you have conditioned yourself to believe. So in order to change your mindset, you have to understand your thoughts and then slowly identify ways that you can bring more light into your life. What makes you happy? What brings you peace? And how can you bring more of those things into your daily routine?

Change doesn’t happen overnight. Adopting a new mindset is something you have to be intentional about every single day. But when you can start to eliminate your negative thoughts one by one, you will start to think more positively about yourself. And it is here that you can begin to adopt the positive mindset you need to change your life and accomplish your goals.

Quotes

• “If you don't have the right mindset, all the plans that you have made, all the things that you want to achieve for 2023, are not going to materialize.” (01:31-01:53 | May)

• “When someone tells you that you’ve got to change your mindset, that basically means you’ve got to change the way you think.” (03:25-03:34 | May)

• “What your thoughts are, and how you form your thoughts, are all rooted from deep beliefs that you were brought up with.” (05:14-05:25 | May)

• “When people start using words like, “change your mindset, or adopt a positive mindset,” you have to ask yourself, “What does that mean to me?” Because it's not the same for everybody.” (18:22-18:33 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Planning Out Your 2023 Starts NOW

Thu, 12 Jan 2023 06:00:00 -0400

As we are halfway through the first month of 2023, have you checked in with yourself? How are you doing? Are you taking action towards your goals? As the year begins on a good note, it is important to take the time to plan out your year. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers teaches listeners how planning for the year can help you live a more intentional life.

Many entrepreneurs feel like they can’t accomplish everything they want to because they simply don’t have the time. But according to May, we do have the time for the things we want to do, we just have to be better at planning for it. So when planning for 2023, you want to start with the big major events like holidays, weddings, and vacations. Then, you want to take a look at any industry events and block those times out. And after you have planned for the non-negotiables, you can look at what time is left for the extra things and it becomes easier to plan your day-to-day schedule.

Even though it may seem extreme to plan a year in advance, it really can set you up for success. Once you have done it enough times, you will create new habits that free up your time to do more of what you want while still achieving all of your goals.

Want to know more about how to start and grow a successful event planning business? Don’t forget to sign up for my in-person workshop on Saturday, March 4th in Fort Lauderdale, Florida. To request more information or sign-up please email me at may@events4anyone.com

Quotes

• “Are you busy just getting through the day? Or are you busy with making sure every single minute of your day is used to its best potential?” (03:17-03:30 | May)

• “You can live a free life if you have already mastered the skill of understanding your energy and how to get things done in that type of energy flow.” (07:49-07:59 | May)

• “I am extremely intentional with the time. I'm not just busy doing busy work. Every single work that I do is a building block to something else.” (09:23-09:34 | May)

• “When the big events are already taking up spots on your calendar, you can see what the other open slots are. So when an opportunity arises, you can, at one glance, already know if you can take advantage of a new opportunity.” (20:19-20:35 | May)

• “In order to be intentional, you first have to be self-aware.” (26:20-26:23| May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Getting Help To Attain Your 2023 Goals by Saying NO

Thu, 05 Jan 2023 06:00:00 -0400

Host May Yeo Silvers starts off the new year by helping you attain the 2023 goals that you set for yourself during her goal setting series. In today’s episode, she discusses how saying no is another way of asking for help.

Many people struggle with saying no. If you have a hard time setting boundaries for yourself, there are many ways to practice saying no in different ways. Instead of saying no outright, you can ask questions such as, ‘can it be done later?’ This way you can determine if what you’re being asked to do is actually worth your time. When people are more discerning about asking for help and they know you are willing to say no, it becomes more apparent when someone actually really does need help.

You cannot reach your 2023 goals completely on your own. It will take a support system and the best way to reach your goals is to begin training that support system now. By saying no and letting people know to only reach out for help when they truly need it, AND vice versa, you can begin to train the people around you to respect your boundaries and to be the supportive village you need.

Quotes

• “The reality is to attain what you have set out to attain, it takes a village.” (2:54-3:02 | May)

• “In order for us to have stamina, in order for us to gain momentum, and continue with the momentum, we need to learn that one person doing it is good. Many people helping you to push you to move forward is best.” (5:32-5:54 | May)

• “You'll be surprised if you open your mouth, people are willing to help. You know why? Because it has shown that when we help someone we feel good about ourselves.” (7:39-7:49 | May)

• “There is another way to ask for help apart from asking someone to help you to do something. Another way to ask for help is to say no.” (9:34-9:44 | May)

• “Saying no to negative thoughts will be the first step.” (11:36-11:40 | May)

• “In order to get a buy-in from your village, your village needs to know what is the end goal? How's it going to benefit me?” (18:01-18:09 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

2 Things That Will Sabotage You Attaining Your 2023 Goals

Thu, 29 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0400

As host May Yeo Silvers continues to expand on her series regarding goal setting, it is important to be aware of things that might hinder your success. In today’s episode, she discusses the two things that can sabotage you from attaining your 2023 goals.

In 2023, it is May’s hope that every listener achieves their goals. But in order to do this, you must follow the process. First by setting intentional goals, then developing an action plan to get there. But once these goals are set and you have an understanding of what steps you need to take, there are a couple of things that might stand in your way: time and belief. For many people, the reason why they didn’t achieve their goals is because they claim they did not have enough time. However, May explains that the number one thing that gets in people’s way of success is their own beliefs. If you don’t believe that you can achieve your goals, you won’t make the time to work towards them. But if you believe in your heart that you can accomplish what you set out to, then you will dedicate your time looking for solutions to get you there.

Everything starts with a belief. It’s not enough to just say that you want to do something, you have to believe that you can. So coming into 2023, if you make the choice to believe in yourself and your ability to take the right steps, there is no reason why you shouldn’t achieve everything you want and more.

Quotes

• “When people share what the obstacles that are blocking them from attaining their goals, the very first thing that comes out from their mouth is, ‘I don't have time.’” (02:09-02:25 | May)

• “If you don't have the belief that you can attain your goal, would you actually make the time to attain the goal? No.” (03:50-04:01 | May)

• "I don't believe in speaking it into existence. I believe in believing it into existence. It all has to start with a belief.” (04:43-04:46 | May)

• “If you don't believe that you can do it, no matter how strong your why is, it's not going to work.” (05:59-06:06 | May)

• “There are so many of you who believe that your circumstances are going to determine what you're going to get. That is absolutely false. You are in charge of your emotions. You are in charge of your beliefs.” (23:49-24:05 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Auditing Your Schedule To Attain Your 2023 Goals

Thu, 22 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0400

Now that you have established your goals and created an action plan to go with them, you must make sure that you have the time in your schedule to follow through. However, you also don’t want to over do it to the point where you give up. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to audit your progress over the year so that you can sustain your goals.

Whenever we make new goals, we are asking ourselves to develop new habits that are outside of our norm. And because we are not used to living this way, it can be easy to give up and not achieve them. Rather than shocking ourselves with unrealistic expectations, it is first important to understand our internal programming. Once we recognize our patterns, we can then evaluate our routines and find the time to work towards our goals. But the true key to success is holding ourselves accountable. If you check in with your progress every week or month, you will be able to routinely evaluate whether or not you are on track.

Asking ourselves to do the work is easy when it is fresh and new, but as time goes on, it gets harder and harder. But when you take the time to make small actionable steps towards your goals, and you remain consistent on auditing your progress, you are way more likely to achieve anything you set your mind to.

Quotes

• “If you are planning to incorporate more exercise in your schedule, that means you need to find time to go to the gym or meet up with your trainer to exercise. Everything requires time.” (03:47-04:02 | May)

• “If you don't see instant gratification or results you can get demotivated. So what happens? You stop showing up.” (04:30-04:40 | May)

• “When you're trying to attain a new goal, you’re asking yourself to develop new habits, new thinking, and a new way of living that basically goes against what your current programming is.” (06:23-06:47 | May)

• “Asking your body to adapt to a new change is going to be easier when it’s fresh and new. But as the days pass, and as time passes, and you don't see instant gratification it’s going to be really hard.” (07:02-07:27 | May)

• “Self-auditing is my secret weapon to the growth that I have been getting in the last two years.” (09:14-09:21 | May)

• “If you're able to do minor tweaks, you have a better chance of having sustainability. And sustainability means consistency which means that you're going to see results at the end.” (14:46-14:56 | May)

• “There needs to be a plan. If it's not on your schedule, it doesn't exist. If it's not on your calendar, it doesn't exist. That's why I encourage you to write things down. When you write things down, you hold yourself accountable.” (16:11-16:26 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Investing Your Money to Attain Your 2023 Goals

Thu, 15 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0400

Over the last couple of weeks, host May Yeo Silvers has been talking about goal setting for 2023. Not only does it take intentionality and action to achieve your goals, but it also takes your time, money, and resources. In today’s episode, May guides listeners through the process of investing their money to help achieve your goals in the new year.

When we are setting our action plan to achieve our goals, we have the choice to go about it in two ways. We could use our own sweat-equity to get the job done, or we could hire someone for their expertise to help expedite the process. Either way you choose to go, you must first ask yourself whether or not this goal is something you can do on your own. But if you choose to hire someone, you should understand that you will be using your hard earned money so you must take this investment seriously. Be upfront and direct with your expectations and make sure that whoever you hire knows what you want to achieve and how you want to achieve it.

Just like with anything, investing money into your business is a process. But if you want to attain the goal badly enough, you will find the money to help you get there.

Quotes

• “When we set our goals and determine the action plan, we have a choice of using sweat equity– meaning we can do and figure out everything by ourselves to get to the end result. Or we can expedite the process by using money to buy time and expertise.” (01:45-02:09 | May)

• “Working with someone can seem like an easier path, but it is also a financial commitment.” (04:08-04:17 | May)

• “Before you make the commitment to invest your money in hiring help, you have to ask yourself, ‘can I do it by myself?’” (06:45-06:50 | May)

• “If you come to the conclusion that you want to hire someone, you have to be so clear about your expectations.” (08:59-09:09 | May)

• “When you're thinking about putting aside money to invest, it's a whole process.” (13:38-13:44 | May)

• “There are ways and means to find the funds. So don't say that you don't have the money. I guarantee if you look at your bills or your credit card statements, there are ways that you can cut back on spending.” (16:08-16:22 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Action Plan To Achieve Your 2023 Goals

Thu, 08 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0400

When it comes to setting your goals for 2023, it is important to know what your goals are, and why you want to achieve them. But to actually see these goals come to fruition, you must put action behind them. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to put together the right action plan for your goals in 2023 and beyond.

Whether this is a brand new goal, or you’re building on an already existing goal, it it first important to understand your current behaviors. What are the things in your life that influence you to behave the way that you are? And how does your behavior impact your success overall? If you do not understand your behavior and how it makes you feel, then you will not be able to understand what’s holding you back from achieving your goals. Once you recognize your behaviors, you can begin to take efficient action towards success. But the most crucial thing to remember is that change happens in time. And you need to reward yourself for all the small steps along the way.

Ultimately, change doesn’t happen overnight. Achieving success is a long-term process that requires a lot of dedication and self-reflection. If you do not break your goals up into small actionable steps, it will be hard to yield any results.

Quotes

• “Whether it is a new goal for 2003, or a goal that you have set for yourself throughout the last year, one very important thing that you need to do is to recognize your current way of behavior.” (02:02-02:16 | May)

• “You have to evaluate what you currently have that at least keeps you content. But also what needs to change to make a difference so that you can live a more fulfilled life?” (03:49-04:02 | May)

• “After you list out all the things that are robbing your time, you are going to evaluate what things you can automate, delegate or delete.” (06:25-06:35 | May)

• “Once you come to the conclusion that you are not going to let your current circumstances affect you anymore, the need to want to change is going to surpass all the challenges, and uncomfortable emotions or actions that you have to take because your desire to want to make that change will be so strong that nothing is going to stop you.” (08:15-08:38 | May)

• “When you have the fundamentals taken care of everything becomes easier.” (10:09-10:13 | May)

• “The reason why 99% of the people fail when they try to attain a new goal is because they look at the big plan, and they go all in.” (11:03-11:14 | May)

• “Every single change is going to bring you closer to your goal. You’ve got to keep yourself motivated with your small actions, not just the end goal.” (14:45-14:57 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Strategy For Goal Setting in the New Year

Thu, 01 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0400

As the year comes to an end, it is important to start planning for success in the new year. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses strategies for setting efficient and effective 2023 goals.

As we head into 2023, most people are already thinking about what their new year’s resolutions will be. And while most people know what they want to achieve, it often stops there. It is one thing to want to do something and an entirely different thing to actually get it done. To be more effective in achieving your goals, it is important to write things down. Write down your goal, why you want to achieve it, and how you would feel if you did or did not accomplish it. When you have some level of accountability, you are more likely to be successful in what you set out to do.

Setting goals is an essential part of being successful. Tune in to learn more about how to set efficient and effective goals for the new year and beyond.

Quotes

• “I think when we set a goal, we have a pretty good idea why we set that goal. However, we just stop there, instead of giving it more thought.” (02:10-02:14 | May)

• “When you set a goal, it has to be intentional.” (03:20-03:23 | May)

• “When you set a goal, I want you to write it down on paper. Why do you want to set this goal? (04:53-04:59 | May)

• “If you had the same goal before and you didn't achieve it, you have to write down why. Why didn't you achieve that goal when you had it before? What was the hindrance?” (06:55-07:13 | May)

• “You have to envision yourself already at that place of attaining that goal. How does that feel? Does it make you feel good? And then you also have to envision how you would feel if you didn’t attain your goal.” (09:45-10:00 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Danger Of Learning Too Much

Thu, 24 Nov 2022 06:00:00 -0400

Are you constantly stuck in a cycle of wanting to learn more and more, but never actually implementing what you are learning? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers talks about the danger of learning too much and how to learn in a more effective way.

The danger of learning too much is that the more you learn, the more inadequate you feel. Every time you learn something new, you are faced with how much there still is to learn. That feeling can be very overwhelming and lead you to not actually retain anything you have learned. The best way to learn is to take it step by step. Each time you learn a new thing, implement it. By taking action you will evoke a feeling around that action, and then you are more likely to remember what you learned. Once you’ve taken action on the first step of what you just learned, then you can move onto learning the next step.

If you continually learn new things, but do not actually implement them, you are not actually retaining what you’ve learned. Until you put what you learn into action, it is all just theory. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn about the danger of learning too much and why implementation is vital for effective learning.

Quotes

• “You continue to crave for more new things to learn. So this becomes a pattern, you're constantly in the learning mode. You want to learn more, and more, and more, because every new thing that you learn makes you feel more and more insecure.” (5:35-5:52 | May)

• “I don't want you to get into the mindset of constantly wanting to learn more because the more you learn the more inadequate you feel.” (9:13-9:20 | May)

• “When you implement what you have learned in theory, you are creating an activity, and the activity will create some form of a memory. Okay, because of the experience you get from that activity, so it creates feelings. And that feeling creates emotions. And that's when you will remember better than just words itself.” (10:32-10:57 | May)

• “I'm not asking you to stop learning. I'm asking that every time you learn something, you’ve got to immediately take action to implement what you have learned.” (11:06-11:13 | May)

• “In order for you to be able to relate to the things that you are learning, you’ve got to implement what you have learned previously. And then, the results are going to give you a better point of reference when you go to learn the next thing.” (14:01-14:19 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

”Feeling” Your Way To Success

Thu, 17 Nov 2022 06:00:00 -0400

Do you have a dream for yourself but are too afraid to take action? In today’s episode, Host May Yeo Silvers discusses the importance of feeling your way to success.

Unfortunately, many people never achieve their goals because they are simply too afraid to imagine themselves as successful. According to May, one of the best things you can do to achieve success is to first imagine yourself already there. Once you have an understanding of what it feels like to be that successful, it will give you the purpose and motivation you need to take actionable steps to get there.

Don’t shut down your dreams before even trying! Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn why manifestation is the first step to living the life of your dreams.

Quotes

• “Unfortunately, many people do not allow themselves to imagine because they don't want to feel disappointed if they don't attain their goals. And that's the reason why a lot of people don't even take the leap of faith to start their own business.” (03:38-03:56 | May)

• “If you don't get into the feelings of how it feels to experience your goals, you will lose your motivation and inspiration to take action to work towards it.” (08:33-08:47 | May)

• “Why is manifestation important? Because that vision is going to transport you spiritually into the place that you want to go. And it will feel so real that you can almost taste it.” (11:37-11:50 | May)

• “In order for you to have success in your business, you need to already feel that you are successful.” (14:33-14:41 | May)

• “Unfortunately, a lot of people do not allow themselves to even envision their goals in their head because they already shut down their own dreams.” (15:24-15:33 | May)

• “If you want success, dream like a child. Dream like anything is possible. Because it is.” (15:45-15:50 | May)

• “In order to take action, you have to feel something. If you don't feel anything, there is no purpose. Everything is empty.” (16:22-16:30 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Mindset You Should Have When Using Paid Leads Platforms

Thu, 10 Nov 2022 06:00:00 -0400

Do you pay for lead services and wonder why most of them ghost you after you’ve given them your price? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the process of using a paid leads platform and the mindset you need to have.

While using a paid leads platform, it is important to understand the mindset of the people on the other side. Not only is it an efficient way to receive a bunch of quotes, but the potential client has to spend no time talking to anyone. In fact, their only goal is to price shop from several event planners. And if your quote doesn’t line up with what they’re looking for, they will likely not continue the conversation with you. So rather than wasting your time preparing a proposal for someone who is price shopping with 10 other event planners, it’s better to just play the game.

While getting leads off of paid platforms does work sometimes, it is not always a reliable way to source business. Remember to use your social media, go to trade shows, and attend networking events so that you can grow your portfolio organically. Learn more about how to play the game, how Zola differs from other paid lead platforms, and why you should never rely on one way of getting leads.

Quotes

• “It's not just efficient, they also don't have to waste time talking to anyone that they don't want to work with.” (04:35-04:47 | May)

• “The majority of people who are on these platforms are shopping based on price. So their first determining factor is price.” (04:59-05:05 | May)

• “If the price that you quote is not what they are willing to pay, then they won’t even take the time to go to your website.” (05:34-05:50 | May)

• “When you are on these types of platforms, play the game. Don't get upset when people ask you what your fee is, and then when you tell them, they just disappear. Don't waste your time sending proposals because they don't have time to read your proposal. They will only want to work with people who immediately share with them a price that fits into their budget.” (10:09-10:34 | May)

• “You have to be patient. But ultimately, you should always spread your methods of getting leads. You want to be able to get organic leads as well. Which means showing up on your social media, taking part in trade shows and attending networking events. You should never just depend on one way of getting leads.” (17:59-18:20 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The One Question You Must Answer to Ensure Success in Your Business

Thu, 03 Nov 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When you start a business, there are many things you need to do to get it up and running. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the one question that every entrepreneur needs to ask themselves before they consider starting their own business.

The main reason people leave the corporate world is to pursue freedom of their time and finances. While entrepreneurship can be the right way to achieve this, it is never as easy as people think. In fact, during the first few years of opening a business, you will run into many hardships that might encourage you to give up. So to ensure that you find success, May says that you need to understand your purpose and your why. If you cannot answer why it is important that you make this change in your life, it is unlikely that you will find long-term success in your business.

Ultimately, the things that we desire can change based on the sacrifices that we have to make to attain them. So figure out your why, and you can almost guarantee that you will not only survive, but thrive as an entrepreneur.

Quotes

• “Why is it important that you want to make the change to your current way of living now? Because if you all don't know the answer, when you're building your business, you may find that attaining the freedom that you want is not as easy as you think.” (03:10-03:34 | May)

• “While you're building your journey to attain your freedom, there are going to be bumps along the road. And when you hit those bumps, there will be many opportunities for you to give up.” (04:11-04:26 | May)

• “If you do not know why you cannot live without that level of freedom, that means you don't really have a why or a purpose.” (05:55-06:06 | May)

• “Suddenly, something that seems very, very desirable to you can become less desirable and less appealing when you know the sacrifices that you have to make in order to attain it.” (07:08-07:21 | May)

• “Whatever you do in your business has to be created out of inspiration, not obligation.” (11:14-11:22 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The One Thing You Must Do To Attract High-Paying Clients

Thu, 27 Oct 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Are you curious about the strategies you need to follow to attract high-paying clients? According to host May Yeo Silvers, there is one very important thing every event planner must do if they want their clients to pay top dollar.

After being in the industry for over a decade, May has had to learn how to weed out the clients with champagne taste and a beer budget. She explains that the best way to get high-paying clients is to be able to articulate your worth. Ultimately, a high-paying client will choose to work with someone that they feel is confident in their ability to get the job done, no matter the price.

At the end of the day, if you don’t believe in your value then it will be hard to convince others they should pay you that amount. Once you accept your worth, your potential clients will have no problem paying you top dollar for your services.

Quotes

• “In order for you to start attracting high-paying clients, you have to understand what a high-paying client needs.” (01:41-01:50 | May)

• “Knowing your worth is one thing. Feeling, valuing, and articulating that worth is the part that I think the majority of the people struggle with.” (02:32-02:48 | May)

• “If you don't believe in how much you should be paid and you can’t confidently articulate that, that's the reason why you're not attracting high-end clients.” (06:16-06:28 | May)

• “A high-end buyer will never ever pay someone who wants to charge a high ticket but cannot confidently articulate the number that they want to be paid.” (09:47-10:02 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Missing Link Between Having an Events Certification & Building a Thriving Business

Thu, 20 Oct 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Many people believe that in order to have a good event planning business, they should get as many certifications as possible. And while it is beneficial to have knowledge and specific skill sets, host May Yeo Silvers can’t help but notice that people spend a lot of time and money investing in these certifications just to be able to utilize them in the real world. In today’s episode, May explains the missing link between having certifications and building a sustainable business.

According to May, being knowledgeable about how to plan enticing events is only half of the equation. If you have all of this knowledge, but don’t know how to MARKET it properly, then your business will not make any money. The other half to running a profitable business is knowing how to generate leads and then turn them into paying customers. To continue running her own successful events companies, May spends the majority of her time building her customer base and uses the time that’s left to plan events.

At the end of the day, you can be the best event planner, but if you don’t know how to effectively market yourself and close leads, you will not have a profitable business. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of focusing on sales and business development so that you can utilize your talent and plan events that will continue to make you money.

Quotes

• “What I'm seeing among these people who have invested a lot of money in taking all these classes is that they aren’t applying the skills they have learned.” (03:45-03:59 | May)

• “You can be the best decorator or event designer, but if you don't know how to sell, you don't know how to build a business. And it won’t go anywhere.” (04:37-04:45 | May)

• “You actually learn more by doing it on the job.” (08:50-08:55 | May)

• “80% of the time, I’m building my sales pipeline. And the other 20% I’m actually using my knowledge to plan events.” (11:37-11:45 | May)

• “If you want to invest in yourself and your business, you shouldn’t spend all the money on just learning technical skills. You should focus a lot more of your time and money on business development.” (13:41-13:57 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Mindset About Building a Team

Thu, 13 Oct 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Thinking about expanding your business and building a team can be an intimidating part of owning a business. When you first began your business, you probably started it because of your passion. And while it may have started off good with just you, any business that intends to make more money will need to hire a strong and like-minded team. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers shares with listeners the ins and outs of building your dream team.

When people think about the concept of building a team, they often begin to add up all of the expenses. Between the hiring process, training, and providing adequate compensation, putting together a team can seem time-consuming. While there is no easy way around some of this, May explains that you must shift your mindset and focus on the bigger picture. What are the roles and responsibilities that you need to fill? And how are you going to put together a compelling compensation plan? At the end of the day, when you hire a trustworthy team, you will free up more of your time to build your customer pipeline to make more money.

Whatever your end goals are, you will go farther with the right team beside you. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of building a team, the difference between contractors and employees, and how to find your A-team so that you can grow and scale your business to meet your goals.

Quotes

• “I have a network of people whom I have built a relationship with who can execute events for me and I don't have to be there. But I still make the money.” (06:18-06:32 | May)

• “I'm very careful about who I work with and who I decide to hire to do my events. And my contractors do such a great job my clients will continue to do events with me.” (08:18-08:32 | May)

• “First, we need to shift our mindsets about building a team. Do not let the word “team” scare you.” (11:01-11:07 | May)

• “You have to know what roles you need to fill in, the responsibilities that go with it, what a compelling and fair compensation package is, and what things will attract people to your employee value proposition.” (12:59-13:14 | May)

• “Having a team is not a cost center if you know how to monetize your team and calculate the return on investment.” (14:37-14:52 | May)

• “I want you to understand that when you hire someone, it is not your responsibility to support the lifestyle of the person that you want to hire.” (18:39-18:44 | May)

• “When you are building a team, you're building a movement of people who support you, your mission, your vision, your team culture, your values, and the impact that you're giving to your clients.” (19:41-19:54 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Having Many Clients Doesn’t Mean You Have a Thriving Business

Thu, 06 Oct 2022 06:00:00 -0300

“Just because you have a lot of clients, does not mean that your business is thriving,” explains host May Yeo Silvers. In fact, you could have a lot of client’s and still not be living your desired lifestyle. In today’s episode, May discusses the qualities of a successful and thriving business owner.

According to May, many new event planners fall for the idea that in order to make money, they need to book as many clients as they can. While it is definitely good to have a steady flow of clients, it is more important to focus on the quality of them. Before you decide to take on a new lead, May says you must ask yourself what your return on investment will be. If you are working every hour of every day just to make 100k, you might want to reconsider how you structure your business. When you are more efficient in your business plan and marketing strategies, you will likely find clients who will pay you the hourly rate that you deserve.

At the end of the day, the goal of owning your own business is to live a lifestyle that suits you best. But in order to do this, you must be savvy in the way you handle clients and run your business. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of setting an hourly rate that keeps clients coming but allows you to live financially free.

Quotes

• “The question that you should be asking yourself is ‘how much money am I making from each client?’” (02:07-02:17 | May)

• “There is no point to booking so many clients, and working so many events, but making the same money as another business owner who makes the same amount of money as you, but is working much less.” (05:09-05:23 | May)

• “Every time you take a lead, you have to ask yourself, ‘What is the potential revenue I'm going to get from this client? And what is my return on investment?’” (07:55-08:10 | May)

• “You need to pay attention to your numbers, not to the vanity matrix of ‘Oh, I have a lot of clients.’ I don't care if you have a lot of clients. All I care about is how much are you making and keeping.” (16:48-17:05 | May)

• “Do not confuse a thriving business as one that has a lot of clients. No, a thriving business is one that has clients that have a high yield value and a CEO who knows how to calculate their worth.” (18:28-18:40 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is Your Client ”Coachable?”

Thu, 29 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Are your clients not giving you the information you need to plan their events within an orderly timeline? According to host May Yeo Silvers, not communicating realistic timing expectations will negatively impact you, the client, and the event itself. In today’s episode, May helps listeners learn how to manage their clients successfully to avoid any unnecessary consequences of poor planning.

As event planners, it’s normal not to want to seem pushy or rude. However, it’s essential to be clear with your clients about what you need and when so that nothing important goes by the wayside. If you let your clients know how you work and your expectations of them, you can ensure that you have the partnership needed to do your job. Since the event results ultimately reflect on you, you must create an accountability timeline for you and your clients to follow.

For you to do your job, your clients need to do theirs. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about how to “coach” your clients into fulfilling their end of milestone planning.

Quotes

• “Lack of planning at your end does not constitute an emergency at my end.” (1:46-1:52 | May)

• “When I say how coachable your client is, it's not you coaching the client per se. It's more about from the very beginning when you're qualifying your potential client. You have to be totally honest with yourself and ask yourself this question. After your interaction with the potential client, do you think that you are a good fit for them, and they're a good fit for you? When do I ask if you are a good fit for them? Are they a good fit for you? I'm not talking about whether are you able to do what they asked you to do. Do you have the capability to do what they ask you to do? It goes beyond that.” (2:50-3:38 | May)

• “I manage the client. I do not let the client manage me.” (8:18-8:22 | May)

• “You have to hold yourself accountable by ensuring that you check your timeline week after week. And you also have to have a system where you set a reminder to chase the information from your client.” (11:20-11:37 | May)

• “What your clients can expect from you is important, but what you need from them is equally important. Planning an event is a partnership.” (18:03-18:14 | May)

• “Vendors and venues appreciate planners who have a handle of their client.” (20:01-20:07 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Watch Out for That Victimhood Mindset

Thu, 22 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Do you let your current reality affect how you approach your business and your life? According to host May Yeo Silvers, having that mindset turns you into a victim in your own life. In today’s episode, May warns listeners the dangers of having what she likes to call, a “victimhood mindset.”

While there may be things in your life that make achieving your goals a little more difficult, it doesn’t mean that it can’t change. According to May, when we allow ourselves to think this way, it means we have already allowed ourselves to be defeated. Rather than blaming outside sources, it is more effective to take accountability and understand that we can make things happen for ourselves.

At the end of the day, if you don’t have control of your life it will be hard to find success. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about how to reshape your mindset, so that you can find the happiness and success that you’ve always dreamed of.

Quotes

• “In my perspective, the reality is if you're not getting any momentum it is because you're letting all of your circumstances, which may be your current reality beat you. You are letting your current reality control your faith and control your destiny.” (06:23-06:42 | May)

• “There are things that you can do to change your reality. The question is, are you willing to make the effort and the sacrifices to take control of your life?” (07:43-07:59 | May)

• “When you lack control or don’t want to make the effort to gain back control, you become the victim of your circumstances.” (09:10-09:20 | May)

• “When you think, ‘my circumstances are very different from yours. Therefore, I'm not able to be as successful as you,” you are claiming victimhood.” (09:27-09:39 | May)

• “Instead of blaming the circumstances or blaming others, how about taking some accountability and understanding that you can make things happen for yourself.” (11:02-11:20 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The First and Last Dollar Amounts Are What Your Lead Will Remember

Thu, 15 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Have you ever been ghosted by a lead after sending over a proposal? According to host May Yeo Silvers, the first and last dollar amounts are the only thing your clients will remember. In today’s episode, she explains why all event planners must use caution when they are quoting their prices.

Most potential clients will want to know how much it is going to cost them to plan an event. And while it may be easy to give a ballpark number, it is important to understand that a client is going to recognize the first number you give them as a final price. To avoid any price objections, or loss of business, May explains that you need to have a conversation with your client about what their final price is going to be before you send them a proposal. When a lead clearly understands the cost of your fee, supplies, and set up and tear down is, they are less likely to ghost you.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of price transparency so that you can turn your proposals into revenue.

Quotes

• “When a potential client asks you what your fee is after they have told you their vision of the event, don’t expect them to understand that your fee is just for your time.” (07:19-07:30 | May)

• “When you send a proposal over without explaining FIRST what your fee is going to cover and without explaining how much their vision is going to cost, your potential client is just going to assume the very first number that they hear is the number they will see on the proposal.” (08:25-08:49 | May)

• “You need to prepare the potential client that your fee may go up or down depending on their final selections.” (10:07-10:20 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

May’s Learnings From Her Past Events

Thu, 08 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Throughout her years of work, host May Yeo Silvers has encountered just about every situation. Good or bad, every event May has planned has been an opportunity for her to improve the way she runs her business. In today’s episode, May takes listeners on a journey from her past to share some of the things she has learned along the way.

May first shares an example of a time when she and her team had to deal with an unruly client. No matter what they did or said, this client was determined to make the situation terrible. Rather than letting her get to them, May told her team to focus on doing what they do best: running a successful event. In the end, you can’t always predict or control how things are going to turn out, but you can still show up as the best version of yourself and make the most of every situation.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of rolling with the punches, having a positive attitude, and letting every experience be of value to you and your business.

Quotes

• “What is the point of arguing with someone who is unreasonable? What is the point of focusing on our anger and frustrations if a client is not able to receive what we have to say? So I tell my team to listen with an empathetic ear and heart.” (06:06-06:22 | May)

• “For every single contract that I negotiate for my client, I always negotiate with a worst-case scenario mentality.” (09:30-09:40 | May)

• “We can't fight Mother Nature so what is the point of getting upset and getting your client upset that the ‘perfect-picture ceremony’ didn't turn out the way they wanted? You have to roll with the punches.” (13:37-13:49 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

People Pleasing is a Self-Sabotaging Act

Thu, 01 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0300

As humans, we all want to be liked. However, if pleasing others hinders our business, sense of self, or well-being, we must reevaluate. Today, host May Yeo Silvers lays out how to move past our people-please tendencies that get in the way of our own goals.

May has repeatedly seen people lose who they are to make others happy, but if you’re a business owner who does this, you may lose out financially. As much as we want to do right by our clients, that should not mean that we have to lower our prices or alter how we work when we invest so much of our time and effort into our work. Instead, be clear about your operations and deliverables because it’s much more important to attract the right people than the wrong people at the cost of ourselves.

Although no one wants to be judged, remember that always putting others above yourself is a self-sabotaging act. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur for concrete examples of people-pleasing in both business and relationships and what you can do to stop being afraid of saying what you want.

Quotes

• “Self-development is a constant learning experience and work that I do every single day.” (2:49-2:58 | May)

• “It is normal to want to be a people pleaser. But if it hinders who you are as a person and as a business owner, it is going to cost you financially, emotionally, mentally, and physically.” (3:06-3:36 | May)

• “I’m not afraid to let the client know this is how I work, why I work this way, and the results I can deliver. I'm not afraid to be a straight shooter. There's a difference between being rude versus being clear.” (10:38-10:54 | May)

• “It's important to attract the people you want to work with. But it’s equally important to repel the people you don't want to work with. So by being who you truly are and expressing your thoughts, opinions, and personality, you will connect with people who are your people.” (15:09-15:36 | May)

• “You can't control what people think, say, and feel about you. But you can control how you feel, what you think and say, and how you can be a better person in the long run.” (20:05-20:18 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Family Does Not Compete With Your Business and Vice Versa

Thu, 25 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0300

As host May Yeo Silvers has grown her Facebook community, she has had the opportunity to help many aspiring event planners open and grow the business of their dreams. However, among the many people she has talked to, the number one reason why people put their business on hold is due to family. While family is the most important thing, May explains that it’s possible to run a successful business and still prioritize your loved ones.

No matter where you are in life, you will always have obligations to someone or something outside of your business. But to be a successful business owner, your personal and work lives should never have to compete with each other. In fact, if you learn how to set boundaries and manage your time, everything on your schedule should be doable. May explains that the success of your business relies on two things: the communication between you and your inner circle, and your ability to maintain your schedule. When you know exactly how much time you can spend working on your business, there is no reason you can’t still spend quality time with your family.

In the end, to be a successful eventrepreneur, you must find the balance between your personal life and your business. Join May for an enlightening conversation on communication and time management so that you can stop putting your dreams on hold.

Quotes

• “I deliberately have to be mindful that I always put my family first because first, I'm a workaholic. Second, I really love what I do. And third, I am emotionally and physically invested in my business and in my clients.” (04:24-04:45 | May)

• “The people that I've spoken to have shared with me that they put their dreams of having an events business on hold for an indefinite period of time because they put family first.” (05:38-05:50 | May)

• “In life you will always have obligations to somebody or something, but there should never be a competition. Because if you have learned how to manage your thinking, your emotions, that means everything on your schedule has its allotted time.” (07:12-07:40 | May)

• “If your perception of how you split your time is unfair, then something has to change.” (08:56-09:00 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Perception is Everything

Thu, 18 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When it comes to the content that you post online, you want every potential client to gain a positive perspective of you and your services. To appeal to high-end customers, you must consider the context of your content. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the importance of perception, and how to create an impression that will attract the right customers.

A picture can indeed paint a thousand words, especially online. So when it comes to your online image, May explains that you want to create a perception that does two things: show your customers that your services are luxurious, and communicate to them that only you have the expertise and resources to provide them with their dream event. In addition to your pictures and videos, you want to be mindful of the word choice that goes with them. Rather than using phrases like “budget-friendly,” tailor your content to look professional and high-end because you get one chance to make a lasting first impression.

At the end of the day, the market will perceive whatever you want it to perceive so it is important to strengthen the delivery of your message. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about how you can build an online presence that leaves customers with a perception of exceptional events.

Quotes

• “The market will perceive whatever you want it to perceive.” (01:05-01:11 | May)

• “When people are scrolling through their social media and they come across a picture of your work, a perception of value is created.” (02:45-02:56 | May)

• “Pictures can paint a thousand words, but we also have to look at the words that you use. Anything that gives a perception that you will work with any prices, or you are very reasonably priced, will give a perception that a client can bargain with you.” (10:28-11:02 | May)

• “Instead of trying to attract customers by using price as a bait, you're going to want to attract them by evoking their emotions. Show them why they need to work with you by bringing attention to how much time they can save and what exactly the value is that you can bring to them.” (12:14-12:32 | May)

• “You need to create a radiant perception so when people see your work, they know you’re not cheap, but you are worth it because the work that you do is exceptional.” (13:09-13:19 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Does The Market Rate Affect How Much You Should Charge For Your Services?

Thu, 11 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Does the market rate in your area affect how much you should be charging for your services? According to host May Yeo Silvers, answering this question is more complicated than it may seem. In reality, the answer is both yes and no. However, in today’s episode, May warns listeners about the dangers of setting your prices based on the market rate.

Before you make the decision to lower your prices, it is important to understand that in the event planning space, the market rate is largely based on false data. May explains that an estimated 50 to 75% of event planners don’t know how to properly price their services and instead rely on the market rate to set their prices. To get a more accurate idea of what your prices should be, May explains that you must consider other factors such as your operational costs, income goals, and how many hours you are okay with working.

At the end of the day, your business needs a profit to survive so it is important that you are charging accordingly. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a reminder on how to calculate your hourly rate so that you can make a sustainable living without working yourself into burnout.

Quotes

• “There are a lot of event planners out there who don’t have any idea how much to charge.” (03:00-03:05 | May)

• “The market rate is false data unless you are in an environment where everybody knows what they're doing in terms of their business finances, and they are able to come up with a rate that can yield them profit at the end of each year.” (03:44-04:03 | May)

• “Does the market rate actually depict how you should charge? Not really. But it's good to know what is going on, especially if you have been under-charging yourself.” (09:56-10:07 | May)

• “If you want to have a sustainable and thriving business, your income coming in has to be more than your costs going out.” (11:01-11:12 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Power of Desire Combined with Conviction Equals Reality

Thu, 04 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Do you have desires but don’t know how to turn them into reality? According to host May Yeo Silvers, this is a common theme among most adults. In a society that tries to prohibit adults from dreaming, it can be hard to go after what you truly want. But with conviction and inspired action, you can achieve everything you’ve ever wanted and more.

As children, it is easy to go after our desires with full force. But as we grow older, society conditions us to feel guilt, shame, and embarrassment to dream big and ask for more. However, if we can understand what truly drives our desires, we are more likely to take the necessary steps to turn them into our reality.

Without action, our desires will just stay a figment of our imaginations. So tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to hear a client success story and how you too can turn your dreams into success.

Quotes

• “If you really want something, and you're convinced that ‘something’ is the only thing you want, you will take inspired actions to make it a reality.”

• “It all starts with your desires and what you want. And then they are fueled by the conviction of why you want it. And then you will take inspired actions and do activities that are aligned with you reaching the fulfillment of that desire. And then, it becomes your reality.” (02:22-02:49 | May)

• “Unfortunately, we have been conditioned as adults not to be dreamers.” (09:48-09:55 | May)

• “The power of desire combined with conviction equals your reality.” (18:38-18:42 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Questions to Ask Yourself Before You Decide to Become an Entrepreneur

Thu, 28 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Even though most businesses fail within the first few years, many people still fantasize about the idea of becoming an entrepreneur. They dream of owning their own business, making as much money as they want, and living a lifestyle that is determined 100% by them. While entrepreneurship can be a path to personal freedom, it isn’t for the faint of heart. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the important questions anyone needs to ask themselves before they make the decision to start their own business.

Whether you want to exit the corporate world, or you have an idea you’ve been dying to share with the market, you must first determine whether or not entrepreneurship is for you. Before jumping head first into your business, you need to come to terms with the fact that owning a business comes with a lot of sacrifice. While you may see entrepreneurs boast about their luxury lifestyles, May explains that doesn’t happen overnight. So you really need to ask yourself if you are comfortable sacrificing your personal time, money, and resources to make your business a success. In addition, there are certain characteristics that all successful entrepreneurs exhibit. Do you have the grit to forfeit a regular paycheck? Are you okay with taking risks even if the outcome is negative? If you answer no to any of these questions, entrepreneurship may not be the path for you.

Above all else, every entrepreneur needs to know their “why” because that is what will motivate you to success. By taking some time to ask yourself these essential questions, you can clarify your decision about opening a business and potentially save yourself a lot of time, money, and heartache.

Quotes

• “The survival rate of a new business is very short-term if you do not spend some time soul searching, deep thinking, and questioning of why you want to have the business in the first place.” (01:45-02:03 | May)

• “To really understand the end goal of having your own business, you need to ask yourself what does it mean to have your own business?” (04:50-04:56 | May)

• “You see many photos on Instagram, Facebook or Tik Tok of people sipping their pina coladas, by the beach, flying first class, going into exotic venues for vacations. But that does not happen overnight. Before they are drinking the pina colada, they are drinking a lot of coffee for those late nights. They need to work those hours to make that money in order to live that desired lifestyle.” (07:56-08:35 | May)

• "What do I mean by the attitude of a business owner? That means you are willing to take risks with no guaranteed results. If you want guaranteed results, that means you want a guaranteed paycheck. Which means you should go work for someone and not yourself.” (11:24-11:38 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Discipline in Your Business Comes From the Discipline in Your Personal Life

Thu, 21 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0300

As a business owner, discipline in your personal life transcends into your business. Although many believe these two worlds should be separate, they often intermingle. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how discipline personally and professionally connects and how to ensure that you are consistent enough to succeed.

According to May, having the discipline to eat well, exercise, and perform other healthy habits daily will lead to your physical and mental well-being. If you can have a consistent routine in your personal life, you will have the ability to have discipline towards your business. Ultimately, if you commit to every area of your life, you will be able to have a stronger mindset to work past your obstacles and get to your desired results.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of discipline, the benefits of routine, and how everything difficult can get easier over time.

Quotes

• “How you think and react is going to transcend to the different decisions and scenarios that you will face in your business.” (1:38-1:48 | May)

• “The discipline to do it every day depends on how important you think it is for you.” (6:03-6:10 | May)

• “How you do one thing is how you do everything. And I'm a firm believer in that.” (13:48-13:53 | May)

• “The discipline of your mind is going to depict the discipline of your actions. Which is going to shape your routines and habits.” (16:44-16:59 | May)

• “If you take a look at very successful CEOs, very successful business owners, they all have one thing in common. They have discipline.” (18:29-18:37 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Vacation Blues of Small Business Owners

Thu, 14 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Whether you’re an event planner or a small business owner, vacations can bring out a lot of workplace anxiety. After spending a much-needed vacation visiting friends and family in Singapore, host May Yeo Silvers couldn’t help but feel these vacation blues herself. In today’s episode, May discusses how entrepreneurs can go in and out of vacation mode in a way that is good for them, their loved ones, and their businesses.

According to May, business owners need to know that their businesses will not disappear overnight when they take a vacation. But once you get over your work anxiety and into vacation mode, it’s essential to know when you need to switch back and focus on your work. Ultimately, entrepreneurs need to develop balance in their lives to be stronger leaders for their businesses to thrive.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about small business owners’ vacation blues, switching off your work engine, and why everyone needs balance to succeed.

Quotes

• “I know that I couldn't be a 100% stay-at-home mom. I need to have something that I can call my own.” (6:48-6:54 | May)

• “In reality, for your business to thrive, you need to eat, sleep, breathe,and think about your business. But there has to be a balance.” (7:45-7:56 | May)

• “You need to go away to take good care of yourself so that you can come back as a stronger human being mentally and emotionally and serve everyone better, including yourself.” (8:26-8:38 | May)

• “Business is not either you go full force, or nothing. There needs to be a good balance of taking care of yourself and going full force.” (10:54-11:04 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Biggest Obstacle to Achieving Success in Your Business

Thu, 07 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0300

As event planners, taking as many classes as possible may seem necessary to expand your business. However, May has not seen the constant student mentality pay off for many industry professionals. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how not to let your continuous searching for the answers hinder your success.

According to May, there’s always a reason you can give yourself for why you’re not more successful. Whether you think you don’t have the education, money, or resources, you always have the power to improve. Instead of constantly learning, May tells her listeners to apply their knowledge and allow themselves the opportunity to grow.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the biggest obstacles to your success, learning vs. application, and how you are your biggest asset.

Quotes

• “What’s more important than learning is the constant mode of applying what you have learned and evaluating your results after applying what you have learned.” (3:13-3:28 | May)

• “Perfection only comes when you refine yourself with what you have learned and constantly audit your progress to see how you can be better.” (10:49-11:00 | May)

• “Don't let anyone tell you you're not good enough. The skills and the techniques you can learn, those are your arsenals. But your biggest arsenal is you.” (11:32-11:43 | May)

• “Stop being in your own way. Stop being so hard on yourself. We all start from the same point.” 14:58-15:09 | May)

• “Entrepreneurship is not for everyone. That's why there's only 1% making the money that the other 99% are trying to make.” (18:35-18:42 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Don’t Expect Other People to Understand or Live Up to Your Expectations

Thu, 30 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0300

If you’re an event planner, it may be frustrating when your clients don’t share your vision. However, the best event planners understand that their job is to listen to their clients’ needs. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to not expect others to live up to your expectations.

According to May, it is the event planner’s duty to elevate an event, but not at the cost of your clients’ wishes. Although you may want to make an event look as beautiful as possible, it’s important to understand that other people may have a different idea of what an amazing event needs. Instead of ignoring your client’s wants in favor of your own, May tells the listeners to not force feed their vision onto anyone, but rather respect people’s individual priorities.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about managing your expectations, why event planners have higher standards, and how to accept that not everybody wants what you want.

Quotes

• “We get so excited that all we care about is the vision in our head, and we stop paying attention to what the client really wants.” (4:19-4:28) May)

• “The best event planner is an event planner who truly understands your clients’ priorities and vision. Your job is to inspire them and elevate the event. But your most important job is to listen to your clients’ needs and really understand what they really want.” (9:19-9:39) May)

• “I can't force feed people what my version of a best life is. I need to tell myself that not everybody wants what I want.” (12:06-12:17) May)

• “We don't know what is the best for anyone. So as a service provider, all we can do is to pay close attention to what each client’s wants, needs, and priorities are.” (13:42-13:55) May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Deal with Disgruntled Customers

Thu, 23 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When it comes to running a business, handling unhappy customers is part of the job. Even though it can be intimidating, there are ways you can find winning solutions. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to properly handle disgruntled customers.

According to May, the top two reasons why customers become frustrated is due to miscommunication or false expectations. Rather than letting your emotions get the best of you, May tells listeners to remain calm and neutral. When we let our emotions lead the way, we often become defensive and end up not solving the problem at all. To avoid further conflict, it is important to use both empathy and factual information when talking with your customers.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of listening, empathy, and stating the facts so that you can handle any problem that arises with your customers.

Quotes

• “When you're dealing with somebody who is openly expressing to you that they're unhappy about certain things, you should be so thankful that they're actually sharing it with you instead of going behind your back and writing a bad review.” (03:25-03:41 | May)

• “When a customer is upset, there is something that is not working to their satisfaction. Therefore they are unhappy. So your role is to find out what exactly is happening in their mind.” (04:52-05:08 | May)

• “When you let emotions come out, you become very subjective and you tend to defend rather than solve the problem.” (05:27-05:35 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is Your Company Structure a Sustainable One?

Thu, 16 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Have you structured your business to run efficiently if you needed time to step away? According to host May Yeo Silvers, if you’re answer is no, you really need to reconsider how you run your business. In today’s episode, May discusses the importance of structuring your business for sustainable success.

It wasn’t until May came down with COVID that she realized she had set her company up for long-term success. With years of consistency, showing up for her clients, and training a competent staff, when May needed to take time to recover from her illness it did not negatively impact her business in the slightest. At the end of the day, the best way to ensure success in your company is to structure it to run independently of you.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the impact of COVID on May’s business, the importance of consistency, and why it is so important to structure your business in a way that isn't solely dependent on you.

Quotes

• “Because of how I've shown up day in and day out for my business every single Wednesday without fail, when I had to cancel or pivot to stream a podcast, I didn't get any heat from anyone.” (10:14-10:43 | May)

• “I was so happy that people were so understanding and that my team members were able to step up and take over coaching and client fulfillment. I knew then that I have built a business that is self-reliant.” (11:36-11:56 | May)

• “It took COVID for me to applaud myself for structuring my business in a way that I don't have to worry whether or not I am here.” (13:27-13:39 | May)

• “Your people have to understand your vision and how to execute that vision. That's how you're able to scale.” (15:00-15:07 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do I Change How I Charge My Fee for Different Event Services?

Thu, 09 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0300

In episode 8,, host May Yeo Silvers taught listeners how to appropriately price their hourly rate. But many people still beg the question: should I change how I charge for different event services? In today’s episode, May answers this commonly asked question.

Whether you are an event planner, lawyer, photographer, or any other type of business owner, the best way to charge for your services is to figure out your hourly rate. If you plan to travel for an event, you will still charge your hourly rate. The only difference is that you would ask your clients to reimburse you for any additional money you have to spend to get there. At the end of the day no matter the type of service you are providing whether it be full service, partial service, or decorating, your hourly rate should account for any type of work you may have to do

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the difference between fees and expenses and why sticking to your hourly rate is the best way to charge your clients, regardless of the type of event.

Quotes

• “If you really have the passion and belief that what you do is going to make a difference in someone's life or event, you will show up for your business no matter how you feel.” (02:26-02:38)

• “Knowing your hourly rate is fundamental to how you should charge for all kinds of services.” (05:39-05:44)

• “You always use the same fundamental principle to charge for any type of events services you're providing.” (05:54-06:02)

• “A destination event is no different than a regular event. The only difference is you probably have to travel but the planning is still the same.” (09:36-09:48)

• “Expenses are expenses. Your fees are your fees. Expenses are not a profit, they are an expense that needs to be reimbursed.” (11:04-11:10)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Danger of ”Normalizing” Success

Thu, 02 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When it comes to running a business, our society has normalized the concept of failure and glamorized the idea of success. While it is important to celebrate our success, there are many dangers in normalizing it too much. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses why normalizing success is just as dangerous as normalizing failure.

According to May, when we normalize our success we run the risk of becoming too content in our business and slowing down our progress. Rather than expecting success at every corner, it is important for every entrepreneur to understand that success will come and go. May explains that when we focus solely on success, we forget about how far we have come since the beginning. Even though success does feel good, it is never worth beating yourself up over when the “success” wasn’t what you expected.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of celebrating your wins–no matter their size, being grateful to your progress, and how normalizing success can negatively affect your business.

Quotes

• “The danger of normalizing success is just as dangerous as normalizing failure.” (02:31-02:40 | May)

• “Normalizing success means you are so used to success, that when you're not getting success, you think that you are a failure.” (03:02-03:09 | May)

• “When you get to a point that you're cruising and you're so used to success, sometimes you tend to not expand yourself or evolve as much as you should.” (06:24-06:36 | May)

• “Sometimes in business, things don't always go up. Sometimes it's like a wave. It will go up and then it will sometimes come down.” (09:53-09:59 | May)

• “It is not a negative thing to normalize success. But it is a negative thing if you beat yourself up when success does not repeat itself the way you want it to.” (12:42-12:54 | May)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Do You Need to Have a Certification to Have an Events Business?

Thu, 26 May 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Thinking you need to have a certification to have an events business is one of the biggest rookie mistakes you can make. In the decade that host May Yeo Silvers has been in the events industry, not once has she ever been asked if she is certified. In today’s episode, May answers the question: do you need to have a certification to own an event planning business?

According to May, having a certification can help you further your career, but it is not always necessary. If you plan to work at a large company that focuses solely on weddings or corporate events, having some sort of higher education may be beneficial. But if you’re like May, and you desire to be an eventreprenuer, there are many other things that play a role in your success aside from obtaining a certification.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the important skills you need to be a successful event planner.

Quotes

• “I have been in the events industry for over 20 years, and have owned my event planning company for over 10 years. Not once have I ever been asked by a potential client if I'm certified as an event planner.” (01:55:02:14)

• “All I know about event planning is through my hands-on experience.” (03:36-03:38)

• “If you want to start your own event planning business, do you need to have certification? No, not at all.” (07:02-07:07)

• “The most important skills in growing a thriving business are understanding how to structure your business in the most effective manner. Understanding your worth. Understanding how much to charge. Understanding how to market yourself so that you are reaching your target audience. And also understanding the art of sales.”

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Talk About Rookie Mistakes with Veteran Wedding Planner Renee Dalo

Thu, 19 May 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When you first start a business, there is no doubt you are going to make mistakes along the way. However, there are certain things you can look out for. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers shares her guest appearance on The Talk with Renee Dalo, another seasoned event planner, to discuss common mistakes new event planners make.

According to May, the first mistake she made was not understanding her numbers. While she had two clients off the bat, she spent all her time planning for them, and not planning for her future. It wasn’t until she completed both of those events, that she realized by not continuously growing her pipeline, she could not afford to do event planning full time. At the end of the day, starting a business is not easy. But with the right knowledge and mindset, you will evolve into the event planner you were meant to be.

Tune into this week’s episode of the The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to hear host May guest star on Renee Dalo’s podcast. Learn more about the importance of knowing your numbers, advertising your business, and having a positive attitude so that you can prevent yourself from making common rookie mistakes.

Quotes

• “I let the fear of not making money freak me out, and I went to look for a job.” (12:08-12:13)

• “If you have a more than 40% booking rate, look at your pricing.” (20:16-20:19)

• “If you don't market your business, clients can’t can't find you. And if they can’t find you, they can't pay you.” (21:49-21:55)

• “If you don't have a positive mindset for your business, it's going to be hard to be successful.” (26:33-26:37)

• “When you're growing your business, you have to first evolve before your business will evolve. And in order for you to evolve, something has to be put out there to get feedback.” (28:00-28:15)

• “Another rookie mistake is thinking that you need a lot of things to start your business.” (31:29-31:33)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should You Educate Your Potential Clients On How Much Things Cost?

Thu, 12 May 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Do you find that most potential clients have champagne tastes on a beer budget? According to host May Yeo Silvers, this is because most people don’t know how much things really cost! In today’s episode, May shares tips on how to have tactful conversations with clients about the reality of cost.

While it is important to be honest with your clients about how much things cost, you have to be careful in your approach. If they come to you with high hopes of what they want, but you only focus on cost, you might end up crushing their dreams. Rather than approaching them as a teacher, you need to focus on being more of a consultant. When you can exercise a level of compassion, you are more likely to find a solution that makes both you and your clients happy.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of showing empathy and asking the right questions so you can better educate your clients and deliver events that fit both their budget and vision.

Quotes

• “Potential clients have no idea how much things cost. This is why they have champagne tastes and beer budgets.” (01:14-01:23)

• “In a sales conversation, your job is to be a consultant.” (04:58-05:02)

• “You have to exercise some compassion and empathy when you share how much things costs.” (05:37-05:42)

• “Your clients are not event planners. It is not their responsibility to know how much things cost. It is your responsibility to find a solution and deliver an event that they want that also goes with their budget.” (06:04-06:20)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How Having an Email Campaign Can Help Your Business

Thu, 05 May 2022 06:00:00 -0300

With all of the networking that you are doing for your business, it is important to keep your network engaged with relevant content. While not everyone will be interested in the same content, there is an easy way to target specific groups of people. According to host May Yeo Silvers, creating an email campaign is one of the best tools you can use to help your business grow.

While social media marketing is one of the most effective ways to market your business, only 5% of your followers will see your content. When you are growing your business, it is critical that you are reaching as many people as you can. One of the easiest ways to achieve this is through email marketing. May explains that by consistently sending emails with good content to your targeted audience, it will help you increase your brand visibility, convert more buy-later people, and increase your overall sales.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the purpose of email campaigns and how to build an email list that help grow your business.

Quotes

• “Particular groups of people require different types of content.” (02:12-02:16)

• “An email campaign is a software that you use where you can send out emails automatically. You first draft the content of the email, and then you direct the software on who to send this content to.” (02:34-02:58)

• “Email campaign is a sales activity that require the least amount of your time.” (03:48-03:52)

• “Your email becomes like a search engine optimization, where you tell the people that you're sending the email to where you want them to go to.” (08:00-08:09)

• “Another purpose of email campaign is to continue nurturing your buy-later people.” (11:14-11:18)

• “Facebook and Instagram show only 5% of your followers what you post. So we need to catch them from different avenues, and email is one of them.” (12:15-12:25)

Links:

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Turn a Cold Lead Into a Buyer

Thu, 28 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0300

Do you struggle to turn your leads into business? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers gives listeners a step-by-step plan on how to convert cold leads into paying customers.

According to May, the most important thing to know about sales is that it is a long game, so it is important to strategically approach your potential buyers. The best way to do this is by scouting social media for clients you’d like to work with, and slowly begin to engage with them. Find out what they like, what they need, and how you can answer questions and provide solutions to their problems. Once they have started to engage back, you will know it is time to offer your services.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of utilizing social media to identify your ideal clients so you can build your network and gradually turn leads into real business.

Quotes

• “Turning a cold lead into a buyer is a long game. There are cycles of buying. There’s the buy-now people and there’s the buy-later people.” (01:01-01:13)

• “When it comes to building your sales pipeline, you cannot go in so hot on the first try. You need to warm people up and play it slow.” (08:02-08:15)

• “If a potential client hasn’t shown any form of engagement, then don’t ask them to get on a call with you when you send them a DM because they’re still on the fence.” (17:30-17:37)

• “It can take up to two months to get someone to get on a call with you. But you know that when they do, they are no longer cold…they're actually quite warm.” (19:23-19:35)

• “At the end of the day, business is really not that complex. It's about showing up, loving what you do, and then the people will come.” (23:16-23:26)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Making Your Potential Client Feel Safe To Invest In You

Thu, 21 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0300

“Whether you are selling a product or a service, people buy from someone who they know, like, and trust,” says host May Yeo Silvers. In today’s episode, May shares tips on how to help your potential clients feel safe investing their time and money into you.

When a cold lead buys a service, they are entrusting their money with someone that they don’t even know. While this can be a scary and uncertain decision, there are ways you can make potential clients feel better about their decision. According to May, the most important thing to do is be empathetic. Whether that be sharing a past client's experience, or finding a way to personally relate to them, you need to place yourself in their shoes. Once you understand where they are coming from, you will be able to close sales calls more effectively.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn how to build a know, like, and trust relationship with your potential clients so they feel safe investing in you.

Quotes

• “Whether you are selling a product or a service, people buy from someone who they know, like, and trust.” (01:21-01:31)

• “When you're buying a service, you're actually entrusting your hard-earned money on someone that you don't really even know.” (02:07-02:16)

• “At the end of a sales conversation, your goal is to make the other person feel comfortable and safe to buy from you.” (04:06-04:16)

• “Testimonials are great, but if you don't understand the decision-making journey that your potential buyer is battling with, you will not be able to easily close the sale.” (16:43-17:00)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

So You Want To Be A Venue Owner?

Thu, 14 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0300

As the previous events director at luxury five-star hotels, host May Yeo Silvers knows the ins and outs of running a venue. In today’s episode, she shares her wisdom with listeners who aspire to one day own a venue of their own.

According to May, before you decide to buy a venue it is first important to be well versed in the event planning industry. Not only do you need to understand what it takes to run a successful event, but you need to be competent in understanding your costs. If you want to own a venue, the best thing to do is spend two to five years building your network within the industry. So that when the time comes for you to open your doors, you will already have your network of partners in the events field and clients lined up wanting to use your venue.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for an in-depth discussion about what it takes to own an event venue. Learn more about the importance of understanding your costs, location, and networking with industry professionals.

Quotes

• “There are two ways to own a venue. Either you take over a venue that's an already existing facility or you build something from scratch.” (02:35-02:51)

• “If you’re using any space within the venue that does not directly bring in revenue, that means you are cutting back the amount of space you can actually sell.” (10:02-10:11)

• “You definitely want to make sure that your venue fee is priced at a level that supports the law of demand and supply.” (14:41-14:50)

• “Your overhead is going to determine how much you need to charge at least to break even and not lose money. Then you want to look at what the market is charging plus several other factors, like seasonality, to decide how much you want to charge.” (17:37-17:50)

• “Owning a venue is a great idea when you already understand how the events industry works.” (22:24-22:30)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Are You Building a Lifestyle Business?

Thu, 07 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0300

“What is the point of having your own business when it's like having a job?” asks host May Yeo Silvers. In today’s episode, May discusses ways you can build your business to fit the lifestyle of your dreams.

According to May, the best way to build a business that supports your desired lifestyle is to set financial goals that align with your personal goals. If you don’t want to work a million hours a week, you will likely need to raise your fees, hire a staff, and attract high-end clients. At the end of the day, if you don’t operate a sustainable business, then there really isn’t a reason to own a business.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of evaluating your goals, increasing your fees, and building a team so you can align your financial and lifestyle goals and operate a sustainable business.

Quotes

• “A lifestyle business is a business that you can blend into the lifestyle that you're trying to build for yourself and your family.” (01:32-01:44)

• “I built my business to where I can show up to work where I want when I want. I am not restricted to a certain schedule, and I am not restricted to showing up to a particular place at a certain time unless I choose to.’ (03:05-03:26)

• “If you're not charging what you're supposed to charge, you're working all these events, and you're not making the amount of money that you want to make, that's a problem.” (15:11-15:18)

• “When you're building a business, you're building a legacy that needs to be sustainable.” (17:36-17:39)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Can I Be an Event Planner and Event Designer?

Thu, 31 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When it comes to running your business, many event planners wonder whether or not they can both plan and design events. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers answers the question: is it possible to do both event planning and designing and still be successful in your business?

According to May, when you first start your business it is common to wear the hat of both a designer and a planner. However, the busier you get, the easier it will be to focus on what you are best at so it is important to understand which role you prefer. While May does occasionally design events, most of the time she prefers to partner with a designer so she can do what she’s best at… planning!

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a conversation about the differences between the roles of event planners and designers. Learn more about the importance of figuring out where your passion is so that you can operate a business that focuses on your strengths.

Quotes

• “When you first start your event planning, decorating, or designing business, you actually wear all three hats.” (01:17-01:24)

• “In order to be able to design an event, I educate myself by reading on magazines, looking at different pictures of events, or using Pinterest to get inspired so that I am exposing myself to the different types of event setups.” (05:45-06:05)

• “First find out what type of look you like. So when you piece all of them together, the vision of the event is something that you like. Your ideal clients are some verision of you so what your ideal clients like most likely is what you like as well.” (08:18-08:40)

• “Event designers don't make the decorations, centerpieces, or drapes themselves. They find people who are able to pull all the visions together.” (09:58-10:06)

• “It is good to know exactly how you want to grow your business and what your passion is.” (14:10-14:14)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Attract High End Buyers

Thu, 24 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0300

One of the most common issues that many event planners face is finding clients who are willing to pay for their services. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers shares advice on how to attract top-dollar clients.

According to May, you don’t need to be wealthy to sell to wealthy clients, you just need to know how to think like one. Rather than allowing imposter syndrome to inhibit your success, it is important to do work on your insecurities regarding wealth. As soon as you begin to think and act like you’re wealthy, you will attract high-end clientele.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of expanding your wealth consciousness so you can get rid of imposter syndrome, increase your confidence, and start attracting clients with a champagne budget.

Quotes

• “If you have hesitation to hire an event planner for your own events, then you're attracting people who are also hesitant to pay your fees.” (04:22-04:35)

• “What happens when you're in a conversation where you're unsure? The other person can feel that you're unsure and may feel that you may not be as experienced as you say you are. And they probably wouldn't book you.” (12:46-12:58)

• “The very first inner work that I did was find out why I feel less worthy of myself when I'm talking to someone whom I perceive has more money than me or is more successful than me.” (14:52-15:07)

• “In order for me to understand what a high-end buyer wants and how they think, I realized that I need to start behaving and thinking like one.” (15:47-16:03)

• "I started to expand my wealth consciousness by doing things that make me feel like a wealthy woman.” (18:01-18:10)

• “You don't have to be wealthy to sell to wealthy people, but you have to understand what someone with a champagne budget would pay for.” (21:51-22:03)

• “If you want to grow your income, you have to go to people who can pay for your services.” (25:31-25:37)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Should I Offer Packages and Publish Them On My Website?

Thu, 17 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0300

When it comes to putting together prices for services, many event planners opt for packages. While offering a standard price for your services can be beneficial, it can also cost you opportunities and money. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers explains why she believes offering packages isn’t the smartest business decision.

According to May, the main reason why event planners offer packages is because they want to know how to properly price their services. While it can sometimes deter unfit clients, May explains that publishing your prices online comes with many disadvantages like lost opportunities, price objections, and even shortchanging your abilities. To better serve her business and clients, May suggests that every event planner gets familiar with how long it will take to complete a task. Once you understand the value of your time, you can create a customized package for every client.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of logging down your hours, and creating a task cheat sheet so you can effectively quote your clients and create individualized packages based on their desires.

Quotes

• “The main reason why a lot of people want to have packages is because they want to know how to price themselves.” (01:50-01:55)

• “When you are new to the industry, it is important to log down your hours.” (03:59-04:03)

• “When you do a package, you're shortchanging yourself and you're opening doors to have a price objection.” (08:30-08:37)

• “When a potential client sees your website and they look at the price of your package, you are not giving them an opportunity to speak with you.” (09:08-09:17)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How To Stand Out From Competition

Thu, 10 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0400

In a highly saturated market, many new event planners believe they will have to do something extraordinary to stand out from the crowd. While it is necessary to strategize your marketing plans, it is not necessary to overdo it. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses realistic ways you can outshine your competition.

According to May, the threat of competition often leaves event planners feeling like they need to do whatever they can to stand out, even if that means being untrue to themselves. While products and services can be copied, your personality and delivery will always be unique to you. Rather than worrying about trends or how someone else is running their business, May explains that the best way to stand out is to embrace who you are and what your strengths are. By offering services that you love, you allow your true self to shine, and you will naturally attract more business.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of clarity, patience, and leveraging your authenticity so you can create unique ways to attract your desired customers.

Quotes

• “As a consumer who comes to your website, if I don't understand what you're saying, then I won't buy from you.” (03:45-03:54)

• “Don't think that being unique means that you have to use a certain language or you have to position yourself in a fashion that is not commonly understood or perceived by your market.” (04:18-04:35)

• “People buy from people who they think can understand their problem and offer the best solution. So you don't have to try to be unique, you just have to be who you are.” (05:55-06:10)

• “Products and the types of services you offer can be copied. But your personality and how you deliver your services cannot be copied, so you are already unique by default.” (07:40-07:57)

• “The faster you are able to embrace who you are, what you like to do, and the people that you'd like to work with, the faster you can stand out in the market.” (08:00-08:10)

• “If the uniqueness is not part of who you are and it doesn't resonate with you, then there will be no longevity and you're going to phase out.” (08:18-08:25)

• “Marketing yourself is a long game. The reason why a lot of event planners don't last more than three years in the business is that there is no consistency. And whatever they're doing, they're just following the trend, and by doing that, they're not honoring their true self.” (08:41-09:09)

• “Where do you get the most enjoyment out of what you do? That's your passion, that's your strength, and that's how you're going to stand out.” (15:01-15:08)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Use Social Media to Grow Your Business

Thu, 03 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0400

In today’s digital age, almost everyone is on social media. Even though social media platforms are highly saturated with entrepreneurs trying to market themselves, there are ways you can stand out. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses ways to leverage social media and grow your business.

According to May, the three main reasons why people go on social media are to be entertained, educated, and inspired. To attract more clients, it is important to first understand who your audience is and which platforms they use. Once you know how to reach them, you can set up a regular schedule to provide relevant content that authentically expresses you and your business. In truth, social media is a long game but with consistency, you will see incredible results.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about how identifying your target audience, putting in consistent effort, and sticking to your objective are the keys to running a social media presence that successfully generates new business.

Quotes

• “The reason why people are on social media is that they want to be entertained, educated, and inspired.” (04:20-04:30)

• “Among all of your followers on social media, about less than 3% are the ‘buy now people.’”. (06:16-06:25)

• “Social media is a long game. You need to continuously show up on your social media so that people know that you're still in business and you provide different types of services.” (06:40-06:52)

• “After you have exhausted the 3% of the ‘buy now,’ continuing to show up and provide content that's educational, inspiring, and entertaining will slowly convert those ‘buy later customers’ into ‘buy now customers.’” (07:47-07:16)

• “You have to identify if your target audience is hanging out at the platform that you're showing up on.” (09:32-09:36)

• “If your visibility online doesn't relate to what exactly you do, who you are, and how you can help people, what is the point?” (10:35-10:42)

• “You want to assert your authority in your digital platform because it shows that you know what you're doing.” (13:51-13:58)

• “When you run out of ideas for content, you’re thinking about what you want to talk about instead of thinking what your audience wants to hear.” (16:13-16:22)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Why Are My Leads Ghosting Me?

Thu, 24 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0400

As an entrepreneur, one of your main responsibilities is to generate new business. Even though you may speak to a lot of people, not everyone will convert into a sale. While it may be frustrating to lose a potential opportunity, it isn’t something to feel bad about. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses a few reasons why your leads may be ghosting you.

According to May, the main reason why leads drop off is that you are unable to provide them with what they are looking for. To increase your conversion rate, it is important to follow up. Whether it be text, calls, or emails, it is your responsibility to reach out and make sure that the prospect clearly understands your proposal. When you are on the same page, they are more likely to work with you. But at the end of the day, sometimes the lead isn’t your ideal client, and that’s okay! It’s just not meant to be.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of following up, having a clear proposal and better qualifying your leads so you can convert more inquiries into paying customers.

Quotes

• “Don't waste your energy on thinking that you lost a sale. You didn't lose the sale, you just didn't close the sale.” (02:03-02:10)

• “One of the fundamental rules about sending a proposal is after you send it, you need to make sure that you call, text, email, or whatever you need to do to make sure that they receive your proposal.” (03:45-03:57)

• “It's your responsibility to follow up on them, it's not their responsibility to get back to you.” (04:22-04:28)

• “A lot of times ghosting only happens when you are not giving them what they are looking for.” (08:14-08:23)

• “I cannot stress how important it is that you learn how to qualify your leads. Because if you don't qualify your leads properly, it is expected that they will ghost you.” (10:20-10:34)

• “Before you send the proposal, you better make sure that they know your fees.” (12:45-12:52)

• “Follow up until you get a no.” (14:58-15:00)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Attract Your Ideal Client

Thu, 17 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0400

When it comes to running an event planning business, many new entrepreneurs will take any business they can get. While it is important to have opportunities to work, the best way to generate recurring business is to work for the right people. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers offers strategies that will help you attract the perfect customer.

To begin finding the right client, May explains you must look within yourself because your ideal client will be some version of you. It is important to ask yourself what kinds of events you want to plan, where they take place, and who is paying for them. Staying true to yourself, and your goals will not only attract the right people, but it will also repel those who don’t appreciate who you are and what you have to offer.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of self-awareness, establishing relationships with vendors, and engaging in social media so you can position yourself to reach clients that will bring you the business that you love.

Quotes

• “Your ideal client is some version of you.” (02:09-02:13)

• “If you're going to plan an event, you want to be planning an event that you actually enjoy planning.” (03:08-03:16)

• “When they are building their business, they fall into the trap of money scarcity and believe they must close every single lead, even when the lead is not the ideal client.” (05:33-05:44)

• “Stay true to who you are because you will start attracting people who you want to work with and what you'd like to do.” (06:22-06:30)

• “Create rapport and relationship with venues you like so that they can refer the leads to you.” (10:40-10:45)

• “When you're planning an event for a client who's your ideal client, you better make sure you show up like a CEO.” (15:13-15:20)

• “Market yourself at the events where your ideal clients are.” (16:13-16:17)

• “It is not only important to attract your ideal client, but it's equally important to repel the people you don't want to work with.” (18:42-18:49)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How Your Relationship with Money Can Affect the Growth of Your Business

Thu, 10 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0400

How do you feel about money? For most people, their relationship with money begins as a child. When host May Yeo Silvers was growing up, she believed that money was scarce. While her relationship with money initially got off to a rocky start, May had to restructure her past beliefs to achieve success in her business now. In today’s episode, May discusses how your relationship with money can affect the growth of your business.

Adopting the mindset that money is scarce will only negatively affect your performance as an entrepreneur. According to May, if you adopt that mindset, you will become desperate to close every deal, more inclined to offer discounts, and too afraid to invest back into your business. To overcome your scarcity mindset about money, you must first understand your relationship with money and then work to reframe your mindset. May explains that money loves speed and time, and when you believe in yourself and invest in your business, you can get back time, speed up your growth, and allow the money to flow.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for an honest conversation about money. Learn more about where your relationship with money currently stands and how to overcome any limiting beliefs, so you can change your mindset and grow your business to be a financial success.

Quotes

• “Instead of spending two weeks trying to figure out how to run the website, I hired someone to do it and I immediately saw the return.” (08:36-08:48)

• “When you are in the mindset that you must close every deal because you think that money doesn't grow on trees, it’s going to be very damaging to your business because you'll be working with people that you really don't want to work with.” (11:34-11:52)

• “If you don't understand your relationship with money, you will never understand what is blocking you from growing your business.” (12:32-12:40)

• “Money loves speed. If you're able to get back time, you're able to speed up the growth of your business, and when you have speed, money comes.” (15:33-15:43)

• “If you don't invest in your business, you won't have the money.” (17:07-17:11)

• “The most successful people in business are those who are always willing to move forward in faith.” (18:11-18:19)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Reach Your Income Goal

Thu, 03 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0400

Do you want to make more money in 2022 without working more hours? According to host May Yeo Silvers, this is more attainable than it sounds. In today’s episode, May discusses easy ways to reach your income goals.

First and foremost, you must ask yourself why you want to make more money. When you understand your motivations, you are less likely to give up on your goals. After you have a clear understanding of your financial goals, you can take action to achieve them. According to May, the best ways to increase your revenue include increasing your prices, having brand awareness, and hiring salespeople. While all of these methods are effective, the quickest way to generate more revenue is by increasing your prices. Even though asking for more money is intimidating, it doesn’t need to be done overnight. The best option is to frequently increase your prices in small increments. With this business model, eventually, you will be able to double your income in half the time.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of raising your fees, expanding your reach, and building a dream team to increase your sales and make more money.

Quotes

• “I'm not talking about how to increase your income goal if you are an employee. I'm talking about how to increase your income goal when you are a business owner.” (01:10-01:18)

• “You have to ask yourself why do you want to make this money? You better come up with a good reason because if you don't have a good reason then you will give up very easily in the journey of pursuing that goal.” (02:23-02:34)

• “Don't raise your fee so quickly. Raise it little by little, but raise it frequently.” (06:36-06:41)

• “Constantly feeding your funnel with new leads is so so so important.” (08:03-08:07)

• “You should constantly be training and recruiting salespeople.” (10:14-10:17)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

CEO Mindset vs Employee Mindset

Thu, 27 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0400

When people think of running a business, they dream of making a lot of money, traveling the world, and working less. According to host May Yeo Silvers, this is known as the CEO mindset. While it is entirely possible to achieve this lifestyle, there are many things an entrepreneur must do before they get to that place. In today’s episode, May discusses the distinction between a CEO mindset and an employee mindset.

According to May, the first step to running a successful company is letting go of your employee mindset. To do this, May explains that you need to focus on investing in your business and be willing to always take that extra step. In reality, being a CEO comes with many more risks than being an employee. As a CEO, you are responsible for the outcome of every decision you make. So when deciding whether or not you want to open a business, it is important to first understand what it means to be a CEO.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the difference between a business owner and a CEO, the importance of investing in your business, and how to use your ‘why’ to transform you from an employee into a powerful and successful CEO.

Quotes

• “When you own a business and you know how to run your business, your business is profitable, and your business can run without you, you certainly can enjoy the fruits of your labor where you make a lot of money and work very little.” (05:01-05:13)

• “As a CEO, you are the only person. You have to make all of the decisions and you have to go figure things out.” (07:32-07:39)

• “In order for your business or your side hustle to become a full-time job, you have got to stop thinking like an employee.” (12:54-13:00)

• “A CEO is up for challenges. A CEO loves the potential for great results and they're not afraid to fail.” (15:58-16:08)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Be More Productive by Doing Less

Thu, 20 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0400

For most people, a productive day looks like checking off all the items on your to-do list. And while it is certainly important to get things done, host May Yeo Silvers explains that successful people don’t have to-do lists, they have success lists. In today’s episode, May discusses how to be productive by doing less.

According to May, the most valuable thing for every entrepreneur is time. Rather than spending your days completing a bunch of meaningless tasks, it is important to focus only on the things that are going to make the biggest impact. Start by creating a list of must-do things that nourish you mentally and physically, and then put them into your calendar so they become a part of your routine. When we delegate our time to things that move our success needle forward, we have more time to run the business of our dreams!

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn how to create a priority list that automates, delegates, and deletes tasks so you can build a successful six-figure business in less time.

Quotes

• “On my success list, I also block out time for my family.” (06:12-06:15)

• “My success needle is whatever actions that I'm taking are going to bring me the biggest return on investment.” (07:50-08:00)

• “It's not about doing a lot more to be more productive, it's about doing a lot less.” (09:16-09:20)

• “You have to strategize in terms of using your time and also understanding what should go on your success list.” (15:15-15:25)

• “To function at a high level of capacity requires a lot of focus, commitment, dedication, and discipline.” (17:43-17:48)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Number 1 Sabotage in Achieving Your Goals

Thu, 13 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0400

With 2022 in full swing, many of you already have established your goals for the year. While the beginning of the year always feels motivating, it can be easy to fall off of the right path within a few months. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to avoid the number one thing that sabotages people from achieving their goals.

According to May, the number one thing that inhibits a person from achieving their goals is comparison. While it can be easy to notice what others are doing, May explains that comparing your journey to others is pointless. In fact, the only person you should measure yourself against is you. By remaining patient and focused on yourself, you can open the doors to progress and growth.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a conversation about the negative impacts of comparison. Learn more about the importance of patience and measuring your progress so you can stay focused on achieving your goals.

Quotes

• “The number one way to sabotage is comparing yourself to another person.” (05:09-05:13)

• “If you can stay focused, put on your blinders, not look at what other people are doing, and instead focus on yourself and measure against your progress, that's how you can avoid sabotaging your progress.” (05:43-05:59)

• “You want to measure yourself against yourself. You don't want to measure yourself against other people.” (06:01-06:05)

• “If you do more than yesterday, you're already progressing. If you have learned from what you have done yesterday, you're already progressing. But if you don't do anything, and you just freeze, there's no growth and that can happen when you start looking at other people's progress.” (09:42-10:00)

• “Tomorrow's success will look very different from today's success.” (15:31-15:34)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Stay on Course to Achieve Your 2022 Vision

Thu, 06 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0400

As the new year begins, everyone is feeling energized and motivated to crush their goals. While this time can be used to set the tone for the rest of the year, many people tend to fall off the wagon after a few months when they don’t see the immediate transformation or results. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to stay on course and achieve your goals in 2022.

When it comes to setting goals for the new year, it is important to spend time vision casting. Understanding how you would feel if you succeeded or failed allows for you to ignite emotion within yourself; and according to May, our emotions are what drives our actions. In addition, it is equally important to celebrate any action you take towards accomplishing your goals. When we feel inspired by ourselves, we not only feel more confident, but we also begin to take bigger actions towards achieving what we desire.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of vision casting, reevaluating your priorities, and celebrating your actions, so you can crush your goals and turn your vision into a reality in 2022 and beyond.

Quotes

• “It's so important that you write all your goals down and not just think in your head because when you think in your head, you will forget.” (04:50-04:56)

• “When you read the things that you wrote down, you will ignite the feelings and emotions inside of you. The emotions are what drive your actions.” (08:37-08:49)

• “Time is the most expensive and precious asset that you have. So why dump more precious resources into a goal that you didn't achieve in 2021 when this goal no longer serves you in 2022? Drop that goal.” (12:00-12:21)

• “I want you to celebrate taking actions because once you take actions and you feel accomplished taking actions, you will take more actions.” (14:21-14:30)

• “When we break down our goals into little baby goals, we're being realistic with the actual results that we can get within a short period of time.” (15:01-15:11)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Make Your Vision Plan for the New Year

Thu, 30 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0400

As the end of the year quickly approaches, it is time to start thinking about what you want to accomplish in 2022. In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to create a successful vision plan for the new year.

Before you begin planning your goals for 2022, May explains the importance of first reflecting on your 2021 successes. Auditing your progress will not only reveal how successful you were, but it also will prevent you from making the same mistakes. Once you have identified your strengths and weaknesses, you can put together an action plan that will generate viable results.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of evaluating your past results, having visual reminders, and knowing your “why,” so you can design your roadmap to success in 2022 and beyond.

Quotes

• “A lot of times people set their goals and their resolutions at the beginning of the year. But you should be thinking about that at the end of the year before you head into the new year.” (01:51-02:05)

• “Before you start doing something new, you should evaluate your past results.” (02:41-02:47)

• “If you don't audit your progress and you do not take the time to see what you have done for your 2021 goals and if you go into 2022 making the same goals, you're going to get the same results.” (03:21-03:38)

• “Clearly write your goals down and put them in an area where you see them every single day to remind yourself.” (14:08-14:19)

• “If you don't know why you want to achieve that vision or that goal, then you will never carry out those action plans.” (15:00-15:11)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How Being Thankful Can Help Your Business and Your Life

Thu, 23 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0400

“When you are thankful, you live in a world of abundance,” says host May Yeo Silvers. As Thanksgiving comes to an end, May can’t help but wonder why we give extra gratitude only once a year instead of every day. In today’s episode, May discusses how being thankful can positively impact the success of your business.

Even though life can get busy, it is always important to slow down and acknowledge everything that you are grateful for. Whether it’s something big or small, May suggests writing some form of a gratitude journal that you can reflect on when things get tough. According to May, implementing a daily practice of gratitude will increase your happiness and make it easier for you to tackle any challenge with grace. Not only will it positively affect your life, but it will also make you a better entrepreneur.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of celebration and how to implement gratitude into your daily routine, so you can maintain an abundant life and prosperous business.

Quotes

• “For me, being thankful and full of gratitude is important, but sometimes we don’t give enough time, attention and energy to it because life gets in the way.” (03:18-03:40)

• “We really need to make an effort to appreciate everything that we have in our life, big or small.” (04:57-05:09)

• “We have the control to minimize the impact of unpleasant things happening, or even eliminate the possibility, if we do our due diligence, especially in business..” (09:26-09:39)

• “Celebration doesn’t just come from financial strength. This means you don’t just celebrate when you get a big client, you celebrate every single thing in your business, especially something you haven’t done before.” (12:03-12:23)

• “Big milestones and financial gains should be broken down into many milestones, so that they are achievable.” (13:45-13:49)

• “You should be thankful and grateful for something in your life every single day.” (15:25-15:32)

• “When you are thankful, you live in a world of abundance.” (16:30-16:36)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How Your Relationship With Money Affects Your Business

Thu, 16 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0400

When it comes to talking finances, people often feel uncomfortable due to their personal relationship with money. While this can be a taboo topic, host May Yeo Silvers explains that it is a crucial part of doing business. In today’s episode, May dives deep into how your relationship with money can and will affect the success of your business.

For many event planners, the motivation to create beautiful events for everyone often overrides the need for financial success. While it is important to be passionate about your craft, money management needs to be a top priority. When you lose focus on financial gains, May explains that you run the risk of losing your business.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a real and raw conversation about money. Learn more about the importance of investing, ways to break the cycle of imposter syndrome, and how to elevate your fiscal consciousness, so you can set your businesses up for financial success.

Quotes

• “Your relationship with money plays an important part in your personal life, your business and your financial wealth.” (01:32-01:44)

• “Do not believe the potential client’s money story. Do not believe what they tell you that they do and do not have the money for.” (08:15-08:26)

• “When you don't believe that you can charge that much, a lot of times it is coming from insecurity about your worthiness and service.” (09:16-09:27)

• “When you tell yourself that it is difficult to earn and ask for money, what happens? You won't ask for the sale.” (13:55-14:02)

• “In business, you have to invest to make more. So you need to have an investment mindset.” (15:25-15:30)

• “When you don't dare to invest, your business will go very slow and sometimes even stagnant.” (15:40-15:48)

• “You need to be intentional about money. You need to tell money what you are going to do with it when it comes.” (20:16-20:24)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Handle Price Objection

Thu, 09 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0400

When it comes to running a business, most event planners struggle the most with discussing money. In today’s episode, May discusses how to properly handle price objections without losing business.

When you take a sales call, the most important thing to do is ask qualifying questions. This not only allows you to get a better understanding of what the client wants, but it also reveals any objections they might have. Rather than being intimidated about discussing money, May tells listeners to be upfront about how much things cost. When the potential client has a realistic idea of the amount they will have to spend, they will be less likely to object to your fees.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of pre-work, educating your clients about cost, and how to implement a strong objection strategy that attracts your target client.

Quotes

• “The more pre-work you do in your discovery call, the probability of you getting a price objection gets lower and lower.” (02:06-02:19)

• “It’s almost impossible to overcome a price objection if you're not talking to your ideal client.” (02:36-02:46)

• “When you're talking to your potential client you should already have an idea of what they want to spend on an event.” (05:52-06:01)

• “We always want to empathize, listen and be inquisitive.” (14:23-14:29)

• “You want the client to tell you how they would feel if they did the event themselves and how they would feel if you worked it for them.” (23:16-23:24)

• “You cannot go into a sales call with a scarcity mindset. If you do, you will not ask the right type of questions because you’re afraid to lose the sale.” (25:22-25:32)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

3 Questions to Ask to Qualify Your Leads

Thu, 02 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0400

Have you ever wondered why your leads aren’t calling you back? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses the three most important questions you need to ask to better qualify and convert your leads into business.

According to May, when a lead doesn’t call you back, it isn’t because you did something wrong. Instead, it is most likely because they are not qualified. Rather than jumping immediately into a conversation about your services, May suggests starting with qualifying questions. This will help you determine whether or not the lead is even worth your time. When asking questions to potential clients, May explains that you need to understand three things: what they need help with, how much effort they’ve put into their research, and how soon they need your services. By gathering this information up front, you will not only save yourself time, but you will also be able to protect the price of your services.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn more about the importance of being assertive and asking the right questions, so you can keep your prices and attract ideal customers.

Quotes

• “Don't waste your time and energy fretting over somebody who's not getting back to you.” (04:39-04:44)

• “A lot of times when a lead ghosts you or doesn’t get back to you, it’s because they may not be a qualified lead.” (04:51-05:04)

• “You want to find out what challenges your potential clients are facing right now when they are planning their events.” (07:07-07:15)

• “If they have mentioned to you that they have already spent time, money, and resources talking to people or doing research themselves, that means they can't do it themselves, and they need help.” (07:56-08:10)

• “It is not usually a price objection, it’s an urgency objection.” (08:54-08:59)

• “You only want to provide a ‘one problem, one solution.’ You don't want to talk about anything more than that because a confused mind says no. If you give them too much information they might have to go back and think about what you just said to them. So keep it very simple.” (11:26-11:43)

• “Don't be afraid to be assertive because the last thing you want to do is waste time talking to a potential client that's not even your ideal client.” (13:44-13:51)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Deal With Imposter Syndrome

Thu, 25 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0400

Do you ever let limiting beliefs get in the way of your success? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses how to overcome imposter syndrome to become the best event planner you can be.

When it comes to dealing with imposter syndrome, the most important thing to do is learn how to love yourself. If you do not love yourself and what you do, you cannot serve others. Rather than comparing yourself to others, focus on what drives your own success. When you are able to let your true personality shine, you will find fulfillment and attract the right customers for you and your business.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ to learn how to let go of what you think success looks like and allow yourself to operate in your own reality, so you can be the unstoppable eventrepreneur you’ve always dreamed of being.

Quotes

• “It is so important to understand who you really are because when you're building a business, you are building a legacy.” (03:26-03:34)

• “You have to start understanding who you truly are, what you really love. You have to embrace yourself and who you want to be, not who you think your clients want you to be.” (04:05-04:19)

• “If you can’t understand who you are or what you love to do, you can't serve other people.” (04:42-04:50)

• “When you're so busy comparing yourself to other people, you're looking back, you're looking left, you're looking right, you forget to look forward for yourself.” (08:08-08:18)

• “Imposter syndrome comes in when you feel that you need to be somebody else.” (12:50-12:53)

• “If you're putting out nurturing content, speaking your truth, and showing your personality, you will attract the right people in your circle.” (14:04-14:12)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

How to Price Your Fees

Thu, 18 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0400

When it comes to starting an event planning business, every eventrepreneur is dying to know the secret to pricing. According to host May Yeo Silvers, the biggest mistake new event planners make is thinking they need to lower their prices to get business. In today’s episode, May breaks down how to calculate a price that makes both you and your clients happy.

The first thing any business owner needs to understand is their monthly cost of operation. While variable costs may fluctuate, May explains that fixed costs are constant regardless of whether or not you have active business. Once you have established how much money you need to run events and stay in business, you can calculate your hourly rate. While you may initially feel guilty asking for more money, honor yourself and never let your hourly rate depreciate. After all, we are here to make a profit.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ for a brief overview of pricing. Learn why you shouldn’t base your fees off of your competitors’ rates, the differences between fixed and variable costs, and how to properly calculate an hourly rate that upholds the value of your business.

Quotes

• “Your operation costs are divided into two categories. One is your fixed cost and the other is your variable cost.” (07:11-07:18)

• “I am an affiliate of HoneyBook because I am an educator and business coach. I get a 50% discount for anyone who uses my link. So, if you haven’t created an account with HoneyBook, you can use my link for 50% off the first year.” (09:43-10:05)

• “Your hourly-rate will change as your business changes.” (12:02-12:05)

• “On average, you should spend 70-80% on sales-generating activities. That could include visiting old clients or talking to potential clients. The rest of the time should be spent on client fulfillment, which is the actual planning itself.” (19:00-19:20)

• “We aren’t in the business to break even; we are in the business to make money.” (20:39-20:41)

• “We never want to depreciate our hourly rate.” (23:49-23:52)

• “I will probably organize a master class just to go over pricing, so you can walk away with a template that goes through the whole calculation again.” (25:06-25:22)

Links

Check out my honeybook affiliate link: http://share.honeybook.com/events4anyone for 50% off the first year.

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is There Really Too Much Competition?

Thu, 11 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0400

According to host May Yeo Silvers, one of the main reasons that many eventrepreneurs get discouraged from entering the market is because they believe there is too much competition. While there are many people who run successful event planning businesses, May explains that the only competition you need to worry about is yourself.

In the event planning business, competition is actually a positive because it proves there is a demand for event planning services. Entering into a market with no competition would require you to be the industry pioneer; and while you would initially get all the business, May explains that competition is always inevitable. That is why there is no reason to become discouraged by the success of others. If you focus on the growth and development of your business, you will see results.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™ to learn how your business can thrive even in an industry full of competitors.

Quotes

• “When there's no competition, it means there's not enough demand.” (01:35-01:40)

• “In the events field, competition is great. There are a lot of people who require event services and that's why there's a lot of people who are providing event services.” (01:50-02:05)

• “You never want to go into a business where there is no competition.” (02:14-02:19)

• “You cannot compare your progress to your competition because everybody is different.” (04:50-04:57)

• “The person who can play the game the longest, provide nurturing content, and constantly be at the forefront of the potential buyer’s mind will be the one who's going to get all the business.” (09:42-09:56)

• “The competition is you, not everybody else.” (10:01-10:04)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Rookie Mistakes to Avoid When Starting Your Business

Thu, 04 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0300

Have you recently started an event planning business and are wondering why you aren’t getting the results you anticipated? In today’s episode, host May Yeo Silvers discusses three rookie mistakes every entrepreneur needs to avoid when starting a business.

First and foremost, it is crucial that you have a strong marketing plan in place, if people can’t find you, they can’t pay you. May tells listeners to put in consistent effort on marketing and find any opportunity to talk about your business. While generating leads should be one of your primary focuses, it is equally as important to understand your numbers. You need to know your prices and how much profit you need to generate in order to stay in business. But above all else, the most important aspect of running any business is having the right mindset. May explains that entrepreneurship can be as easy or as difficult as you want it to be. At the end of the day, it comes down to your perspective and how you choose to approach hardships.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™ to learn what mistakes every new entrepreneur needs to avoid in order to build a successful and profitable event planning business.

Quotes

• “If you're not marketing yourself consistently, how will people find you? They won’t. They don't even know that you have a business. If they can't find you, they can't pay you. It’s that simple.” (02:24-02:40)

• “Whenever there's an opportunity that you can talk about your business, you need to be talking about your business.” (04:05-04:12)

• “Consistent effort equals consistent results. Inconsistent efforts equals inconsistent results. Zero efforts equals zero results.” (05:00-05:10)

• “You want money in your pocket? Then you better start understanding your numbers. You better start understanding how much you need to be charging, how much money you should be bringing in, how much money you should be paying out, and how much profit you have.” (09:34-09:50)

• “The downfall for 99% of the event planners out there who start a business and then decide to shut down is they are not prepared for the mental toughness that is required to run a business.” (10:09-10:21)

• “Running a business can be as easy as you want it to be and can be as difficult as you want it to be. It's all a matter of perspective.” (11:50-11:59)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Is Fear Stopping Your Growth in Life and in Business?

Thu, 28 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0300

“If fear is not serving you, why are you continuing to let it stop you from living your best life?” asks host May Yeo Silver. On today’s episode, May offers tips on how to take control of your business and stop living in fear.

According to May, the foundation of fear is failure. Between personal experiences and observations of others, too many adults are conditioned to assume that they will fail. Even though failure is a natural part of life, May explains that it doesn’t need to be detrimental to your success. Rather than dwelling on the possibility of failure, May consistently places herself in uncomfortable situations. By doing so, May has become comfortable with her failures and has transformed them into the catalysts for her success.

At the end of the day, you are the only one in control of your success. Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™ to learn how to accept failures, overcome fears, and take inspired actions that will build your business.

Quotes

• “As adults, we have been so tainted by our previous experience and also our observations of what's happening in the world that we naturally assume that it's going to happen to us as well.” (01:18-01:33)

• “The reason why people have fear is because the common denominator is failure.” (01:45-01:53)

• “Understand that living in the past is not going to serve you in the future.” (05:51-05:55)

• “We are all programmed differently, so don't assume someone's failure is going to be the same as yours.” (07:42-07:47)

• “If you know your ‘why,’ you will always take inspired actions.” (09:48-09:51)

• “The more I expose myself to the unknown and get used to being very uncomfortable, I get used to being comfortable being uncomfortable, and fear is no longer a factor.” (12:42-12:54)

• “If fear is not serving you, why are you continuing to let it stop you from living your best life?” (13:12-13:24)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The Myths About What You Need to Start an Event Planning Business

Thu, 21 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0300

Host May Yeo Silvers has owned her event planning business since 2012. As an expert in the field, May can’t help but become frustrated by all of the misinformation being shared by others in the industry. In today’s episode, May busts common myths surrounding what you need to have in order to start your own event planning company.

Whether it be owning your own inventory, office space or venue, May explains that you don’t need any of it to start a business. In fact, it is actually a waste of your money. As we all know, time is money, and when you are first getting started, it is crucial that you are picky about where you are incurring costs. May stresses that it doesn’t make any sense to spend money before you make money, and owning any of these things comes with more costs than benefits. In order to best save your time and money, May suggests renting inventory, booking out a venue, and meeting your clients either in public or at the venue itself.

Tune into this week’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™ to hear May bust more myths that are floating around the industry. Learn the truth about what it takes to get started from an expert in the field and how to cut down on costs, so you can focus on what’s most important: starting a business that can thrive.

Quotes

• “No, you do not need to own inventory. Why? You aren’t an event rental company, you’re an event planner.” (02:22-02:37)

• “If you want to copycat, find the right cat to copy!” (03:24-03:26)

• “By the time you calculate how much you're spending on owning the inventory vs. your time, you will end up actually making very little money or losing money.” (07:25-07:40)

• “If you say that your dream is to own a venue so that you can provide your event planning services in conjunction with the venue, great! But if you're first starting your business, why do you need to own a venue?” (08:00-08:11)

• “Your job as an event planner is to plan events, not to own a venue. So be very clear about exactly what type of business you want to build.” (08:42-08:51)

• “People buy from you because they like you. People want to work with you because they trust you, and they trust that you can do what you say you can do. They want to work with you because they like you because your personality is a match. What is the point of having a certification if you have zero experience in planning an event?” (12:08-12:37)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

The People You Surround Yourself With Are Instrumental to Your Success in Life and in Business

Thu, 21 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0300

“You have to stand up and tell them that you may not support my dream, but please do not stop me from fulfilling my dream,” says host May Yeo Silvers. On today’s episode, May dives into the importance of having supportive people a priority in your life, and how this directly impacts your business success story.

May encourages her listeners to surround themselves with successful people because they will be able to guide you through their mistakes, so you make less of your own. The business owners who persevered and didn't let their mistakes weigh them down are living proof that a company’s failures can eventually turn into something incredibly successful. May explains that when you take on this mentality, you will outgrow the people who doubted you and invite the people into your life that fully support you and your dreams.

Tune into today’s episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™ for a conversation about having supportive people a priority in your life and business. Learn about May’s secret to never having a bad day at work, how to completely get rid of energy suckers, and why surrounding yourself with millionaires might make you one!

Quotes

• “We always have people who think very differently, people who support our dreams and people who say that we're crazy chasing after our dreams.” (02:53-03:00)

• “When you're building your business, there will be unexpected roadblocks or expected roadblocks.” (03:44-03:50)

• “I always say that if you put healthy food in your mouth, you should start putting healthy thoughts in your mind.” (09:58-10:06)

• “You have to stand up and create a boundary and tell them that you may not understand my vision, you may not support my dream. But please do not stop me from dreaming.” (12:09-12:21)

• “Success is not permanent. Failure is not permanent. You have the choice to create your own destiny, you have the choice to make any environment the way you want it to be. So, everything is a learning lesson.” (13:45-13:59)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

Having A CEO Schedule that Works for You & Your Business

Thu, 21 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0300

Are you an entrepreneur struggling to find the time to invest in your business? Do you find balancing your personal life and professional dreams an impossible task?

In today's episode of The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™, host May Yeo Silvers describes how to create a "CEO Schedule" that successfully merges your personal and business lives. By honestly evaluating your current lifestyle, you can determine which hours you can devote to raising brand awareness and boosting sales. Although May recognizes that it isn't feasible to do everything at once, she explains how completing the actions you are inspired to do first will put you on the path to professional success.

Tune into this week's episode to hear how May created a CEO schedule that works for her lifestyle and business. Learn how it's possible to have a family, full-time job and dream as long as you take the consistent steps needed to get to where you want to go.

Quotes

• “Once you understand why you're doing what you're doing, what motivates you to have this business, why you want to have this business, no matter how tired you are or when you say that you don't have time, you will make time to do what you need to do to grow the business, because that becomes your priority.” (2:20 - 2:40)

• “I teach my clients inside my mentorship program to make a CEO schedule. What exactly is a CEO schedule? It's a schedule that is going to mash your personal life and also your business life together.” (3:11-3:27)

• “Start with your current lifestyle. Start with your current schedule and see what we can tweak. What can we add? What can we take out?” (9:04 - 9:15)

• “You don't have to do everything at one time, you just have to do that one thing that is going to drive sales, that is going to drive your brand visibility, that's going to get you out there to talk to people. That one thing that you are most comfortable doing and have the least resistance and it comes easiest for you.” (12:15 - 12:37)

• “What are the ‘inspire actions’? That means when you're doing that task, you don't feel that it's a drag, because you're inspired to do what you need to do to get you to where you want to be.” (17:06 - 17:19)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com

Podcast production and show notes provided by HiveCast.fm

FB private group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/events4anyone

What To Expect From The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ Podcast

Tue, 19 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0300

Are you an entrepreneur looking to turn your passion for event planning into a full-time job? Are you unsure of how to connect your emotions, thought processes and subconscious mind to your business? Then The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur™ Podcast is for you!

Join host May Yeo Silvers, a multiple 6-figure event planning veteran, as she brings you the strategies you need to align your emotions with your actions. In this premiere episode, May explains that there is no right or wrong way to do things, and she doesn’t expect anyone to follow exactly in her footsteps. Instead, she hopes to share her own journey, interactions and experiences with her listeners, so they can gain valuable takeaways from her successes and her missteps.

Tune into today’s episode to hear more about what to expect from The Unstoppable Eventrepreneur Podcast™. Learn about how May got started in the events planning industry, the importance of aligning your goals and your subconscious mind, and the three key principles that have launched May to success!

Quotes

• “I want to share with you about the journey you can expect while you’re building your business: the ups, the downs, the happiness, the sadness, the frustration.” (03:04-03:12)

• “Come listen with an open heart and an open mind because you don’t know what you don’t know.” (03:36-03:42)

• “Don’t be afraid to go after what you want.” (07:50-07:52)

• “Trust your gut. Every single decision I make in my business especially, I trust my gut and my intuition….If you take too long to make a decision, the opportunity might not be there anymore.” (09:32-10:07)

• “In life, there will be setbacks, there will be obstacles that will not allow you to have your way….Every time you’re down, you have to get up each time. And every time you get up, you better get up fast. Because if you don’t get up and you give up, then you’re actually not made for having a business. And if you take your time to get up very slowly, you lose the momentum. And when you lose your momentum, it’s very difficult to build up that momentum again.” (13:30-14:19)

• “Nothing is ever stable. It is our responsibility and our choice to create an environment that is safe to protect your business.” (17:15-17:28)

• “Entrepreneurship will challenge you to become very uncomfortable, so you better get used to feeling uncomfortable really fast.” (20:10-20:20)

Links

Connect with me at: may@events4anyone.com

Website: events4anyone.com